Home

PROFIBUS-DP Master Module User`s Manual

1. Setare ee a ees 26433 6741H Set the FDL address of the DP Slave to which ACK is to be returned Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 Set the alarm data No for which ACK is to be returned b15 to b8 b7 to bO 00 Fixed See below Bit Description bO Execution instruction to alarm data No 1 26434 6742H b1 Execution instruction to alarm data No 2 b2 Execution instruction to alarm data No 3 b3 Execution instruction to alarm data No 4 b4 Execution instruction to alarm data No 5 b5 Execution instruction to alarm data No 6 b6 Execution instruction to alarm data No 7 b7 Execution instruction to alarm data No 8 7 35 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request PROGRAMMING M als 26 lA orcs 2 Response format a When normally completed W gt Table7 34 Response Format When Normally Completed o Buffer memory address Result 26446 674EH A response code is stored Stored value A501H 2 The FDL address of the DP Slave that returned ACK is stored 2 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 s2 The alarm data read completion status and the ACK response completion status are stored EE Ae b15 to b8 b7 to bO 2 1 1 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored s zZ fe Description i Description lt Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data N
2. 2 XIB XID XIF X20 x0 ERN g 1 HF F Top HO 1 K980 JKN KI Yo Co J xo X1B XID XIF 1 H rdi mo gt 1 M100 g ci 2N i FROM HO Iko p Kax10o0 KI AY EE Ay M100 e s t TO Ho K960 kioo KI gt Wa Change the buffer memory address in the input area Change the buffer memory address in the output area XIB XID XIF x20 x0 APRN i 1 r F TOP HO 1K14336 1 KAY100 KI YO Co a x0 XIB XID XIF I 1 r g qmo Y W100 o N H FROM HO 1 K6144 K4x100 KI N W100 PSSN f To HO 1k14336 1 K4Y100 KI Figure App 10 Changing Input and Output Areas App 17 Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEG TA eres d Changing a program for input and output data Relevant sample programs Section 7 1 7 2 7 3 and 7 4 In the following example the sample program in section 7 2 is replaced TROUBLESHOOTING 1 H E 00 t X101 Processing at input data reception Processing at output data reception M100 2 X30 0 a yi00 X 9 a X31 p Y101 Y Add the program for reading the each station status from Slave status area Normal communication detection Add the status read from Slave status area Normal communication detection to the interlock oo FROM HO K23040 D2000 KI
3. MELSEC TA eries DP Slave Bus terminator Figure 1 1 PROFIBUS DP Using QJ71PB92V Continued Remark Sooo ooo ooo The QJU71PB92V has a function for replacing the QU71PB92D with the QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D compatible function When the QJ71PB92D has failed replace it with the QU71PB92V using the QJ71PB92D compatible function Table1 1 Reference Manuals PROFIBUS DP Master Module User s PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s P cia Manual Manual aaa Using the functions of the E QJ71PB92V Details Replacing the QJ71PB92D with the QJ71PB92V using the Details QJ71PB92D compatible function eeeeeeeceaeveeeeeoeaeeoenseeaeceaeseeaeaeeaeee eee eaeseeceaeseeeeaeeeeaeeaeaee eee 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features MELSEC IA series The following describes the features of the QJ71PB92V 1 DP Master Class 1 on PROFIBUS DP The QJ71PB92V complies with IEC 61158 and operates as a DP Master Class 1 on PROFIBUS DP systems a Up to 125 DP Slaves are connectable Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QU71PB92V enabling exchange of I O data up to 8192 bytes lt gt Section 4 1 1 1 Up to 124 DP Slaves when the QU71PB92V is used in a redundant system Diagnostic information can be easily acquired Diagnostic or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on a DP Slave during I O data exchange can be easily acquired
4. Tracking cable J DP Slave FDL address 2 Bus terminator Bus terminator SPECIFICATIONS DP Slave FDL address 3 DP Slave FDL address 30 LE E E Pi vV DP Slave 29 modules Repeater 1 1 Repeater 1 2 FUNCTIONS Segment 2 DP Slave DP Slave sassis DP Slave FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 60 M V p DP Slave 30 modules Figure 2 8 When Using Redundant and Non Redundant DP Slaves PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION EJPOINT Using repeaters redundant DP Slaves and non redundant ones must be separately connected to different segments PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 13 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 2 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEG lA orie 2 4 Checking the Function Version and Serial No This section explains how to check the function version and serial No of the QJ71PB92V 1 Checking the Rating plate on the side of the module The serial No and function version of the module are printed in the SERIAL section of the rating plate MELSEC G MITSU MODEL Serial No Upper 5 digits Function version Conformed standard wa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN Figure 2 9 Rating Plate
5. Error Code Error Description Action Check the PROFIBUS cable wiring status and start completion status of the DP Slave and then retry When Acyclic communications have been continuously The DP Slave is not able to respond executed to the same DP Slave check the execution E59EH Or because of current processing of a Class2 service the DP Slave cannot handle the next service intervals and rety Slav i For the start completion status of the DP Slave and the Acyclic communication execution intervals refer to the manual for the DP Slave E59FH No response was received from the DP Slave Check the DP Slave status and retry Any of the following functions are being executed from the Verify that the processing of the following functions is same DP Master to the same DP Slave completed and retry E5A0H e Acyclic communication e Acyclic communication e Alarm acquisition Alarm acquisition FDT DTM technology FDT DTM technology E5A1H F Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure bie _ E5A2H explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 5 Error Codes 9 5 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms 9 22 0 Z E O e T D W a O ia APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING M LSet Q series 9 5 5 Error codes E6004 to E6FFu Error codes generated when executing time control Table9 8 Error codes E600H
6. 1 This indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequence program R Read only RW Read write executable ES POINT Do not write any data to System area Use prohibited Doing so may cause the programmable controller system to malfunction 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory list 3 20 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM n o Z O z o i O Mr o 5 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LY series 3 4 2 Local station information area The information of the local station QU71PB92V is stored in this area 1 Local station error information area Un G23071 This area stores the error information of the local station QU71PB92V Table3 9 Local Station Error Information Area Un G23071 Stored Value Description 0000H Normal Other than 0000H Error Error code 3 gt Section 9 5 6 POINT The information in the Local station error information area Un G23071 is not cleared even if the problem occurred on the QJ71PB92V has been solved To clear the Local station error information area Un G23071 turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 2 Current operation mode area Un G2254 This area stores the current operation mode value Table3 10 Current Operation Mode Area Un G2254 Stored Value Descripti
7. button Select Modules Used when setting equipment mounted on the DP Slave For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 13 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION eg Z E m W no oc W E W lt fa lt a PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 PARAMETER SETTING DP V1 Support enable M b DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Screen DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Alarms Update Alarm Status Alarm Manufacturer Specific Alarm MV DP V1 support enabled Watchdog timebase 1ms I Eail Safe function enabled I Slave specific check of cfg_data I Diagnostic Alarm Process Alarm P Pull Plug Alarm r Leave Figure 6 6 DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Screen Table6 7 DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Setting Items Item Description Check this checkbox to use the PROFIBUS DPV1 functions Not checked Not use the PROFIBUS DPV1 functions Checked Use the PROFIBUS DPV1 functions ELSECTE ories This setting is available when the DP Slave supports the PROFIBUS DPV1 functions Check this checkbox to set the Slave Watchdog time unit to 1 ms This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Watchdog timebase 1ms This setting is available when the master parameter Watchdog is unchecked Not checked 10 ms units Checked 1 ms units request
8. set for the odule QJ71PB92D 1 0 Mode QJ71PB92D ix R Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Higi ast Je Name PROFIBUS Master Baudrate 1 5 Mbps be Figure 4 38 Module to be Selected in a GX Configurator DP Project 2 When creating a new project Select QU71PB92D for the module Network Setup Select Module Type CPU Series Qnd A EX MELSEC Device QJ71PB92D PROFIBUS DP VO Master FERRRERRRRRRREEE Select QJ71PB92D PB93D PROFIBUS DP VO Slave f QJ71PB92D Mode 0 PROFIBUS DP VO Master Figure 4 39 Module to be Selected in a GX Configurator DP Project 4 44 4 9 QU71PB92D Compatible Function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEG LA series c When no matching module is identified in GX Configurator DP The following dialog box is displayed in GX Configurator DP 3 MELSOFT GX Configurator DP A No matching module Found in the given slot 0 2 Please check the slot number in your transfer setup and the module type Figure 4 40 When No Matching Module is Identified in GX Configurator DP 6 lt x ge If the above dialog box appears check if ie e The module selected in the GX Configurator DP project is QJ71PB92D 08 e The version of the GX Configurator DP is any other than Version 7 00A e The Module Slot setting in Transfer Setup of GX Configurator DP is correct e 6 d After operation with the QJ71PB92D compatible function enabled lt For details after the operation refer to the following manual 5 PROFIBUS DP
9. 2 Response format a When normally completed W gt Table7 44 Response Format When Normally Completed o Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0H A response code is stored Stored value A600H 26801 68B1H The year is stored E Stored value 1984 to 2036 3 2 26802 68B2x The month is stored EE Stored value 1 to 12 ao 26803 68B3H The day is stored Stored value 1 to 31 26804 68B4H The hour is stored Stored value 0 to 23 z 26805 68B5H The minute is stored E Stored value 0 to 59 T O 26806 68B6H The second is stored ie N Stored value 0 to 59 26807 68B7H 1 1000 second is stored Stored value 0 to 999 The UTC second year month day hour minute second is stored 26808 68B8h to The stored value 9DFF4400H represents January 1st in 1984 00 00 00 26809 68B9x 9 Stored value 9DFF4400H to FFFFFFFFH z 26810 68BAn to UTC nanosecond ms to ns setting is stored S 26811 68BBn Stored value 00000000H to FFFFFFFFH im The clock status is stored b15b14 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5b4 b3b2 bi bO 6 5 o 4 3 0 2 o l1 gus Zoek one 1 Synchronous setting with the time master is stored T aa 0 Not synchronize the time setting with that of the time master as 1 Synchronize the time setting with that of the time master Q FE 2 Time resolution minimum unit setting is stored Oo 00 1ms 01 10ms 10 100ms 2 26812 68BCH 11 1s S 3 Summer Winter time setting is stored 0 Winter time settin
10. 26649 6819H to 26688 6840H Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26729 6869H to 26648 6818H 26768 6890H 7 45 Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Failed the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 6750H is OFF 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK PROGRAMMING MELSEC A eres 7 5 4 Program example 1 Settings The example program in this section uses the following example requests Table7 39 Details of Program Example Item Description Service name Alarm read request with ACK DP Slave FDL address FDL address 1 2 Assignment of devices in program example The program examples in this section use the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 40 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description Alarm read response signal b Devices used by the user Table7 41 List of User Devices Device Description Device Description Refresh start request lt gt Section 7 1 1 c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 42 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device D4000 to D4321
11. 3 DP Slave FDL address 2 DP Slave FDL address 3 DP Slave FDL address 4 AJ95TB2 16T AJ95TB3 16D QJ71PB93D 2 Input 0 points Input 16 points Input 1 word E Output 16 points Output 0 points Output 2 words 2 g yn AJ95TB2 16T AJ95TB3 16D QU71PB93D Output data size byte 2 0 4 Input data size byte 0 2 2 Figure 3 42 System Configuration Example FUNCTIONS 1 TcpuA ms value TcpuA ms 5 3 8 ms 2 Tsw ms value Table3 32 Tsw ms value PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION The following is calculated based on the case where signal flow memory is not m tracked elime a 20 5 ms The following is calculated based on the case where redundant CPUs are used and the number of words to be auto refreshed is 5 g Tam 27 us 6 us x Number of words to be auto refreshed Tam ms 27 us 6 us x 5 word E 57 us 7 0 057 ms The following conditions are applied Signal flow memory is not tracked e No SFC program is executed e No PID control instructions PIDINIT S PIDINIT are executed e Tracking devices are DO to D31 32 points g Tro ms e Number of tracking blocks is 1 One tracking device range setting S s Trc 1 32 x 0 09 x 108 1 x 4x 10 1x 1x 103 1 00788 1 01 ms ha T 20 5 0 057 1 01 21 567 m TEAD sw 5 0 1 i ms i ae AZ 3 5 Processing Time
12. Fail Safe function This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function enable For the Fail Safe setting refer to the manual for the DP Slave Not checked Not placed into Fail Safe status Checked Placed into Fail Safe status Check this checkbox to place the DP Slave into the Fail Safe status when the DP Master sends a clear PROFIBUS standard Slave specific check of This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function cfg_data For the parameter check method refer to the manual for the DP Slave Not checked Checks parameters based on the PROFIBUS standard Checked Checks parameters by the DP Slave specific method Check this checkbox when the parameter check method for the DP Slave is different from that of the To the next page 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 14 6 PARAMETER SETTING M eLS 2G a series Table6 7 DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Setting Items Continued Item Description if gt Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Update Alarm i This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function o Update Alarm 3 ee a Not checked Disables transmission of the Update Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Update Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Status Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Status Alarm a E Not checked Disables transmission of the Statu
13. gt Section 9 6 Parameters of the QJ71PB92D were written with the QJ71PB92D compatible function disabled Change the module selected in the GX Configurator DP project to QU71PB92V and write the parameters Check Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches lt gt Section 6 7 Parameters of the QJ71PB92V were written with the QJ71PB92D compatible function enabled Change the module selected in the GX Configurator DP project to QU71PB92D and write the parameters e Check Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches lt gt Section 6 7 FAULT ON The FDL address of a DP Slave is duplicated with that of the DP Master in parameter settings Check the parameters gt Section 6 3 and 6 5 Parameters in the flash ROM are corrupted Initialize the QU71PB92V initialization of the flash ROM and write parameters again gt Section 9 6 An unexpected error other than the above has occurred Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 1 Depending on the number of DP Masters within the same network and the transmission speed setting the TOKEN LED seems to be unlit even in execution of token passing lt 5 Section 5 3 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions io Z E Q O ad ol W l faa 0 fid APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOO
14. 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system This is the time taken from when the control system QU71PB92V sends a system ai switching request to the redundant CPU until control is started with another QU71PB92V in i a new control system 2 System A System A System B System B QJ71PB92V Redundant CPU Redundant CPU QJ71PB92V l l Z ge Control system Control system Standby system Standby system fi g Z System switching 29 request oO System switching request System switching request 2 Z O z o i O M a o New standby system New standby system New control system New control system Figure 3 41 System Switching Time in Redundant System When QJ71PB92V Requests System Switching to Redundant CPU FUNCTIONS a Redundant system switching time calculation formula The system switching time in the redundant system can be obtained from either of the following calculation formulas e When the systems are not switched due to a slave error or when the system switching condition Un G23648 is set to OR the system switching time Tscu is PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Tscu ms TcpuA Tsw Tp Scan x 2 o E e When the system switching condition Un G23648 is set to AND the system 7 switching time Tsca is E Tsca ms Tscu Nand x 20 To the next page Z 5 z S g nO a ES Or 85 az 3 5 Processing Time 3 64 3 5 3 System switching time i
15. C Copy Instructions AutoRefresh Update of GID Project Figure 4 22 Automatic Refresh Setting GX Configurator DP To use the data consistency function by automatic refresh check the checkbox of the master parameter Consistency Master Settings Module QJ71PB92V Revision Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Name PROFIBUS Master Baudrate 15Mbps x FDL address 0 0 125 Starting 1 0 number ooo 0x0 0FE0 Error action flag M Goto Clear State Min slave interval fso 1 65535 100 ps Polling timeout 50 1 65535 1 ms Data control time T_wd 6 65535 10 ms I Watchdog Estimated bus cycle time Vv IV Consistency Watchdog for time sync 0 0 65535 10 ms Cancel Default Bus Param Figure 4 23 Automatic Refresh Setting GX Configurator DP aD Oooo ooo ooo ooo For the automatic refresh setting method refer to Section 6 6 2 eeeeeseevneeeeeeoeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 22 4 5 Data Consistency Function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC IA series b Data consistency function by dedicated instructions Use the BBLKRD read and BBLKWR write instructions as dedicated 3 instructions for reading writing QJ71PB92V buffer memory to execute the data 2 consistency function For details on dedicated instructions refer to Chapter 8 For program examples on the I O data exchange using dedicated instructions E refer to the following 23 e Single C
16. e Turning OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 turns OFF the Operation mode change completed signal X11 Remar eeoeseeeveeseeneeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeened For a program example for changing the operation mode refer to Section 7 1 1 eeeeeeececeaeeeeceoeeoeseeaesceeceaeeeeaeeeceeaesce eaoe eee eeseeeee eee e eee 6 4 6 2 Operation Mode Setting 6 PARAMETER SETTING 3 4 5 MELSEC A series Changing the operation mode by GX Configurator DP a Change method Change the operation mode at Module Configuration in GX Configurator DP For details refer to the GX Configurator DP Operating Manual b When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system The monitoring target is the QJ71PB92V which is mounted on the same base as the redundant CPU where GX Configurator DP is connected by RS 232 cable USB cable etc Error codes for the operation mode change failure If the operation mode change is unsuccessfully completed an error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 on the QU71PB92V For error codes refer to Section 9 5 2 Precautions when changing the operation mode a When the operation mode change is attempted during I O data exchange When the operation mode change is attempted during I O data exchange the QJ71PB92V stops I O data exchange before changing the operation mode The Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns OFF
17. 2 Set the time resolution minimum unit 00 ims 01 10ms 10 100ms 11 1s 3 Set summer or winter time 0 Set winter time 1 Set summer time 26792 68A8H 4 Set advance notice of summer winter time switching 0 Not switch between summer and winter times in an hour 1 Switches between summer and winter times in an hour 5 Set the time difference the time to be added or subtracted The value 0 means No addition or subtraction Set value 0 to 31 Unit x 0 5 hours 6 Set the time calculation method 0 Adds the time difference 1 Subtracts the time difference 7 53 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 3 Time data write request PROGRAMMING MELSEC A eres 2 Response format a When normally completed W gt Table7 50 Response Format When Normally Completed o Buffer memory address 26800 68B0H A response code is stored Stored value A602H 26801 68B1H to Empty area E 26812 68BCH Stored value 0000H z a Be b When failed 58 Table7 51 Response Format When Failed Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0H An error code is stored gt gt Section 9 5 5 2 26801 68B1H to Empty area E 2681 2 68BCH Stored value 0000H g N n zZz O E O Z T Zz Sge ee w a m TE m QFE eae ann PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slave
18. 9 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG lA orie 9 4 2 When the FAULT LED of the QJ71PB92V in the new control system is ON The following shows how to recover the QJ71PB92V in the new control system when its FAULT LED is ON Start While the redundant system is operating in Backup mode check that the QU71PB92V is running in the following status QJ71PB92V in new control system Normally operating QJ71PB92V in new standby system FAULT LED ON No Check the LEDS and the error code of the QU71PB92V in the new standby system and take corrective actions IL Section 9 5 Request the QU71PB92V restart Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the new standby system is not performed Perform maintenance of the QU71PB92V in the new stand by system 5 Section 9 4 3 Yes Y Change the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Separate mode in GX Developer 1 Set the new standby system CPU to RUN In the device test of GX Developer turn Restart request signal YOD OFF ON OFF to restart the QU71PB92V in the new standby system Did the FAULT LED of the QU71PB92V in the new standby system turn off Yes Y Set the new standby system CPU to STOP y Change the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Backup mode in GX Developer 1 e y Completed Figure 9 7 When the FAULT LED of the QJ71PB92V in the New Control System is ON
19. E POINT When acommurnication fails in Class 1 services due to the following being exchanged with DP Slaves may be initialized Inputs and outputs are turned OFF e Cable fault influence of noise gt Sections 5 5 1 and 5 5 2 e System switching occurred in redundant system Especially when this occurs in redundant system switching outputs of the relevant DP Slaves momentarily turn OFF Therefore fully examine if the system has no problem L gt Section 7 9 4 Remark Sooo occ oc ooo For program examples on the acyclic communication refer to the following e Single CPU system K gt Section 7 4 e Redundant system K gt Section 7 9 4 eeseeeeseseeoeoeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee eo SPECIFICATIONS n Zz z iL PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 13 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LA series 4 2 2 Alarm acquisition This function enables acquisition of up to 8 alarms or status information data that have been generated on any DP Slave DP Master Class 1 Power QJ71 supply QCPU pgg2 module l Alarm generation DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 8 Figure 4 10 Alarm Acquisition 1
20. ON OFF Data exchange start Y00 request signal ON Slave status area OFF Normal communication detection g z Figure 3 15 Operation in Slave Status Area Normal communication detection When I O data exchange o is normal m When an I O data communication error occurs on a DP Slave the corresponding bit turns OFF 0 and it turns ON 1 again when normal status is restored ON Data exchange start Y00 OFF o request signal z ON z 5 Slave status area OFF Q Normal communication detection 1 0 data exchange Restored from I O error occurred data exchange error 2 Figure 3 16 Operation in Slave Status Area Normal communication detection When I O data exchange ae error occurred E 8 T 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 30 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LY series 2 Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 This area stores the reserved or temporary slave reservation setting of each DP Slave Initial value 0000H 0 Normal DP Slave or not configured station 1 Reserved or temporary slave reservation Address DEC HEX 23048 5A08H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 514 3 2 1 23049 5A09x 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 23050 5A0An 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 23051 5A0Bu 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
21. gt 3 Saver 003 Q371PB93D E m W a z gt w lt L Figure 6 10 I O Mapping Dialog Box Tree View lt PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 19 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTING Item DUT Var Identifier MELSEC TA cries 2 Table view When selecting a module of DP Slaves in the tree view the following DUT element is displayed in the table view Table6 9 Setting item of table view Description Automatically creates and displays the name of the global variable instance of the DUT Identifier Displays name of the DUT element DUT Type Displays the data type of the DUT element or global variable Number Elements Displays the number of elements When this item is 2 or larger the element is an array Class Displays whether data to be treated is input or output data input Input data output Output data Global Var Identifier User MIT Address Sets any global variable name If set any global variable name can be used at the time of programming This item can be set when selecting the module of DP Slave from tree view Sets devices to be relayed when accessing to I O data in a program of GX IEC Developer Devices to be set cannot be duplicated with other modules Set devices so as not to be duplicated For details of User MIT Address refer to 2 c in this section This item can be set when selecting t
22. 1st module a in cy Diagnostic information z detection reset request X22 X1B XID XIF f R 9 f LSET v2 J Diagnostic D x2 y information area PRST Y2 1 clear request Figure 7 8 Program Example for Diagnostic Information Read c Program example for operation mode change Self diagnostics mode 2 When changing the operation mode using this program example do not change S the operation mode from GX Configurator DP r Y0 Y11 X11 X23 UO Writing of operation tpt gt gt t MOVP K2 G2255 mode z Self diagnostic mode Z T Q SET YU Operation mode change ok rs request x aa ao Z SET W2 7 SEE Too M2 X11 Y11 U0 H Hove 62256 D1100 Reading the operation mode change result D1100 HOA300 Processing for normal completion E RST Y J Operation mode change ui completion processing Ei Lu oO D1100 H0A300 Processing for error completion m z lt a Operation mode change completion processing nn lt Lo RST M2 J Operation mode change completion processing Figure 7 9 Program Example for Operation Mode Change Self diagnostics Mode PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 8 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh PROGRAMMING 7 1 2 Program example using dedicated instructions MELSEC TA cries This section explains a program in which the QJ71PB92V communicates with DP Slaves using dedicated in
23. CHAPTER9 TROUBLESHOOTING 9 1to9 28 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions 0cooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000 0 2 9 2 When Parameters cannot be Written from GX Configurator DP e eeeeeseeeeesceeeecccooeooscooeooscoooo0009 4 9 3 When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible cooooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000 0 6 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System eeseeeeeeeeceeecceccoccoccecceccocccoceocceceeccooccocceceeccoocoee9 8 9 4 1 When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switchinge eeeeseesesseeseeeeesessecsee9 8 9 4 2 When the FAULT LED of the QU71PB92V in the new control system is ON eseeeeeseesseseeseese09 9 9 4 3 Maintenance of the QU71PB92V in the standby systemMe e seseeseeseeseesecseeceececeeceesoesoeseeee 9 10 9 5 Error Codes COC OCOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOS OOOO OOO OOOO SOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OO OOO OOOO OOO OS OOOO OOOO OC OOOOOOS 9 S 12 9 5 1 Error codes E200H to E2FFH Error codes generated when reading extended diagnostic information 9 13 9 5 2 Error codes E300H to E3FFH 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated when switching operation mode ee 9 14 Error codes generated during acyclic communication eesss 9 15 9 5 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 9 20 9 5 5 Error codes E600H to E6FFH Error codes generated when executing time Cont
24. DP Slave DP Slave Figure 4 32 System Switching due to DP Slave Error To switch the systems due to an error in communication with a DP Slave specify the system switching target DP Slaves in the following buffer memory e System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 L gt Section 3 4 14 Remark Sooo ooo For the program example for setting the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 refer to Section 7 9 1 eeeeeeseeaeeeeeoeeeceeceaecenoeeseeeeeceee see eeceaeceaeeeeeeeeeaeeeee ee 7 Z e e Z U PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 33 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LA series POINT 1 With a communication error identified in a system switching target DP Slave after system switching no system switching is performed even if a communication error occurs in another DP Slave To perform system switching again restore all of the switching target DP Slaves to normal condition The DP Slave status can be confirmed in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 L gt Section 3 4 5 1 It is any of all the DP Slaves that are specified in the System switching DP Slave specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 Control system Standby system New
25. Q00J Q00 Q01CPU 256 Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU 256 Q12PH Q25PHCPU 256 Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU 256 Q03UD Q04UDH QO6UDHCPU 2048 2 Number of automatic refresh parameter settings for the QJ71PB92V The number of automatic refresh parameter settings for the QJU71PB92V varies depending on the automatic refreshing setting method for I O data a When Block Transfer is used When the automatic refresh of I O data is set by Block Transfer i e I O data of all DP Slaves are refreshed into the same kind of device up to five automatic refresh parameters can be set per QU71PB92V PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings CPU Device Access Buffer Devices C Slave Specific Transfer Block Transfer Comm Trouble Area Extd Comm Trouble Area Slave Status Area Data Transfer using C Copy Instructions AutoRefresh Update of CPU C AutoRefresh Update of GID Project sil GX IEC Developer GID Settings DO D15 D5000 D5015 D10000 D10249 D10300 D10426 D10500 D10524 Up to 5 automatic refresh parameters can be set Figure 6 12 Number of Automatic Refresh Parameter Settings When Set by Block Transfer 6 22 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 4 Number of set automatic refresh parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEG TA eres b When Slave Specific Transfer is used When the automatic refresh of I O data i
26. Set a value for the DP Slave that needs the longest time Setting range 1 to 65535 Unit x 100 us Default 80 x 100 us Polling timeout Set the maximum time required for a requester to receive the response in communication between DP Masters Setting range 1 to 65535 Unit x 1 ms Default 50 x 1 ms Data control time Set the time during which the QJ71PB92V notifies of the DP Slave operation status Set a value of 6 times or more the watchdog timer set value of the DP Slave Setting range 1 to 65535 Unit x 10 ms Default 100 x 10 ms Watchdog Slave Watchdog time Check this checkbox to enable the watchdog timer on all DP Slaves When the Watchdog checkbox is checked in the master parameter setting Watchdog in the slave parameters cannot be set Not checked The watchdog timer setting of all DP Slaves is disabled Checked The watchdog timer setting of all DP Slaves is enabled Set a watchdog timer value for all DP Slaves This setting is available when Watchdog is checked The set value must satisfy the following condition e Bus cycle time lt Set value of Slave Watchdog time lt Set value of Data control time 6 e When the QU71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system set an appropriate value so that the formula shown in Section 4 8 5 is satisfied Setting range 1 to 65025 Unit x 10 ms Default 5 x 10 ms Estimated bus cycle time A reference value for bus cycle time which is
27. The information in the other buffer memory areas is held z e Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to u Un G23047 e Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to z Un G23064 2 z S g 85 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 6 25 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEG LY series 2 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 Diagnostic information detection signal X01 a The Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns ON when a communication error is detected after the time preset in Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 has elapsed The following processing is performed at the same time that the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns ON e The RSP ERR LED turns ON The diagnostic information is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 The extended diagnostic information is stored in the Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e The corresponding bit in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 of the station that sent the diagnostic information turns ON e The error information of the QU71PB92V is stored in the Local station error information area Un G23071 g Turning ON the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal
28. This area is used for the global control function 1 Global control area Un G2081 a Set the global control function to be executed Specify the global control service to be sent by bits b5 to b2 in the Global control area and set the target group No by bits b15 to b8 Initial value 0000H 0 Not execute 1 Execute ECN b15 to bO 2081 821n See below bit Description Initial value Reference Section bO Unused Fixed to 0 0 b1 Unused Fixed to 0 0 b2 H i Retention of the actual input data is 0 K b b3 FREEZE Actual input data is held and read 0 b4 UNSYNC Retention of the actual input data is 0 disabled b5 SYNC Actual output data is written and held 0 b6 Unused Fixed to 0 0 b7 Unused Fixed to 0 0 b8 Executed on DP Slaves in group 1 0 b9 Executed on DP Slaves in group 2 0 b10 Executed on DP Slaves in group 3 0 b11 Executed on DP Slaves in group 4 0 K7 0 b12 Executed on DP Slaves in group 5 0 b13 Executed on DP Slaves in group 6 0 b14 Executed on DP Slaves in group 7 0 b15 Executed on DP Slaves in group 8 0 Figure 3 28 Global Control Area Un G2081 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 44 3 4 9 Global control area OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM n o Z O Q 3 O w a 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 S
29. initial value 0 seconds The non notification time is set in the Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 Table3 16 Current diagnostic Information Non notification Time Area Un G2085 A countdown time remaining time during which no diagnostic information 0 to 65535 is notified is stored Unit seconds No diagnostic information is notified until the value reaches 0 When the time set in the Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 has elapsed after communication start after Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON the value in the Current diagnostic information non notification time area Un G2085 becomes 0 While communication is stopped Data exchange start request signal YOO OFF the remaining time is held until the Data exchange start request signal YOO is turned ON again 3 37 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M aLS AG A i Figure 3 24 Diagnostic Information Invalid Setting Area Un G2080 3 Diagnostic information invalid setting area Un G2080 Setting some values to this area can mask invalidate any data of the diagnostic z information that is sent from a DP Slave during communication Initial value 02B9 35 0 Validates the diagnostic information 1 Invalidates the diagnostic information Address 6 DEC
30. 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 96 95 94 93 92 112 111 110 109 108 91 107 90 106 89 105 88 104 87 103 86 102 85 101 84 100 83 99 82 98 81 97 1 1 1 11251124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23615 5C3Fu are fixed to 0 Figure 3 33 Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series When the Data exchange start request signal Y00 is turned ON the DP Slaves specified in the Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 become temporary slave reservation z j gt Temporary gt ave ieee Ivete Specifies temporary slave reservation s o request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 ON OFF Z Data exchange start request signal Y00 E ec ON z OFF pE Data exchange start completed signal X00 292 fe ee oy A i Executes lt temporary slave reservation S n Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 and Stores status data 2 Z O z o i O M a o Temporary
31. D2126 D2500 to For word conversion of extended diagnostic error 5 D2502 information data size 1 Varies depending on the data size of the extended diagnostic error information QW Zee 2 Program example Paes W crua X24 y6 U0 The target FDL address POS uny G H ae MOV KI 623456 J is set to 1 gee Too ra Extended diagnostic val 14 J information read request X6 vG uoy Pa The read result and data it 1 Boy 423457 D2000 K2 Bil dize is read g u0 Reads the stat E r ae ee PP eads the status i I D2000 H0A200 Bmov 623459 D2002 K3 information and FDL A address m D2001 K2 D2500 J z Reads the extended t D2500 D2501 D2502 diagnostic error information 7 U0 BMOV 623462 D2005 D2502 J z Extended diagnostic error g RST V6 J information read z Processing for completion processing failure of extended amp ts a E O gt 2000 HOAZ00 h on ye diagnostic error E ded di information read xten et iagnostic error RST 7 J information read completion processing Figure 7 12 Program Example for Acquisition of Extended Diagnostic Error Information DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 2 Program Example for Acquisition of Extended Diagnostic Error Information 7 12 PROGRAMMING MELSEG ores 7 3 Program Example for Global Control Function 1 Assignment of devices in program examples The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V T
32. Ll I Output data Output area Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 H L H L H L espe 4 Data4 Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 ataarea H l L H l L H l L L L L Y I O data exchange H High byte L Low byte Figure 4 18 When Invalidating the Data Swap Setting For DP Slaves that handle data whose word structure is the reverse of the QJ71PB92V validate the data swap setting QJ 71PB92V DP Slave Input data Input area Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 H l L 9 L l H L H ie inputdata J S32 pata C J Data 2 Data 2 Data 2 Data 2 area H l Z yy L H 1 5 1 E Ee v Output data Output area lo Data 3 Data 3 P Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 H l W D L l H L H a a a Output lt Data4 Data 4 j Data 4 Data 4 T Data 4 Data 4 data area H l w L l h L l H 1 l 1 aS Se I O data exchange H High byte L Low byte Figure 4 19 When Validating the Data Swap Setting 4 20 4 4 Data Swap Function 4 Functions M als 26 Fel series 4 5 Data Consistency Function When I O data from DP Slaves are read from or written to buffer memory this function prevents the I O data from being separated and incorrectly mixed 1 I O data consistency function a The PROFIB
33. Not needed when the initial setting is not changed W400 X1B X1D XIF x0 Yo 4 4 Ppp fotos Woy K20 c 2 RST X1B XID X1F X20 xO uoy a 4 4 FHOVP KO 614336 Yo 1k Figure 7 6 I O Data Exchange Program Examples Automatic Refresh 7 7 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh M400 uoy G2080 UO G2084 UO 623608 M400 K96 1 Turn ON the initial setting execution command q Initializes Diagnostic info invalid setting area 1 Initializes Diagnostic info non notification time setting area 1 Specifies the 2nd temporary slave reservation I Turn OFF the initial setting execution command Writes the initial output data value I O data exchange start processing PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres a Program example for control of DP Slaves MO D200 0 D0 0 Input processing of input data in 1 a 1st word b0 DO Input processing of input data amp 1st word b1 MO D200 0 X30 3 i mov K100 D100 Writing to output data 1st word X31 a z mov K500 D101 Writing to output data 2 2nd word o Figure 7 7 Program Example for Control of DP Slaves rs as b Program example for diagnostic information read 1 D217 0 UO _ Reading the H BMOY 623072 D1000 K2 J diagnostic information
34. Operation mode Description Operation Mode Change Request GX Configurator DP Area Un G2255 The parameters set on GX Configurator DP are written to Parameter setting mode QJ71PB92V in this mode mode 1 When no operation mode has been written to the flash o o ROM the QJ71PB92V starts up in this mode Self diagnostic mode mode The unit test on the QJ71PB92V is performed in this mode 2 37 Section 5 4 2 O Communication mode I O data exchange with DP Slaves is performed in this mode 3 mode O O This mode is used to return the QJ71PB92V to the factory Flash ROM clear mode gt O O default status gt Section 9 6 O Can be changed X Cannot be changed 2 Operation mode change using the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 Perform the following procedure when changing the operation mode from the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 a Write a value for a desired operation mode into the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 L gt Section 3 4 3 b Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 c The Operation mode change completed signal X11 turns ON when the operation mode is changed and the result of the change is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 d Make sure that A3004 Normally completed is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 and turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11
35. PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING jee 2 Z is S T 2 Z 1p D 07 41 B 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC lA orie 8 2 G BBLKRD Table8 3 Device Usable in the BBLKRD Instruction Usable device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent index Set data System user File ENEI function Constant register register fe K H nt O O T O n2 O O 2 Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G BBLKRD _ BBLKRD un mn m Figure 8 3 BBLKRD Instruction Set data Table8 4 Set Data in the BBLKRD Instruction Set data Description Setting range Data type QJ71PB92V module start I O number Un a f O 0 to FEH Upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3 digit notation BIN 16 bits ni Start address of reading data Specified device range D Start No of the device to which read data are stored Specified device range Device name n2 Number of read data 1 to 4096 word BIN 16 bits Function This instruction allows data reading from the buffer memory of a specified module with data consistency ensured Error An operation error occurs in the following instances Error code 4101 e When a value outside the setting range is set to the set data field e When the size which is obtained
36. Section 4 1 3 3 group synchronous control of DP Slave I O data is available Ww N PROFIBUS DPV1 _ Acyclic communication This function allows data reading writing to DP Slaves at any specific timing Section 4 2 1 with DP Slaves independently of I O data exchange SM This function enables acquisition of up to 8 alarms or status information data that have Alarm acquisition Section 4 2 2 been generated on any DP Slave g Support of FDT DTM Using a commercially available FDT reading writing the DP Slave parameters and Section 4 2 3 Q technology monitoring the DP Slave status are executable via the QJ71PB92V aie z U PROFIBUS DPV2 2 Time control over DP This function allows the QJ71PB92V to operate as the time master and set the time of Section 4 3 1 Slaves each DP Slave _ Awe This function swaps the upper and lower bytes in word units when I O data is sent and ZS Data swap function P PP y Section 4 4 aie received won When I O data from DP Slaves are read from or written to the buffer memory this age F function prevents the I O data from being separated and incorrectly mixed SE Data consistency function Section 4 5 cw gt y e Automatic refresh setting GX Configurator DP EO e Dedicated instructions BBLKRD BBLKWR This function sets whether to stop or continue I O data exchange with DP Slaves when s a CPU stop error occurs on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QJ71PB92V is Output status setting for the i E case of a
37. Section 6 3 Modde JOPE Esimated bus cycle me Make sure the box is unchecked Figure 8 2 Data Consistency in Automatic Refresh 2 The BBLKRD and BBLKWAR instructions must be used in pair Use the BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions as a pair and always execute them once for every sequence scan If only one of these instructions is used an error code is stored in the Local station error information area Un G23071 gt Section 9 5 6 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC IA series 3 Execution timing Execute the BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions all the time While the QJ71PB92V is implementing the data consistency function the dedicated instruction is not processed not executed lt gt Section 4 5 Therefore I O data may not be read or written in a program where either of the instructions is executed only once at the rising or falling edge of the pulse OVERVIEW 4 When mounted on MELSECNET H remote I O station Dedicated instructions are not executable when the QU71PB92V is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 5 Transmission delay time when using a dedicated instruction Use of the data consistency function increases the transmission delay time C Section 3 5 2 6 QCPUs available when using dedicated instructions For QCPUs supporting the dedicated instruction refer to Section 2 1 SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS
38. X03 Use prohibited O Global control completed signal X04 ON Global control completed O OFF Global control not completed Global control failed signal X05 ON Global control failed O OFF Global control normally completed Extended diagnostic information read response X06 signal Use prohibited oO ON Completed OFF Not completed X07 Use prohibited O X08 Use prohibited O X09 Use prohibited O E X0A Use prohibited oO a X0B Use prohibited oO a Data consistency requesting signal ON Data consistency ve h X0C enabiEd Use prohibited oO OFF Data consistency disabled Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible To the next page App 6 Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs XOD APPENDICES Signal name QJ71PB92V Use prohibited TableApp 5 Input Signal Comparisons Continued QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D Watchdog timer error signal ON Watchdog timer error occurred OFF Watchdog timer error not occurred Compa tibility MELSEC TA cries Replacement precautions When replacing the A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D refer to 1 shown below XOE Use prohibited O XOF Use prohibited O Operation mode signal ON Pia dian Operation mode signal The operation mode in X10 Os ON Parame
39. switch setting of GX Developer lt gt Section 6 7 o Z O z o i O r o 5 Table3 22 Standby Master FDL Address Display Area Un G2264 FUNCTIONS Set Value Description 0000H to 007DH The FDL address of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system 0 to 125 e Parameter not registered e The QJ71PB92V is not mounted to a redundant system FFFFH PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 54 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries 3 System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system this area is used to set the switching target DP Slaves Initial value 0000n a System switching condition Un G23648 Set AND or OR as a condition for the setting in the System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 0 OR condition If a communication error occurs on any of the specified DP Slaves the systems are switched 1 AND condition If a communication error occurs on all of the specified DP Slaves the systems are switched b System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 Set the target DP Slaves for the system switching Initial value 00004 0 Not system switching target 1 System switching target Address DEC HEX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10
40. 10 No error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 11 Error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 2 Whether individual ACK is required or not is stored 0 No ACK return from the user is required 1 ACK return from the user is required 3 Sequence No is stored Stored value 0 to 31 The alarm data are stored b15 b8 b7 bO 26453 6755x Alarm data 2nd byte Alarm data 1st byte 26454 6756x Alarm data 4th byte Alarm data 3rd byte to 26484 6774y Alarm data 64th byte Alarm data 63rd byte Empty area Stored value 0000H 26489 6779h to 26528 67A0h 26529 67A1H to Alarm data No 2 Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8H 26569 67C9H to 26608 67F0H Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26648 681 8H Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 26649 6819H to 26688 6840H Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26729 6869h to 26609 67F1H to 26768 6890H 7 33 Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK PROGRAMMING MELSEC A eres b When failed Table7 32 Response Format When Failed Buff
41. 2 Checking through GX Developer The following explains how to check the serial No and function version of the module through GX Developer The serial No and function version are displayed on the Product information list or Module s Detailed Information screen of GX Developer The procedure for checking the serial No and function version on the Product information list screen is shown below Start Procedure Diagnostics System monitor Product inf list Product Information List QO3UDCPU QU71LPB92V 32pt 0000 None None CSY file creating Figure 2 10 Product Information List 2 4 Checking the Function Version and Serial No 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC IA series Serial No Ver Product No e The serial No of the module is displayed in the Serial No column e The function version of the module is displayed in the Ver column e The serial No Product No shown on the rating plate is displayed in the 1 OVERVIEW Product No column Note that is displayed in the Product No column for the QJ71PB92V since this module is not supporting Product No display N 1 The Product No is displayed in the column only when the Universal model QCPU is used EJPOINT The serial No shown on the rating plate may not match with the one displayed on Product information list of GX Developer e The serial No on the rating plate indicates the management informat
42. 2 Ptw ms value Table3 25 Pt i Value DP Slave Item AJ95TB2 16T FDL address 1 AJ95TB3 16D FDL address 2 QJ71PB93D FDL address 3 2 9 x 11 x 10 1 5 x 106 0 9 x 11 x 103 1 5 x 106 4 9 x 11 x 10 1 5 x 108 Treqa ms 0 081 0 066 0 095 Response time 150 150 150 Tai of i th station 150 x 10 1 5 x 10 0 1 150 x 108 1 5 x 106 0 1 150 x 10 1 5 x 10 0 1 Max_Tsdr ms 0 9 x 11 x 108 1 5 x 106 2 9 x 11 x 108 1 5 x 108 2 9 x 11 x 10 1 5 x 10 Tresa ms 0 066 0 081 0 081 Ptw ms 0 081 0 1 0 066 0 247 0 066 0 1 0 081 0 247 0 095 0 1 0 081 0 276 GED 3 Tsdi m ms value Request response processing time Tsi of DP Master QU71PB92V 200 Tsdi m ms 200 x 10 1 5 x 10 0 13 4 Lr ms value Lr ms 5 50 3 x 150 x 10 5 95 Using the values obtained in above 2 to 4 3 2 Pt i Tsdi m Lr Pt 1 Tsdi my Pt 2 Tsdi m Pt 3 Tsdi u Lr i 0 377 0 377 0 406 5 95 1 16 5 95 7 11 Therefore the bus cycle time Bc value is as follows 3 Bc ms Max MSI P7 Pta Tsdi m Lr Max 8 7 11 8 ms 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time 3 60 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO o Z O z o i O Mr o 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIF
43. 26785 68A1H to 26786 68A2H b15b14 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5b4 b3b2 bi bO 6 5 0 l4 a o 2 o l1 1 Set the synchronous setting with the time master 0 Not synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 1 Synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 2 Set the time resolution minimum unit 00 ims 01 10ms 10 100ms 11 1s 3 Set summer or winter time 0 Set winter time 1 Set summer time 26789 68A5H 4 Set advance notice of summer winter time switching 0 Not switch between summer and winter times in an hour 1 Switches between summer and winter times in an hour 5 Set the time difference the time to be added or subtracted The value 0 means No addition or subtraction Set value 0 to 31 Unit x 0 5 hours 6 Set the time calculation method 0 Adds the time difference 1 Subtracts the time difference 26790 68A6x to Empty area Write 0000H 26792 68A8h Set value Fixed to 0000H 7 51 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 2 Time data write request UTC format PROGRAMMING MELSEC A eres 2 Response format a When normally completed W gt Table7 47 Response Format When Normally Completed o Buffer memory address 26800 68B0H A response code is stored Stored value A601H 26801 68B1H to Empty area E 26812 68BCH Stored value 0000H z a Be b When failed 58
44. 3 3H The read slot No is stored Stored value 0 to 254 4 4H The read index is stored Stored value 0 to 255 The read data are stored When the read data length is shorter than the length specified in the request format Os are stored in the empty area When the read data length is longer than the length specified in the request format only data of the specified data length are stored b15 b8 b7 bO 5 5H to 124 7CH 5 51 Data 2 Data 1 6 6H Data 4 Data 3 to 124 7CH Data 240 Data 239 125 7Dh to Empty area 127 7FH Stored value 0000H 7 17 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING 26 el series b When failed Table7 17 Response Format When Failed lt Offset Address Result i 0 OH An error code is stored gt Section 9 5 3 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 z f 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored g Stored value 00H to 7D 0 to 125 Ei bae 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE 2e 1 1H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 2 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored O Stored value 00H to 7D 0 to 125 lt m 2 The CommRef No is stored g Stored value 00x to 7Ex 0 to 126 5 1 When E4034 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H 2 42h Detailed error code 1 is s
45. 3 13 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 10 Operation mode change request signal Y11 Operation mode change completed signal X11 OVERVIEW a Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 when changing the operation mode to the one set in the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 The operation mode can be changed without resetting the QCPU b Turning ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 clears the information of the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 c The Operation mode change completed signal X11 turns ON when the operation mode is changed and the result of the change is stored to the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Ss ra Make sure that A300H Normally completed is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 and turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 e Turning OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 turns OFF the Operation mode change completed signal X11 2 Z O z o i O M a o Data exchange start request signal YOO Operation mode change request signal Y11 FUNCTIONS Operation mode change completed signal X11 Operation mode change result area Un G2256 Operation mode change result MOV TO MOV FROM
46. 3 45 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 9 Global control area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area The area is used for acyclic communications 1 Acyclic communication request area Un G23809 to Un G24832 Set the request instruction of acyclic communication in this area Initial value 0000H Up to eight request instructions can be set For the format for request instructions refer to Section 7 4 Address DEC HEX 23809 5D01n to Request instruction No 1 area Data size 128 words 23936 5D80x 23937 5D81n to Request instruction No 2 area Data size 128 words 24064 5E00x 24065 5E01n 19 Request instruction No 3 area Data size 128 words 24192 5E80x 24193 5E81H to Request instruction No 4 area Data size 128 words 24320 5F00x 24321 5F01H to Request instruction No 5 area Data size 128 words 24448 5F80u 24449 5F81n to Request instruction No 6 area Data size 128 words 24576 6000x 24577 6001n to Request instruction No 7 area Data size 128 words 24704 6080x 24705 6081H to Request instruction No 8 area Data size 128 words 24832 6100n Figure 3 29 Acyclic Communication Request Area Un G23809 to Un G24832 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 46 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 7 Z O Q 3 O w a 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PROGRA
47. 674En Detailed error code 3 is stored gt Section 9 5 4 When a value other than E506u is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 Empty area Stored value 0000H An error code is stored lt lt 5 Section 9 5 4 1 2 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 1 is stored 13 gt Section 9 5 4 When a value other than E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 When E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 2 is stored 13 gt Section 9 5 4 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 3 is stored 3 gt Section 9 5 4 When a value other than E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 26489 6779h to 26528 67A0n Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26529 67A1h to Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8H 26569 67C9H to 26608 67F0H Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26609 67F1H to Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1
48. 9 23 request 9 5 Error Codes 9 5 5 Error codes E600H to E6FFH Error codes generated when executing time control Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG CY series 9 5 6 Error codes F100 to FiFFu Local diagnostic information of the QJ71PB92V Table9 9 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Error Code LED Status Error Description Action FDL address No of a DP Slave is Check the FDL addresses of the DP Master and F100H FAULT LED ON duplicated with that of the DP Master in the DP Slaves and set correct parameters without parameter settings duplication Check the following and correct the setting so that one or more DP Slaves can exchange O data No DP SI for e Is the sl SI i ive F101H FAULT LED ON o Slaves are set up for I O data s the slave parameter Slave is active exchange checked e In the temporary slave reservation haven t all of DP Slaves been specified as reserved stations F102H Replace the QU71PB92V F103H i FAULT LED ON Hardware tail re If the same error occurs again please consult your F104H local Mitsubishi representative explaining a F105H detailed description of the problem PRM SET LED i F106H Parameters have not been written to the Write the parameters flashing flash ROM Initialize the flash ROM and then write the The parameters or operation mode read parameters and operation mode F107 FAULT LED ON oa 5 9 from the flash ROM are corrupted If the same error occur
49. Description Description Device M200 to Alarm read request with ACK response area M215 Slave status area Alarm detection 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 46 7 5 4 Program example OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING 3 Program example HO UO mov 626417 Ho M200 Y18 X18 H i AF if mov H1502 Mov KI MOV KO SET UO 626446 UO D4000 HOA502 BHOY 626447 D4001 RST UO gt D4000 HOASO2 BMOV G26447 D4001 K4M200 UO G26432 UO G26433 U0 G26434 Y18 D4000 K322 Y18 K322 completion Processing for failed RST Y18 MELSEC TA cries Reads the alarm status of each station Request code is set 1502H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is set FDL address 1 Empty area 0 Executes alarm read Reads the response code and error code Reads the execution result Alarm read completion processing Reads detailed error code Alarm read completion processing Figure 7 17 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition Alarm Read with ACK 7 47 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 4 Program example PROGRAMMING MELSEC IA series 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves This sect
50. Figure 3 5 Global Control Failed Signal X05 eeeeeeeseeeneeaeeeeeeeneeaeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeaeeeaeneeaeneeaeee eed For details on the global control refer to Section 4 1 3 eeeevoeseeeseeneeoeoeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS M als e6 aries 6 Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 OVERVIEW a Turn ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal YO6 when reading the extended diagnostic information of the FDL address specified in the Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 b Turning ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 clears the information of the Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM c When the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 is turned ON and reading of the extended diagnostic information of the specified FDL address is completed the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 turns ON oO d After the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 has turned ON turn OFF the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 o Z O Q 3 O w a 7 e Turning OFF the Extended diagnostic information read
51. In the QJ71PB92D Communication trouble area clear request signal Y02 Communication trouble area Un G2040 to Un G2079 1 Expansion Communication trouble area Un G2096 to Un G2110 1 In the QJ71PB92V Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 Diagnostic N information uw Currently existing failure is not detected again even if Y02 is turned OFF Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Diagnostic N Diagnostic Un G23072 to Un G23321 information information Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 Currently existing failure is detected Local station error information area upon turn OFF of Y02 Un G23071 1 For details refer to the following manual L gt PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual Figure App 6 When Y02 is Turned OFF Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models App 12 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEG TA eres c Operation mode change request signal Y11 The following processing is executed at a different timing For the processing other than the following the operation is the same as that of the QU71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D e Self diagnostics start timing Self diagnostic mode mode 2 e Return to factory set condition timing By writing AH to the Operation mode change request area Un
52. O Description Description lt o f H Time control execution command 26 nO d Program example no 6 If system switching occurs with Time control execution command ON E the time control function may be reexecuted after the system switching 2 To prevent reexecution perform the following while ON for 1 scan only G after switching the system from standby to control SM1518 is ON D ON for 1 scan only 1 after switching the system from standby to control I SM1518 X27 I RST X27 2 Ba a a a ee ES S 2 O Z T z Program for time control over DP Slaves 3 Section 7 6 4 Zz 1 af ale w Wo T n Figure 7 39 Program Example for Time Control Function Time Data Write Request aS SoFi U gt anan o zZ E i n oc Lu i PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 84 7 9 6 Program example for time control over DP Slaves PROGRAMMING 7 85 MELSEC TA eries 7 9 7 Program example for temporary slave reservation If a system switching occurs during execution of the temporary slave reservation function the processing cannot be continued The following explains a program example for reexecuting temporary slave reservation function after system switching 1 Device assignments in program example The devices assignment are the same as those in Section 7 9 1 2 Tracking devices for
53. QOOCPU Q01CPU Q02CPU QO02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU eR aisles QO03UDCPU QO4UDHCPU and QO6UDHCPU Redundant CPU Generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU GX Developer Generic product name for SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW EA SWnD5C GPPW EV and SWnD5C GPPW EVA n means version 4 or later A and V mean volume license product and version upgrade product respectively GX Configurator DP Configuration tool for QU71PB92V Generic term of the product model SWnD5C PROFID E_ n means version 7 or later BBLKRD Abbreviation for G BBLKRD BBLKWR Abbreviation for G BBLKWR GLOSSARY This part explains the glossary used in this manual Term Description PROFIBUS DPVO A basic version of PROFIBUS DP The following functions are executable e I O data exchange e Diagnostic information notification etc PROFIBUS DPV1 A PROFIBUS DP version for which the following functions have been added to the basic functionality of PROFIBUS DPVO e Acyclic communication e Alarm function etc PROFIBUS DPV2 A PROFIBUS DP version for which the following functions have been added to the PROFIBUS DPV1 functionality e Time stamping etc Class 1 A device exchanging I O data with a DP Slaves QU71PB92V QU71PB92D etc A device that communicates with DP Slaves and checks their FDL address settings and or DP Master Gee operation states
54. Request Name Description Sets the year month day hour minute and second and writes the Time data write request Oo time data Z Writes time data in UTC seconds Time data write request UTC year month day hour minute second S format The set value 9DFF4400H represents January 15 in 1984 T 00 00 00 no Zz aQ Ww be Se aS AZ 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions 4 17 4 3 1 Time control over DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LY series b Request for reading time data The time data read request is used to read the time data written to a DP Slave by another time master out to the QU71PB92V This request can be used when two or more time masters exist on the same network Time master 1 Power QJ71 CPU supply PB92V Time master 2 module Time data read request Time data Time setting Time data Time data Time data DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Figure 4 15 Time Data Read Request 2 Executing time control function Execute the time control function by the following procedure a Write request data to the Time control setting request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 b Turn ON the Time control start request signal Y19 c When the time control is completed the execution result is stored in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 and the Time control start response signal X19
55. T l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l INDEX e Hi00 1 D2000 0 1 X100 H I Processing at input data reception x101 ay oN M100 I p2000 0 x30 IHA HI grmi x31 Processing at output data reception Y14F Figure App 11 Changing Program for Input and Output Data e Changing the program for reading diagnostic information Relevant sample programs Section 7 1 7 2 7 3 and 7 4 PENE SE EEA E E E J FRP HO K2040 D1000 K5 l SSE N oe eee X21 Change the program so that each station status is read from Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Change the program so that diagnostic information is read from the each station status read at 1 FROHP HO K23057 D100 KI I aa a a ey ae ee a ON a Oe ee a 7 HO K23072 D1010 K2 l PLS M1 Figure App 12 Changing Program for Reading Diagnostic Information Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models App 18 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES f Replacing a dedicated instruction QJ71PB92D only Relevant sample program Section 7 4 MELSEC TA eries M100 H C06 y a A IU ESA ee ee EEES E EN E E EEEN E EENE EEE 1 oG t M101 X I ee A 1 W101 I 22s 4 BBLKRD uo l KO 4 0200 K1 7 E E EE EEEE EEE EE
56. The DP Master Class 2 is used as a DP Master for supervising the network which can start maintain and diagnose the system DP Slave A device that exchanges I O data with a DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB93D ST1H PB etc Repeater A device used to connect different segments of PROFIBUS DP Bus terminator A terminating resistor that is connected to either end of each segment on PROFIBUS DP Configuration tool Software used to set bus parameters slave parameters etc and to write them to a DP Master GX Configurator DP etc GSD file An electronic file that contains parameters of a DP Slave The GSD file is used to set up the slave parameters on GX Configurator DP FDL address The numbers assigned to a DP Master and DP Slaves The FDL address is set within the range from 0 to 125 Bus parameter The parameter used for the communication setting of PROFIBUS DP The bus parameter is set up on the GX Configurator DP Master parameter The parameter used for the settings FDL address transmission speed etc of the QJ71PB92V The master parameter is set up on the GX Configurator DP Slave parameter The parameter for a DP Slave which is set on the DP Master The slave parameter is set up on the GX Configurator DP The setting items are described on the GSD File 0 CONFIGURATION DATA Information on I O configuration of a DP Slave I O data exchange This function allows I O data exchange betw
57. Tighten the screw within the specified torque range If the screw is too loose it may cause a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions Overtightening may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may damage the module INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not directly touch the conductive part or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunctions or a failure of the module WIRING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring PROFIBUS cables Failure to do so may result in failure or malfunctions of the module A CAUTION Carefully prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Failure to do so may cause a fire failure or malfunctions Be sure to place the PROFIBUS cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cables may be shifted or inadvertently pulled resulting in damages to the module or cables or malfunctions due to poor cable contact When disconnecting the PROFIBUS cable do not pull it by holding the cable part Be sure to hold its connector which is plugged into the module Pulling the cable with it connected to the module may damage the module and or cable or cause malfunctions
58. eseeseeeeeeeee 7 51 Transmission delay LIME cecccccccccccccccccccccccvcces 3 60 Transmission distance eeececccccccccccccccccccccccccscse 3 2 W Watchdog timer error signal X1F eesseeeeesseeeee0 3 16 Wiring specifications for bus terminator eesseeeeeee 5 10 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_ SERVICE seeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseossesssesesosoe 7 19 Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exc
59. information area for mode 3 8304 to 83Ex trouble area specifications are different 5B9Eu CS Section 3 4 1 23056 to Modify the relevant parts of the 23064 Slave status area Diagnostic 2112 to 2116 sequence program i Slave status area 5A104to information detection 8401 to 8441 5A18 22784 to 22908 Input data start address area 5900 to for mode 3 Buffer memory addresses have been 597Cu 2128 to 2247 I O start address Extended changed 22912 to 8504 to 8C7x service mode MODE E only Modify the relevant parts of the 23036 Output data start address sequence program 5980 to area for mode 3 59FC Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs App 14 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 WW Q fa Z W a a lt INDEX APPENDICES App 15 4 Program replacement examples MELSEC TA cries The following example shows how sample programs provided in the QU71PB92D manual are changed for the QU71PB92V For the A1SJ71PB92D and AJ71PB92D replace the programs referring to the following replacement examples a Deleting the diagnostic information area type selection signal Y03 Relevant sample programs Sections 7 1 7 2 7 3 and 7 4 M400 SET W400 X1B XID X1F X0 Yo f It t TO HO K2080 H2B9 TO HO K2084 K20 soe a 1o Sn pa cee eee ee I RST Delete the diagnos
60. taken over by the next station with input data as shown below Each DP Slave setting Assignment result in Input data area of QU71PB92V 1st module Input data Set amiaon 4 Input data of 1st module 2nd module Input data None Input data of 3rd module 3rd module Input data Set Input data of 5th module 4th module Input data Set Data length 0 Because of no input data setting for 2nd and 4th modules no area is assigned for them 5th module Input data Set 3 25 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 Output data area for mode 3 Un G14336 to Un G18431 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 output data to DP Slaves are set a Data length setting M als 6 Q The data length unit byte of each station is variable and assigned based on the slave parameter Select Modules set on GX Configurator DP For the DP Slave that has a fixed data length the slave parameter Select Modules setting is ignored Data length range The maximum data length per module is 244 bytes and the total data length for all DP Slaves can be set up to 8192 bytes When the data length is an odd number of bytes the final high byte is occupied Set 004 to the final high byte The output data of the next station is assigned starting from the next buffer address Address DEC HEX eae 14336 3800n O
61. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 140 Figure 3 18 An Example in Slave Status Area Reserved Station Setting Status 3 31 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M aLS AG A i 3 Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 The information on diagnostic status of each DP Slave is stored in this area When the Data exchange start request signal YOO is turned OFF all the information of the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 is cleared OVERVIEW a All stations diagnostic status Un G23056 This area stores the diagnostic information detection status of all DP Slaves Initial value 0000 If diagnostic information is detected in any one of the stations in Each station s diagnostic status Un G23057 to Un G23064 1 is stored in All stations diagnostic status Un G23056 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM ie 0 All DP Slaves normal 1 Diagnostic error information detected o Z O Q 3 O w a 7 Each station s diagnostic status Un G23057 to Un G23064 This area stores the diagnostic information detection status of each DP Slave Initial value 00001 0 Normal including reserved temporary slave reservation and or not configured n stations 6 1 Diagnostic information detected z ma Address DEC HEX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2
62. 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 41 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK To the next page PROGRAMMING Buffer memory address 26449 6751H 26450 6752H 26451 6753H 26452 6754H 26453 6755H to 26484 6774H Table7 37 Response Format When Normally Completed Continued Alarm data No 1 The length of the alarm data is stored Unit byte Stored value 1 to 64 MELSEC IA series The alarm type is stored Stored value Alarm type Diagnosis alarm Process alarm Pull alarm Plug alarm Status alarm Update alarm Manufacturer specific alarm The slot No is stored Stored value 0 to 254 The alarm status and sequence No are stored b15 b8 b7 to b3 b2 b1 bO 0 3 2 1 1 Alarm details category is stored 00 No additional information 01 Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot 10 No error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 11 Error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 2 Whether individual ACK is required or not is stored 0 No ACK return from the user is required 1 ACK return from the user is required 3 Sequence No is stored Stored value 0 to 31 The alarm data are stored b15 b8 b7 bO 26453 6755x Alarm data 2nd byte Alarm data 1st byte 264
63. 0000 sw 512 0000 Transfer2 Transfer3 Transfer4 Transfers Transfer6 Figure 7 23 Network Parameter Setting The parameter settings on QJU71PB92V DP Slaves and GX Configurator DP are the same as those explained in Section 7 1 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QU71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station 7 60 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING Device MELSEC TA eries 4 Assignment of devices in program example The program examples in this section use the following device assignments a Devices used by the QU71PB92V Table7 60 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Description X1000 Data exchange start completed signal Y1000 Data exchange start request signal X101B Communication READY signal X101D Module READY signal X101F Watchdog timer error signal b Devices used by the user Table7 61 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X20 I O data exchange start command SB20 Module status X30 Conditions for write to output data 1st word SB47 Baton pass status own station X31
64. 1 65535 1ms T_wd 6 65535 10ms 0 65535 10 ms Default Bus Param lt Slave parameters gt Model Vendor Slave Parameter Settings MERMRRKEN Revision KRRKRERE Slave Properties Group identification number IV Slave is active Swap 1 0 Bytes in Master lave Watchdog time 100 1 65025 10ms DP 1 2 Slave Parameters KRR Slave_N _001 10 125 m 255 l Gpl l Gp2 l Gp3 l Gp4 l Gp5S l Gp amp Gp l Gps ja ja F Initialize slave when failing to respond Select Modules Default User Param Figure 7 33 I O Data Exchange Parameter Setting Example GX Configurator DP 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples Set the I O data size ECLA series OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING N PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 72 F PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eries d Parameter settings in GX Developer lt Intelligent function module switch setting gt Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format HEX ee Set a standby master FDL address Select Device detail settings No tracking All tracking device capacity K word Do tracking Device total increases 16
65. 1 For how to change the operation mode of the redundant CPU refer to the QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 4 2 When the FAULT LED of the QU71PB92V in the new control system is ON Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG LA series 9 4 3 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system The following shows how to perform maintenance in the standby system during Backup mode operation and to restart the redundant system operation o Z O ie I a w l a O ia E Maintenance Sequence program modification Parameter change in GX Configurator DP or GX Developer Change of QU71PB92V operation mode Recovery from error Powering OFF and then ON Reseting redundant CPU Replacement of QU71PB92V Figure 9 8 Detail of Maintenance ye Start Connect GX Developer to the control system CPU j On the Redundant operation screen of GX Developer select Separate mode for Operation mode of the redundant CPU 1 APPENDICES INDEX Stop the system for which maintenance is to be performed standby system CPU Disconnect the PROFIBUS cable connected to the QJ71PB92V in the standby system Connect GX Developer to the standby system CPU j Set the operation mode of the standby system CPU to Debug mode 1 1 In Debug mode setting in Redundant parameter of GX Developer select Start with Debug mode 2 Write the set redundant
66. 1 O data length of 125th module FF Input data not assigned FF Output data not assigned Figure 3 11 Address Information Area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 1 The difference between 00n and FF is as follows 00H means that input or output data are assigned with the data length set to 0 FFu shows that assigned input or output data do not exist 3 27 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M aLS AG l es 4 Input data start address area for mode 3 Un G22784 to Un G22908 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 the start address buffer memory address for each DP Slave s input data is stored in this area Creating a sequence program utilizing the Input data start address area for mode 3 Un G22784 to Un G22908 allows address specification of the Input data area without consideration of the input points for each DP Slave Information of 125 modules is stored in the Input data start address area for mode 3 in the same order for each module OVERVIEW Address DEC HEX b15 bO 22784 5900x Input data start address of 1st module The start address buffer memory address of the Wrong tte ate ane ye aie A i f the 1 le i Initial value 22785 5901 Input data start address of 2nd module a Ob ine TSEMOGUIG s stone Unter value s 22528 58001 1800 to 27FF Input data start address FFFFu Input data not assigned CONFIGURATION SYST
67. 2H The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications ca Check the DP Slave specifications z Set value 0 to 65535 F Set Alignment 3 3H The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications a bee Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 0000H Set Features Supported aaa The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications aig Check the DP Slave specifications F Set value Fixed to 0001H 5 Set Profile Features Supported S 5 5H The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications T j Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 0000H Set Profile Ident Number ans 6 6H The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications z5 lt 6 Check the DP Slave specifications is z a Set value Fixed to 0000H aoe OFF O E n U gt anan b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 o Z 1 Set S_Type z 7 7H The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications oO Check the DP Slave specifications tir Set value Fixed to 00H 7 2 Set S_Len The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications x Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H 7 To the next page PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 22 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres Table7 21 Request format Continued O
68. 3 66 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 67 3 Tp ms value Tp 2 2 4 2 x 0 01 3 x 1 0 35 38 1 ms 4 Scan ms value Scan 5 ms 5 Nand value Nand 3 From the above 1 to 4 Tscu ms is Tscu TcpuA Tsw Tp Scan x 2 8 21 567 38 1 5x 2 77 667 ms Therefore the redundant system switching time Tsca ms is Tsca Tscu Nand x 20 77 667 3 x 20 137 667 ms 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system MELSEC TA eries 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Aeres u This chapter explains the functions of the QJ71PB92V 35 Table4 1 Function List ae Reference Function Description A z Section O PROFIBUS DPVO l g G Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QU71PB92V enabling the I O data EE O exchange of max 8192 bytes i DE I O data exchange Section 4 1 1 a Note that it is limited up to 124 DP Slaves when the QJ71PB92V is used in a redundant system Acquisition of diagnostic Diagnostic or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on a DP Slaves and extended diagnostic during I O data exchange can be easily acquired using the buffer memory and I O Section 4 1 2 z information signals E 1S By sending services SYNC UNSYNC FREEZE UNFREEZE to each DP Slave in a i rm Global control function y Dg
69. 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEG A series 3 4 5 Slave status area This area stores the operation status of each DP Slave EJPOINT 1 The corresponding bits of the Slave status area are assigned in order of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in order of the FDL address The actual assignment order can be confirmed in the Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Slave List of GX Configurator DP Index F Link Status Input Addr Input Size Output Addr Output Size Order of assignment Oo 6144 18 14336 18 6153 1 14345 1 88 88 14346 B l Last known CPU Error BATTERY ERROR 2 When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s on GX Configurator DP the buffer memory is reassigned After modifying parameters review the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program gt gt Section 6 5 3 29 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M als eG Q 1 Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 The communication status of each DP Slave is stored in this area Initial value 0000n When the Data exchange start request signal YOO is turned OFF all the information of the Slave statu
70. 3 4 6 4 b 3 rm The status 3 information Whether or not any The FDL address of the DP Master is stored E extended diagnostic information other than the one Initial value 004 sent this time is stored in the DP Slave is stored For the DP Slave that has not started I O data Initial value 00H exchange FF is stored 23460 5BA4H 00x No other extended diagnostic information 00x to 7Dx 0 to 125 FDL address exists 804 Other extended diagnostic information exists E zZ 23461 5BA5 The ident No of the DP Slave is stored Initial value 0000x Z 23462 5BA6n S a to The extended diagnostic information max 244 bytes is stored Initial value 0000n 23583 5C1 FH Figure 3 27 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Response Area Un G23457 to Un G23583 nO Zz 2E Se 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 42 3 4 7 Extended diagnostic information read area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LY series 3 4 8 Bus cycle time area This area stores the bus cycle time 1 Current bus cycle time Un G2272 The current bus cycle time is stored in this area Unit x 1ms 2 Min bus cycle time Un G2273 The minimum value of the bus cycle time is stored in this area Unit x 1ms 3 Max bus cycle time Un G2274 The maximum value of the bus cycle time is stored in this area Unit x 1ms 3 43 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 8 Bus cycle time area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 3 4 9 Global control area
71. 33 7735 144 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Phone 490 569 777 777 Waa TT Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 1 847 478 22 83 ey 0 0 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 Fax 420 569 777 778 Stegne 11 Beijer Electronics A S DENMARK SI 1000 Ljubljana Lautruphoj 1 3 Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 DK 2750 Ballerup Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 Phone 45 0 70 26 46 46 f Fax 45 0 70 26 48 48 ue Automation AB SWEDEN Beijer Electronics Eesti OU ESTONIA SE 20124 Malmo Parnu mnt 160i Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 EE 11317 Tallinn Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 Phone 372 OL SM81410 ECONOTEC AG SWITZERLAND Fax 372 0 6 51 8149 Hinterdorfstr 12 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND CH 8309 N rensdorf Jaakonkatu 2 Phone 41 0 44 838 48 11 FIN 01620 Vantaa Fax 41 0 44 838 48 12 Phone 358 0 207 463 500 Gs TURKEY Fax 358 0 207 463 501 Darulaceze Cad No 43 KAT 2 UTECO A B E E GREECE TR 34384 Okmeydani Istanbul 5 Mavrogenous Str Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 GR 18542 Piraeus Fax 90 0 212 320 1649 Phone 30 211 1206 900 F CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE Fax 30 211 1206 999 15 M Raskova St FI 10 Office 1010 Meltrade Ltd HUNGARY UA 02002 Kiev Fert utca 14 Phone 380 0 44 494 33 55 HU 1107 Budapest Fax 380 0 44 494 33 66 Phone 36 0 1 431 9726 Fax 36 0 1 431 9727 Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA Vestienas iela 2 LV 1035 Riga MITSUBISHI A ELECTRIC Phone 371 0 784 2280 Fax 371 0 784 2281 Mitsu
72. 6 Q00J Q00 Q01CPU 4 Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later Version 7 01B or later Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Single CPU system Version 4 or later Slee Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later Version 4 to 6 Single CPU system Version 7 01B or later Q12PH Q25PHCPU Version 7 10L or later Multiple CPU system Single CPU system 03UD Q04UDH 2 BTY Version 8 48A or later Version 7 02C or later Qo6U Multiple CPU system 1 In Version 7 01B only the Web based online access function cannot be used 4 40 4 9 QJ7Z1PB92D Compatible Function 4 FUNCTIONS M als eG aries POINT GX Configurator DP Version 7 00A cannot be used a For GX Configurator DP Version 7 00A upgrade it to Version 7 01B or later For version upgrades please consult your local Mitsubishi representative amp 2 Wiring for using the QJ71PB92D compatible function Z Except for the PROFIBUS interface connector position and no terminating resistor lt the wiring is the same as the QJ71PB92D aie 2S a PROFIBUS interface connector position PE The PROFIBUS interface connector position on the QJ71PB92V is moved up by 17mm 0 67 inch compared with the QJ71PB92D If the PROFIBUS cable is not long enough extend the cable length by using an Q extension connector O g QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V 5 QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V 2 o Z Q e Z U PROFIBUS I F BUS TERMI
73. BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 1 OVERVIEW 2 3 4 5 6 7 MELSEC TA eries I O data consistency Using the automatic refresh setting in GX Configurator DP or dedicated instructions BBLKRD BBLKWR ensures data consistency when reading writing I O data from the QJ71PB92V buffer memory gt gt Section 4 5 Easy parameter setup Use of GX Configurator DP enables bus parameters master parameters slave parameters and various other parameters to be easily set up lt gt gt CHAPTER 6 Swapping of I O data The upper and lower bytes can be reversed swapped in word units when I O data is sent or received This simplifies programming as you no longer need to create a program for swapping the upper and lower bytes on the QU71PB92V or DP Slave lt gt gt Section 4 4 Mountable on MELSECNET H remote I O station The QJ71PB92V can be mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station This allows you to install the QU71PB92V at a remote site away from the QCPU lt gt Section 7 8 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error Stop Continue of I O data exchange For the case of a CPU stop error on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QJ71PB92V is mounted whether to stop or continue I O data exchange with DP Slaves can be specified gt Section 4 6 Changing DP Slave setting to reserved station status temporarily Withou
74. Bus cycle time lt Set value of Slave Watchdog time lt Set value of Data control time 6 e When the QJU71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system set an appropriate value so that the formula shown in Section 4 8 5 is satisfied Setting range 1 to 65025 Unit x 10 ms or x 1 ms Default 5 x 10 ms min T_sdr Set the minimum response time required for a DP Slave to send a response frame to the QU71PB92V Normally use the default value Setting range 1 to 255 Unit x Tpit Default 11 x Tit Group identification number Set the group No Grp 1 to Grp 8 of the DP Slave Multiple groups Nos can also be set Not checked Not belonging to the group No Checked Belonging to the group No Slave is active Sync Output Freeze Input Uncheck the box when the DP Slave is to be set as a reserved station Not checked Set as a reserved station Checked Set as a station performing I O data exchange Check the box to check if the DP Slave supports the Sync function or not in communication for initialization When the DP Slave does not support the Sync function diagnostic information is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 of the QJU71PB92V Not checked No function check Checked Function check performed Check the box to check if the DP Slave supports the Freeze function or not in communication for initialization When the DP Slave does not support the Freeze functio
75. E46AH the DP Slave side E46BH Access is not available on the DP Slave side E46CH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave E46DH i side E46EH Incorrect request was detected on the DP Slave side E46FH Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side E470H Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is Resource error was detected during read processing on E471H the DP SI id correctly set or not and retry i renee For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E4724 Resource error was detected during write processing on the DP Slave side E473H The resource is already in use on the DP Slave side There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave E474H i side E475H The service not available for the specified DP Slave was requested Memories used for request processing are insufficient on E476H the DP Slave side E477H The DP Slave side made this service invalid E478H The DP Slave side did not respond to the request The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the E480H ae ue Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry E481H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to the local station QU71PB92V Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E482H INITIATE error response actions E483H Invalid Alignment setting Check if
76. EES J e aes W101 i l T BMOY_ K4Y100 D300 K1 7 2 y__ 7 G BBLKWR UO I K960 D300 KI _ oo i Add X0C to the dedicated instruction interlock Change the buffer memory addresses of the input area and output area te YOG b LS 2 L ET 2 _ ane i HH 4 TG BBLKRD uo K61i44 1 D200 KI SLL b A J M100 BMOV K4Y100 D300 KI 1 ETE 2 __ to ki e BR uo 1 K14336 J D300 KI Figure App 13 Replacing Dedicated Instruction QJ71PB92D only App 19 Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES Appendix 3 External Dimensions NN M als eG aries ToO 98 3 86 QJ71PB92V RUN TEST SD RD TOKEN READY PRM SET RSP ERR FAULT PROFIBUS I F QJ71PB92V 90 3 54 4 0 16 gt _ Figure App 14 External Dimensions 27 4 1 08 Unit mm inch Appendix 3 External Dimensions App 20 TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEG TA eres Memo App 21 Appendix 3 External Dimensions INDEX A ABORT service Class2_SERVICE eseeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 26 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information ececcccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 4 4 Acyclic communication Area cecececccccccccccccccccses 3 46 Acyclic communicat
77. G2255 the status is returned to the factory set condition with the Operation mode change request signal Y11 In the QU71PB92D the processing is executed when the Operation mode change request signal Y11 is turned OFF In the QJ71PB92V the processing is executed when the Operation mode change request signal Y11 is turned ON Operation mode change request signal Y11 Operation mode change completed signal X11 In the QJ71PB92D Processing of operation mode change 1 a Processing of operation mode change Processing after operation mode change 2 3 Processing after operation mode change Processing after operation mode change is executed when Y11 is turned ON Processing of operation Processing after mode change operation mode change In the QJ71PB92V Processing of operation mode change 1 and Processing after operation All the processing for operation mode change mode change 2 is executed when Y11 is turned ON 1 Storing a value into the Current operation mode area Un G2254 Storing a value into the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 2 Execution of self diagnostics Returning to the factory set condition Flash ROM initialization Figure App 7 Operation Mode Change Request Signal Y11 Behavior App 13 Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES QJ71PB92V QJ7
78. Global control completed signal X04 and Global control failed signal X05 turn ON Writing of output data 2 Z O z o i O M a o Data exchange start completed signal X00 Output data is written FUNCTIONS Global control request signal Y04 Global control completed signal X04 1 Output data area for mode 3 Un G14336 to Un G18431 Figure 3 4 Global Control Request Signal Y04 Global Control Completed Signal X04 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 10 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 11 MELSEC TA eries 5 Global control failed signal X05 a If the Global control request signal Y04 is turned ON while the Data exchange start completed signal X00 is OFF both the Global control completed signal X04 and Global control failed signal X05 turn ON b The ON status of the Global control failed signal X05 means that the global control has failed Remedy the cause of the error and execute the global control again c Turning OFF the Global control request signal Y04 turns OFF the Global control failed signal X05 Global control request Global control request signal Y04 Global control completed Global control completed signal X04 Global control failed Global control failed signal X05
79. HEX b15 to bO z 2080 820 See below i g nz ras bit Description Initial value bO Parameter transmission request from the DP Slave 1 3 b1 Diagnostic information read request 0 b2 Fixed to 0 0 z b3 The DP Slave is monitored by the watchdog timer 1 amp b4 DP Slave entered FREEZE mode 1 5 b5 DP Slave entered SYNC mode 1 o b6 0 Reserved 0 7 Excluded from I O data exchange according to the parameter r b settings b8 Unable to exchange I O data with DP Slaves 0 n b9 The DP Slave is not ready to exchange I O data 1 5 b10 The parameter No of I O bytes received from the 0 z DP Master does not match that of the DP Slave a b11 Extended diagnostic information exists 0 b12 The function requested by the DP Master is not supported 0 b13 Illegal response from DP Slave 0 T U b14 Illegal parameter s sent from the DP Master 0 id m 5300 b15 Controlled by another DP Master 0 a g SE amp U gt anw Even if diagnostic information corresponding to each bit is generated on a DP Slave it is not recognized as diagnostic information and the status of the QU71PB92V is as follows e The Diagnostic information detection signal X01 does not turn ON e The RSP ERR LED does not turn ON e No error code and detailed data is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G2307 to Un G23321 and or Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e The bit corresponding to the stat
80. I O Network OVERVIEW This section presents a program example for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted and used on a MELSECNET H remote I O station 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station CONFIGURATION SYSTEM This section explains a program example for the I O data exchange function when the QJ71PB92V is mounted and used on a MELSECNET H remote I O station 1 System configuration example SPECIFICATIONS Q25HCPU Remote master station QU71LP21 25 l F QX42 E 2 E FUNCTIONS MELSECNET H remote I O network Figure 7 20 System Configuration Example for I O Data Exchange When Mounted on a Remote I O Station Remote I O station QU72LP25 25 DP Master Class 1 QU71PB92V 2 DP Slave PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Bus terminator Bus terminator PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 58 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING MELSEG ores 1 Modules are installed in order from slot 0 as shown in the figure and the following start I O Nos are to be set 120 Assignment sit Tye Modelname Points Stawy Popre jee v fa25H
81. Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop CITOL cecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccs 4 24 P Parameter SEttiIngerrccececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccocs 6 1 Parameter setting status area Active station 3 33 Parameter setting status area Reserved station cococooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000 3 33 Performance specifications ccoooooooooooooooooo00000000 3 Pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface CONNECTLOLS cececceccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccsccccseces H Q Processing TIME eccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccees 3 59 PROFIBUS Cable ecccescccccccccccccccccccccccccssccccees 5 9 PROFIBUS DP network configuration ssesesssseseses 2 5 PROFIBUS DPVO Functions Pvccccccccccccccccccccccce 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 FUNCTIONS eecceccecccccccccccccccce 4 PROFIBUS DPV2 FUNCTIONS eecccccccccccccccccccccce 4 17 Q QJ71PB92D compatible fUNCtIONssssesseseeseeseeeee 4 40 R READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE cocococooooooooooooooooo0000000000000 165 Redundant system support function seseeeeeeeeeeeee 4 29 Restart request signal YOD ecccccccccccccccccvcccces 3 1 3 S Self diagnostics COCO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOO 5 7 Serial No eccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce 2 14 Slave PAFAMETETS coeccrccocccccccccceccccsccoccooceccecs 6 12 Slave status area cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccee 3 29 Slave status area Alarm detection scrsereseeseeeeee 3 35 Slave status area Diagno
82. PROFIBUS interface connector This connector connects the PROFIBUS cable to the QU71PB92V 1 Indicator LEDs 5 5 5 3 Part Names and Settings D PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION M eL 26 Fel ceries 1 Indicator LEDs u gt ae QJ71PB92V RUN TEST e SD RD TOKEN READY O O PRM SET RSP ERR FAULT Figure 5 4 Indicator LEDs Z z ec z0 Table5 3 Indicator LEDs EE O LED Status Description Reference se RUN ON Normally operating OFF Hardware error watchdog timer error or power failure Section 9 1 ON Ee re ordd i TETEE Section 4 1 1 b SD RD Flashing xchanging ata or during acyclic communication Section 4 2 1 5 OFF Not communicating with DP Slave or being in the standby system S Tes READY ON Ready to communicate or communication being performed _ G oa OFF Not ready to communicate or no communication W ON A communication error has occurred Section 3 4 6 RSP ERR OFF No communication error f f Bayete Nas Section 5 4 ON Executing self diagnostics or flash ROM initialization TEST Section 9 6 Flashing Executing self diagnostics Section 5 4 2 OFF Not executing self diagnostics or flash ROM initialization 5 rA i Token bei d 3 z TOKEN Flashing oken being passe 5 OFF No token passing or being in the standby system 3 ON Operating in Parameter setting mode m
83. Section 3 4 13 2 Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO 3 Upon completion of the temporary slave reservation specification the results are stored in the temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 and the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON L gt Section 3 4 5 b Cancel method 1 Turn OFF the Data exchange start request signal YOO 2 In the temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 cancel the DP Slaves specified as temporary slave reservation 3 Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 4 Upon completion of the temporary slave reservation cancellation the results are stored in the temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 and the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON Remark Sooo occ ooo oreo For program examples on the temporary slave reservation function refer to the following e Single CPU system gt Section 7 7 e Redundant system 7 3 Section 7 9 7 eeeeeeeceaeoeeeeeoeeeeecsceeseeeeeseeeceoeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee eee ese 6 4 28 4 7 Temporary slave reservation function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEG LY series 4 8 Redundant system support function When the control system CPU or the QU71PB92V detects an error the control and standby systems are switched each other to continue communications z 1 Redundant system operati
84. Table6 11 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Items For the redundant system support function z u 35 Set the standby master FDL address when the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system If the standby master FDL address setting is failed an error code is stored in the Local station error information area Un G23071 lt _ gt Section 9 5 6 Disabled No setting blank Z Switch 1 Enabled Refer to the following Set only when using the redundant system support function 7 20 1 0 ire H EE XR p gt Q Zv no Standby master FDL address Setting range OH to 7D 0 to 125 Switch 2 no Zz Switch 3 fe No setting blank lt Switch 4 If any setting exists delete it a n Switch 5 2 For the QU71PB92D compatible function Table6 12 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Items For the QJ71PB92D compatible function 2 Ta Set whether to continue or stop the I O data communication with the DP Slave when the CPU stop Sahi error occurs Continue No setting blank AA i ACE Stop 0001H lt 5 lt w Ww oOo Switch 2 9244H ae wuZ2q SE amp Switch 3 Too Switch 4 No setting ent If any setting exists delete it Switch 5 0 zZ W 7 c W E W lt rs lt a PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 7 Parameter Setting by GX Developer 6 25 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries CHAPTER7 PROGRAMMING When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to exa
85. The QU71PB92V is used for connecting MELSEC Q Series programmable controllers to PROFIBUS DP The QJU71PB92V operates as a DP Master Class 1 on PROFIBUS DP networks lt Single CPU system gt DP Master Class 1 QU71PB92V DP Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave MELSEC ST system oon Bus terminator lt Redundant system gt Redundant CPU Q25PRHCPU DP Master Class 1 QU71PB92V Control system Standby system id amp oooooo ooo oopooo ooo pod Ging Tracking cable Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave QU71 PB93D _ MELSEC ST System ono Figure 1 1 PROFIBUS DP Using QJ71PB92V DP Slave DP Slave Bus terminator Bus terminator OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 1 OVERVIEW Bus terminator lt MELSECNET H remote I O network gt Remote master station QU71LP21 25 MELSECNET H Remote I O network Remote I O station QU72LP25 25 DP Master Class 1 QU71PB92V DP Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave MELSEC ST System Z
86. all DP Slaves into the same kind of device e To reduce the number of automatic refresh parameters of the QJ71PB92V and increase the automatic refresh parameters of other intelligent function modules 6 18 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEG TA eres 2 I O Mapping dialog box Set the devices used for the communication in units of DP Slaves z S jac a Operation procedure z Right click on the graphic of DP Master I O Mapping b Setting items Z E vo Mapping 2 lt g QJ71PB92V DUT Var Identifier Identifier DUT Type Number Elements Buffer MIT Address 3 au Sis dh fia 1 Slave_Nr_001 MT DP12 2 6 2 Slave_Nr_002 STLH PB ST1H PB 32pts whole ch STIPSD 2 2f a H svixe ve ajal 6 lt L P staz ajad T O 4 J Sleve_nr_003 Q371PB93D a 2 Tree view Table view O Figure 6 9 I O Mapping Dialog Box 2 re 1 Tree view On the highest level the model gt gr QJ71PB92V z name of the DP Master is displayed or Q d 1 Slave_Nr_001 MT DP12 lt Q lt On the second level the following gt O id ui information on the DP Slaves is a e BrE displayed ST1H PB 32pts whole cor 9 i FDL addresses P ieee Hid Path DP Slave names set in the Slave 5 On the third level the model names of the Parameter Settings dialog box f srixsves aali modules mounted on the DP Slaves 6 Model names i ST1AD2 ajali g
87. b When using dedicated instructions MELSEC TA cries This section explains a program in which the QJ71PB92V communicates with DP Slaves using dedicated instructions Not needed when the initial setting is not changed Smoz iao Turn ON the initial I L setting execution command M400 X1B XID XIF x0 Yo UO aiii A sai i in rHoy HOBO 63080 Initializes Diagnostic info I vd i at invalid setting area Hov K20 an I Initializes Diagnostic info non l notification time setting area UO a Fov KO 623648 l Sets conditions for system I switching UO m switchin Mov H1 G23649 T mg Mow H2 oe Specifies the 2nd temporary I slave reservation rest wan i Turn OFF the initial I setting execution command U0 s518 xis 1D i Ay HB9 eats Initializes Diagnostic info I ii LI L1 b invalid setting area roy Ko PEN i Sets 0 in Diagnostic info non I notification time setting area U0 ruoy KO 623648 i Sets conditions for system I j switching hy r a Sets a system switching i MOY H1 G23649 DP Slave 1st UO Hov He 623608 Specifies the 2nd temporary VELL LL SY Slave reservation FMOY HO K4Y0 K2 Turns OFF Y00 to Y1F UO Writes tracking transferred Bov Digo eee ae data to Output data area XIB XID XIF x20 XO UO F cig i FMOVP KO 614336 k96 Writes the initial output data value YO
88. built in bus terminator When the former model has been used with the bus terminator setting switch set to ON use a PROFIBUS connector with a built in bus terminator for the QJ71PB92V For wiring specifications for the bus terminator of the QU71PB92V refer to Section 5 5 1 eeeseeeeveseeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeoeeeened For details on PROFIBUS cables and connectors access the following website e PROFIBUS International http Awww profibus com eeeeeoseecevoeaeeceaoevseeeeceoeeceaosesceeaeseeec ee eeceaoesceeeeeeceeeeeeaee eee ee 3 Operation mode setting Set the QU71PB92V s operation mode on GX Configurator DP or in the sequence program 4 Configuration software Use GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later for setting QU71PB92V parameters Use of PROFIMAP or GX Configurator DP Version 6 or earlier is not allowed 5 Parameters a Parameter conversion Convert parameters of former models using GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later Parameter conversion can be executed by Change Master Type on GX Configurator DP After modifying parameters be sure to check the parameters b Auto refresh parameter check for the QU71PB92D only If refresh target devices for other than I O data are set up in the QJ71PB92D check the refresh ranges The refresh ranges are different between the QU71PB92D and QU71PB92V PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings y GX IEC Developer GID Settings Buffer Devices C Slave Specif
89. calculated from GX Configurator DP parameters is displayed Set a value greater than the displayed value for Min slave interval or Watchdog Note that since the displayed value is a value calculated from GX Configurator DP parameters the actual bus cycle time may be longer than the displayed time due to communication with another master station lt 5 Section 3 5 1 Set sufficient time for Min slave interval or Watchdog considering the time that will be spent for communications with another master station Autom Refresh Automatic refresh enabled disabled is displayed Automatic refresh enabled disabled is set in PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings Section 6 6 2 Not checked Automatic refresh disabled Checked Automatic refresh enabled Consistency Check this checkbox to use the data consistency function when automatic refresh is executed When Autom Refresh is enabled the checkbox is available Not checked Data consistency function disabled Checked Data consistency function enabled Watchdog for time sync Set the time during which the transmission interval of the clock data sent from the time master is monitored Setting range 0 to 65535 Unit x 10 ms Default 0 x 10 ms Bus Param button Displays the Bus Parameter screen gt Section 6 4 1 The upper limit of the Starting I O number setting range varies depending on the QCPU with which the QU71PB92
90. check using the LEDs and corrective ACTIONS eeccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccvccceces OD Error COS eccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccecs Q12 Extended diagnostic information area for mode QB eeccccccccccccccccsoccccccocsccccocscoccoocses 3 4 Extended diagnostic information read area e 3 42 Extended diagnostic information read request arca ceccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscccosees 3 42 Extended diagnostic information read request signal YOG eeeeececceccccocococeoccocococcooooo 3 12 Extended diagnostic information read response AlN cocccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsecs 3 42 Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 cococoooocoooooooooooo00000000000 3 D F FDT DTM technology Prcccccccccccccccccccccccccocccocs 4 6 Flash ROM storage mode cooooooooooooooooo0000000000 3 2 Function Versione esccscccccoocoooooooocoooooo0000000000 2 14 FuUnCtioNSe e ecccccccccccocoooooooooo00000000000000000000000 4 1 G Global control area cecececcccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 3 44 Global control completed signal X04 ssseseeeeeeee 3 10 Global control failed signal X05 eeeeeseeseesesseeee 3 11 Global Control FUNCTION eeeeeececccccccccccccccccccccccccs 4 7 Global control request signal Y04 essseseseeeeeeeee 3 10 G BBLKRD eveececvcccccccccccvcsccccvcsccccccscccsccssees B A G BBLKWR eseseseesesececsececcesocecesoesosossesosoese B G H How to return the QJ71PB92V to Its factory set conditions 00
91. code and detailed data is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G2307 to Un G23321 and or Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 The bit corresponding to the station that sent the diagnostic information does not turn ON in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 POINT Set a value into the Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 when the Data exchange start request signal YOO is OFF Values set with the Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON are ignored o Z O z Q i O Mr o 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION z E D e eeeeaeeceaoeaeaoeoeoeaeoeecoeaoeac ease nee eee eseeaneea ee eae ees ees eeaeaeeaee eed ee wi The time remaining time during which no diagnostic information is notified after z communication start after Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON can be checked in the Current diagnostic information non notification time area Un G2085 Z z S g 2 ae Se 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 36 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LY series 2 Current diagnostic information non notification time area Un G2085 This area stores the remaining time during which no diagnostic information is notified after communication start after Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON
92. communication request result area D207 M115 D3000 to pony Acyclic communication response area D3012 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 28 7 4 5 Program example OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres 3 Program example HO UO Reads the acceptance i Mov 625120 K4Mi00 status and completion Mo X26 D200 0 M108 M100 UO Status o _ _p_ pp ye roy ao o Y To coges sel U0 The FDL address of the Mov K2 623810 target DP Slave is set ig FDL address 2 T MOY K16 23811 Data length is set 16 bytes ugy f tov KO G23812 Slot No is set 0 UO MOV KI G23813 Index is set 1 UO Pp m o 623814 K123 Empty area 0 Executes Acyclic UO communication Woy HI 23808 J Request instruction No 1 is ex 3 uo wio0 Uo 0 1 is executed H mov 25121 D3000 JjReads the response code and error code uoy D3000 HOA400 Bioy 625122 D3001 K12 Reads the execution result UO Acyclic communication MoV HO 23808 Ji completion processing UO Reads detailed error D3000 H0A400 Bov_ 625122 D3001 K4 code Processing for failed completion uo Acyclic communication nov HO g23g0g completion processing Figure 7 15 Program Example for Acycli
93. data exchange is started by either of the following Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y 00 Start it from GX Configurator DP 7 Z e O Z U Figure 4 36 Procedures before System Operation Continued PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 4 43 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LY series 4 Checking if the QJ71PB92D compatible function is enabled The model name displayed in Module s Detailed Information of GX Developer is changed to QJ71PB92D 92V Module s Detailed Information Module Name QJ 71PB92D 92v E I Address QJ71PB92D 92V EE Product information 090520000000000 D Implementation Position Main Base OSlot Module Information Module access Possible 1 0 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status a Input Type Status of 70 Address Verify Remote password setting status Figure 4 37 Checking if QJ71PB92D Compatible Function is Enabled Agree 5 Precautions a Serial No of the QU71PB92V Select the QJ71PB92V whose serial No first 5 digits is 09052 or later C Section 2 4 b Module to be selected in GX Configurator DP projects 1 When utilizing the project created for the QJ71PB92D Utilize the project without change Master Settings Use the parameter
94. digit notation BIN 16 bits ni Start address for writing data Specified device range Start No of the device storing write data Specified device range Device name n2 Number of write data 1 to 4096 word BIN 16 bits Function This instruction allows data writing to the buffer memory of a specified module with data consistency ensured Error An operation error occurs in the following instances Error code 4101 e When a value outside the setting range is set to the set data field e When the size which is obtained by adding the number of write data to the start address for writing data exceeds the buffer memory size e When the points available for the start address for writing data or after is less than the number of write data 8 6 8 3 G BBLKWR 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC A series Program example At the timing of M 10 10 data of 960 points in DO to D959 are written to the Output data area for mode 3 of the QJ71PB92V module start I O No 0 with data consistency ensured starting from address 14336 3800n gt O M10 XOC PSS AO JG BBLKWR UO K14336 DO K960 Figure 8 6 BBLKWR Instruction Program Example z0 no 6 3 D FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING jee 2 Z is S T 2 Z 1B D 07 41 8 3 G BBLKWR 8 7 Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG A series CHAPTER9 TROUBLESHOOTING This c
95. for 2nd and 4th modules no area is assigned for them 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 26 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM ie 7 Z O Q 3 O w a 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LY series 3 Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 the FDL address and I O data length of each DP Slave are stored in this area Information of 125 modules is stored in the Address information area for mode 3 in the same order for each module Information for reserved or temporary slave reservation is also stored Address DEC HEX bt b8 b7 bO 22528 5800x FDL address of 1st module The FDL address of the 1st module is stored Initial value FFFFH 22529 5801H I O data length of 1st module 22528 5800x 0000x to 007D 0 to 125 FDL address 22530 5802 FDL address of 2nd module FFFFH No FDL address assigned The input data length of the 1st The output data length of the 1st 22531 5803 1 O data length of 2nd module module is stored Initial value module is stored Initial value FF 1 FF 1 to 22529 58011 00H to F4 Input data 00H to F4 Output data length length 22776 58F8n FDL address of 125th module unit byte unit byte 22777 58F9
96. for alarm acquisition in this area Initial value 0000H For the request format refer to Section 7 5 2 Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 The execution result of alarm acquisition is stored in this area Initial value 0000H For the response format for the execution result refer to Section 7 5 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM io 3 4 12 Time control area This area is used for the time control o Z O z o i O Mr o 7 1 Time control setting request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 Set request data for the time control setting in this area Initial value O000n For the request format refer to Section 7 6 2 Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 The execution result of the time control setting is stored in this area Initial value 0000n For the response format for the execution result refer to Section 7 6 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 50 3 4 11 Alarm area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 51 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation area MELSEC TA cries Address DEC HEX 23608 5C38H 23609 5C39H 23610 5C3AH 23611 5C3BH 23612 5C3CH 23613 5C3Dn 23614 5C3Ex 23615 5C3Fx This area is used for the temporary slave reservation function POINT 1 The corresponding bits of the Temporary slave reservation area are assi
97. for diagnostic information again If any diagnostic information has been generated the diagnostic information extended diagnostic information and or local station error information is stored in the buffer memory Clear request Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 Diagnostic information area Clear completed cleared signal X02 Figure 3 3 Diagnostic Information Area Clear Request Signal Y02 Diagnostic Information Area Cleared Signal X02 3 9 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 4 Global control request signal Y04 Global control completed signal X04 OVERVIEW a Turn ON the Global control request signal Y04 when executing the global control b When the Global control request signal Y04 is turned ON and global control processing is completed the Global control completed signal X04 turns ON c After the Global control completed signal X04 has turned ON turn OFF the Global control request signal Y04 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM d Turning OFF the Global control request signal Y04 turns OFF the Global control completed signal X04 n e Turn ON the Global control request signal Y04 while the Data exchange start completed signal X00 is ON If the Global control request signal Y04 is turned ON with the Data exchange start completed signal X00 OFF both of the
98. g Status in which the operation mode change is not executable The operation mode change is not allowed while the QJ71PB92V is executing the following processing Change the operation mode after the processing is completed If the operation mode change is attempted during execution of the following processing E3024 is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 e Acquisition of extended diagnostic information e Global control function e Acyclic communication e Alarm acquisition e FDT DTM technology e Time control function O S When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system 1 Operation mode of redundant CPU If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 E7 Section 9 5 2 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 6 2 Operation Mode Setting 6 5 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION eg Z E m W no vm W E W lt rs lt a PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TA cries 2 Tracking transfer between redundant CPUs Stop the tracking transfer between the redundant CPUs Use the special relays SM1520 to SM1583 of the
99. gt Section 2 4 2 Version of GX Developer Use GX Developer of Version 8 17T or later gt Section 2 1 3 When starting up the redundant system Check the Local station error information area Un G23071 to see if the QJ71PB92V has an error or not C gt Section 3 4 2 If an error exists remove the error cause When an error exists system switching is not executed 4 Continuation of each function of the QU71PB92V For precautions for continuing each function of the QU71PB92V refer to Section 7 9 7 5 When system switching occurred Do not perform the following before the system switching is completed e Turning off the power of the new control system e Resetting the redundant CPU on the new control system If either of these is performed before completion of the system switching DP Slave outputs may turn off momentarily Confirm that the system switching is completed before doing the above operations Completion of the system switching can be confirmed by either of the following methods Table4 12 Confirmation of system switching completion Item QJ71PB92V in new control system Communication READY signal X1B and Module READY signal X1D are ON RUN and READY LEDs are ON RSP ERR and FAULT LEDs are OFF 6 Operations available for the QJU71PB92V in the standby system The following operations are available for the QJU71PB92V in the standby system when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode Input signa
100. in Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELS 26 el series b Information of status 1 and 2 The diagnostic information generated on DP Slaves is stored to status 1 and 2 and corresponding bits turn ON 1 I O data exchange between a DP Master and DP Slaves is continued even if any of the following errors occurs The following table lists the meaning of each bit actions to be taken and the station where the diagnostic information is detected Table3 17 Diagnostic Information Item Bit Description Action Detected in 1 When I O data exchange is started Normally operating This occurs every time I O bO Requesting transmission of parameters from DP data exchange is started DP Slave Slave 2 While I O data are exchanged Check the DP Slave status and communication line b1 Diagnostic information read request Check the DP Slave status DP Slave b2 0 Fixed ae ae b3 The DP Slave is monitored by the watchdog timer Normally operating DP Slave b4 The DP Slave entered FREEZE mode Normally operating DP Slave b5 The DP Slave entered SYNC mode Normally operating DP Slave b6 O Reserved 1 When I O data exchange is stopped Normally operating This occurs every time I O b7 Excluded hom dat
101. memory list M ELSEG series Address The following shows a list of the buffer memories that are used for transferring data between the QJ71PB92V and the QCPU Table3 8 Buffer Memory List Description Initial Reference 1b em 12 9 value Section 0 to 2079 System area Use prohibited a Onto 81FH USP P Wats Values for masking invalidating diagnostic 2080 Diagnostic iotormanondnvalg information from DP Slaves are set in this 02B9u R W section 8201 setting area 3 4 6 area 2081 i i i Gishal eonitol ar The global control function to be executed is 0 R W Section 8211 set in this area 3 4 9 2082 to 2083 System area Use prohibited Z 8224 to 8231 2084 Diagnostic information non Tis ated iS used loser ihe time during which Section a das no diagnostic information is notified after 20 R W 8241 notification time setting area ee 3 4 6 communication start 2085 Current diagnostic information This ana SIONS the time remaining time Section n n notification tme area during which no diagnostic information is 0 R 3 46 8251 notified after communication start ii 2086 to 2253 System area Use prohibited 8264 to 8CDx gt Hse p 2254 i i i Current operation mode area This area stores data of the currently operating 0001n R Section 8CEn mode 3 4 2 2255 Operation mode change re
102. one for each type Max 6 alarms 9 wd ale w a a TE Wz QEE one anan leg Z E W no vm W E W lt rs lt a PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 15 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEG TA eres 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters by which data in the QU71PB92V buffer memory are automatically transferred to QCPU devices 6 6 1 Automatic refresh parameter setup procedure The following describes the automatic refresh parameter setup procedure Are the I O data of all DP Slaves to be refreshed to the same devices of the QOPU No Yes On the auto refresh setting screen select Block Transfer as the I O data refresh target J 7 PE Section 6 6 2 y On the auto refresh setting screen select Slave Specific Transfer as the I O data refresh target 37 Section 6 6 2 v In the I O Mapping dialog box set I O data refresh 2 target devices for respective DP Slaves ee eg aeenee On the auto refresh setting screen set refresh Section 6 6 2 target devices for any other than I O data ee Is the automatic refresh for an intelligent function module other than QJ71PB92V is set up when using GX IEC Developer No l On the auto refresh setting screen select AutoRefresh Update of CPU sami eee SOMOS On the auto refresh setting
103. p Y DP Slave 30 modules Figure 2 4 Maximum Configuration with No Repeater Connected Non Redundant DP Slaves Only 2 5 Z z PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 9 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 10 MELSEC TA eries b Maximum configuration with a repeater connected DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 DP Slave 60 Repeater 1 Connection points counted as number of modules Teen FDL address i l t Control system EDL address 0 Standby system J EDL address 1 ae Redundant QJ71 Redundant QJ71 module CEU FB9V module a Tracking cable Segment 1 Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave seeeee DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 30 S A M DP Slave 29 modules Repeater 1 Segment 2 DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave eeoeoeee FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 61 N J vy DP Slave 31 modules Figure 2 5 Maximum Configuration with a Repeater Connected Non Redundant DP Slaves Only 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEG lA orcs c When connecting 124 DP Slav
104. parameters to the standby system CPU 3 Reset the standby system CPU or power OFF ON the standby system Perform maintenance of the standby system Maintenance Sequence program modification Parameter change in GX Configurator DP or GX Developer Change of QJ71PB92V operation mode Recovery from error Powering OFF and then ON Reseting redundant CPU Replacement of QU71PB92V Return the operation mode of the standby system CPU to Separate mode 1 1 In Debug mode setting in Redundant parameter of GX Developer select Do not start with Debug mode 2 Write the set redundant parameters to the standby system CPU 3 Reset the standby system CPU or power OFF ON the standby system 1 To the next page Figure 9 9 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the Standby System 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 10 9 4 3 Maintenance of the QU71PB92V in the standby system Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG LY series 1 v Turn the maintenance completed system standby system CPU to RUN y Connect the PROFIBUS cable to the standby system QJ71PB92V To the previous page 2 Connect GX Developer to the control system CPU i b Execute system switching from GX Developer 1 1 Turn ON the manual switching enable flag SM1592 of the control system CPU 2 On the Redundant operation screen of GX Developer make a system switching re
105. redundant CPU to stop the tracking transfer gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System If the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V is changed without stopping the tracking transfer an error code may be stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 3 Confirmation after operation mode change To use the redundant CPU in Backup mode check that the same operation mode is active in the QU71PB92V in system A and the one in system B If the mode is different between them a malfunction may occur in system switching 6 2 Operation Mode Setting 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEG TA eries 6 3 Master Parameters Set the QJ71PB92V s transmission speed FDL address and other parameters 6 1 Start procedure a Right click on the DP Master graphic Modify Settings Z s PROFIBUS Master E 5 qo DZ Nodify Settings a g I O Mapping Transfer Right click on the graphic Figure 6 2 Master Settings Screen Start Procedure 2 O amp 2 Setting items Master Settings 2 Module QJ71PB92 Revision gt A Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION n zZz Name PROFIBUS Master 2 O Baudrate 1 5Mbps v FDL address 0 0 125 Starting 1 0 number ooo 0x0 OxFEO Zz Error action flag Goto Clear State epe lt Q a Min slave interval 80 1 65535 100 ps i Wi 2 N Polling timeout 50 1 65535 1 ms a 2 z QFE Data control time 100 T_wd 6 65535 10 ms g 7 gt Watchdog Estimated bus cyc
106. reexecuting the function in the case of system switching In the program for the temporary slave reservation function data in the following devices are tracking transferred e Start command device for execution of the temporary slave reservation function 3 Program example Program example for temporary slave reservation refer to section 7 9 1 POINT The program for the temporary slave reservation must be executed before turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO lt Section 7 9 1 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 7 Program example for temporary slave reservation 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC A eres z g A dedicated instruction is defined as an instruction designed to make programming easy gt for use of the intelligent function module functionality O This chapter describes the dedicated functions available for the QJ71PB92V 1 List of dedicated functions z The following list shows the dedicated instructions available for the QJ71PB92V 7 20 Table8 1 List of Dedicated Instructions EE O Dedicated Reference ise p Description i instruction section f ifi l i BBLKRD Reads data from the buffer memory of a specified module ensuring data sectong2 consistency n i ff f ifi le i Z BBLKWR Writes data to the buffer memory of a specified module ensuring data Section 8 3 6 consistency 3 m g 2 Usable devices 2 The following devi
107. request and response formats of the alarm read request with ACK OVERVIEW 1 Request format Table7 36 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value Set a request code 26432 6740H Set value 1502H Set the FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm is to be read Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 Empty area Write 0000n Set value Fixed to 0000H CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 26433 6741H 26434 6742H SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 40 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 37 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result A response code is stored 26446 674EH Stored value A502H 26447 674FH The FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm was read is stored Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The alarm data read completion status and the ACK response completion status are stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 2 1 1 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored Description Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally com
108. screen select AutoRefresh Update of GID Project gt Section 6 6 2 When using the data consistency function enable the Consistency setting in the Master parameter settings cee Section 6 3 y e cal parameters to the OR Section 6 6 3 a y Completed Figure 6 7 Automatic Refresh Parameter Setup Procedure 1 When using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system write the same parameters to the redundant CPUs in systems A and B 6 16 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 1 Automatic refresh parameter setup procedure 6 PARAMETER SETTING AG Q series 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings 1 PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings screen Set the automatic refresh setting a Start procedure Setup PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings b Setting items PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings CPU Device Access GX IEC Developer GID Settings Buffer Devices Slave Specific Transfer Please assign addresses in 1 0 Mapping Block Transfer Comm Trouble Area Extd Comm Trouble Area Slave Status Area Data Transfer using C Copy Instructions C AutoRefresh Update of GID Project Figure 6 8 Auto Refresh Setting Table6 8 Setting Items for Automatic Refresh Settings PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings Item Buffer Devices Set the CPU module devices used in the communication between the QU71PB92V and the CPU module Sl
109. service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 Set the FDL address of the target DP Slave Set value 00H to 7Dx 0 to 125 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 1 Set the FDL address of the target DP Slave Set value 00H to 7Dx 0 to 125 2 Set CommRef No contained in the response format of the INITIATE service Set value 00H to 7En 0 to 126 2 2H Set the length of the data to write Unit byte Set value 1 to 240 3 3H Set the slot No to write Set value 0 to 254 4 4H Set the index to write Set value 0 to 255 5 5H to 124 7CH Set the data to write b15 b8 b7 bO 5 5H Data 2 Data 1 6 6H Data 4 Data 3 to 124 7CH Data 240 Data 239 125 7DH to 127 7FH 7 19 Empty area Write 0000H Set value Fixed to 0000H 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC A eres 2 Response format a When normally completed W gt Table7 19 Response Format When Normally Completed o Offset Address Result A response code is stored 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE 2 0 OH Stored value A401H E 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE 5 0 Stored value A411H Ei 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE ao b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slav
110. slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 Figure 3 34 Operation in Temporary Slave Reservation Request Area POINT 1 Set values in the Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 while the Data exchange start request signal YOO is OFF Values set with the Data exchange start request signal YOO ON are ignored 2 Normal DP Slaves can be changed to Temporary slave reservations Changing Reserved stations DP Slaves set as reserved stations with slave parameters to Normal DP Slave status is not allowed For the temporary slave reservation function refer to Section 4 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 52 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LY series 3 4 14 Redundant system area This area is used for the redundant system support function For details on the redundant system support function refer to Section 4 8 POINT 1 The corresponding bits of the Redundant system area are assigned in order of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in order of the FDL address The actual assignment order can be confirmed in the Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Slave List of GX Configurator DP Order of assignment E Last known CPU Error BATTERY ERROR 2 When parameters have
111. standby system New control system Power Power Executes system switching Redundant QJ 71 supply module CPU PB92V Redundant QJ 71 supply module CPU PB92V Tracking cable Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 4 Before recovery of the switching target DP Slave an failure error occurred at another DP Slave New standby system New control system See Redundant QJ 71 Te Redundant QJ 71 module CPU PB92V switching modde CPU PB92V Tracking cable Bus terminator DP Slave FDL address 3 DP S lave FDL address 2 failure failure 2 Do not change the initial value of b8 in the Diagnostic information invalid setting area Un G2080 L gt Section 3 4 6 Changing the initial value disables the system switching by a DP Slave 3 System switching by DP Slave is enabled when the value in the Current diagnostic information non notification time area Un G2085 becomes 0 after the Data exchange start request signal YOO turns ON 4 34 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 Functions M als 2G Q series 3 Functions available for redundant systems The following shows the functions available for the case where the QU71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system Tabl
112. the DP Slave and start the DP Slave 53 gt Manual for DP Slave Start I O data exchange 1 Did I O data exchange start successfully Check the LED status lt 3 Section 5 3 Completed 1 Start I O data exchange by either of the following methods Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 Start it from GX Configurator DP Figure 5 1 Procedures before System Operation Single CPU System a TE zoz to Wi u aa FEE UZ 7 OL u gt ann No Review parameter settings PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 5 2 Procedures and Settings before System Operation 5 2 5 2 1 In the case of the single CPU system D PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC Af series 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system Start Mount the QJ71PB92V on the base unit Set the RUN STOP switches of the redundant CPUs in system A and B to STOP and turn ON the power supply to systems A and B Set the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Debug mode 1 In Debug mode setting of Redundant parameter in GX Developer select Start with Debug mode 2 Write the configured redundant parameters to the redundant CPUs in systems A and B 3 Reset the redundant CPUs in systems A and B at the same time or turn the power OFF and then ON Se QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Perform self dia
113. the devices x0C posited E G BBLKWR uo K14336 D100 K96 5 Lv PENEN 5 E Ae Output data are written to Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 using devices Output data stored in the devices are tracking transferred Figure 7 29 Processing of the QJ71PB92V in the Control System Before System Switching D zZ E aD So occ occa O W 1 Figure 7 29 is an example for using a dedicated instruction D 2 When using the automatic refresh output data in the specified auto refresh target devices are tracking transferred 2 e Processing of the QJ71PB92V in the new control system After system 2 switching z The tracking transferred output data are written to the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 This processing is Z not needed when the automatic refresh is used 255 ON for 1 scan only after switching aoe the system from standby to control SEb SHI518 XIB XID XIE PEEN UA Oo T t BHOY DIOO 614336 K9 Tracking transferred output data are written to Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 Figure 7 30 Processing of the QJ71PB92V in the New Control System After System Switching PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 68 PROGRAMMING MELSEG ores 2 Precautions a Operation mode change To change the operation m
114. the specified Alignment is correct and retry DON Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E484H The CommRef number is incorrect retry Adjust the total size of S Len and D Len to 230 bytes or E485H Total size of S Len and D Len is out of range less and retry E490H Physical execution error detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E491H Execution error on the protocol was detected 7 Taal corrective actions E492H Execution error on the application was detected E4A0H Read error was detected on the DP Slave side E4A1H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side E4A2H Module error was detected on the DP Slave side E4A3H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available E4A4H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E4A5H Request not supported error was detected on the DP correctly set or not and retry Slave side For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E4A6H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E4A7H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side E4A8H Incorrect slot number was detected on the DP Slave side E4A9H Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side 9 17 9 5 Error Codes To the next page 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication Q TROUBLESHOOTING Error codes E4AAH to E4DEH Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4
115. to alarm data No 3 b10 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed b14 Completion status of response to alarm data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed b11 Completion status of response to alarm data No 4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed b15 Completion status of response to alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition To the next page 7 38 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING 26449 6751H to 26484 6774H 26485 6775H 26486 6776H 26487 6777H 26488 6778H MELSEC TA cries Table7 35 Response Format When Failed Continued Buffer memory address Result The alarm data that was read by the alarm read request without ACK is stored I gt Section 7 5 1 2 a An error code is stored lt Section 9 5 4 Alarm data No 1 1 2 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 1 is stored 3 gt Section 9 5 4 When a value other than E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 When E5084 is currently stored in buffer me
116. to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident e
117. turns ON d Check the execution result stored in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 and turn OFF the Time control start response signal X19 Remark Sooo ooo coor ooo For program examples on the time control function refer to the following e Single CPU system L gt Section 7 6 e Redundant system gt Section 7 9 6 4 18 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions 4 3 1 Time control over DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LAY series 4 4 Data Swap Function This function swaps the upper and lower bytes in word units when I O data is sent and received z Use this function for DP Slaves whose word structure is different upper and lower bytes are reversed from that of the QJ71PB92V This function enables you to swap upper and lower bytes to exchange I O data without the need to create a special sequence program for the swapping 6 lt x QJ 71PB92V DP Slave 23 Input data Input area bz Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 ae H L L H L H Input data 4 Data2 Data 2 a Data2 Data 2 arsa H L z L H 5 2 5 Output data Output area fe oo 3 Data3 Data 3 A Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 o H L a L H R L H 5 ie a 4 Data4 Data 4 a Data4 Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 5 anaes H L L H L H Y I O data exchange H High byte L Lo
118. turns ON 6 lt d Input data from DP Slaves are stored in the Input data area for mode 3 23 Un G6144 to Un G10239 26 e Turning OFF the Data exchange start request signal Y00 turns OFF the Data exchange start request signal X00 and I O data exchange is stopped 2 Output data exchange Data exchange start 5 request signal Y00 5 Data exchange start completed signal X00 Bus cycle time Bc Be Bc Be I O data exchange I O data exchange o started stopped 3 Output data area for mode 3 aa Output data V Output data Output data 5 Un G14336 to Un G18431 Initial value at Bc at Bc at Bo Input data exchange awo ZEE Data exchange start ame request signal Y00 pi a a DN Data exchange start as completed signal X00 OF g anan Bus cycle time Bc Be I O data exchange o started m Input data area for mode 3 Data of previous exchange Input data Input data Input data E Un G6144 to Un G10239 at Be at Be at Be ef Figure 4 2 I O Data Exchange Processing 2 CD Oooo ooo ooo oreo For program examples of the I O data exchange refer to the following g e Single CPU system gt Section 7 1 7 8 ae e Redundant system lt gt gt Section 7 9 1 9 eeseeeseceoeeeeeeeeseeceoseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeceoeceeeeeeee eee eaoe ee ee nO Zz aQ Ww be Se ag 4 1 PROFIBUS DPVO Functio
119. using the buffer memory and I O signals gt Section 4 1 2 Supporting the global control function By sending services SYNC UNSYNC FREEZE UNFREEZE to each DP Slave in a group synchronous control of DP Slave I O data is available 5 Section 4 1 3 Table1 2 Descriptions of Services This service is for synchronizing the output status of DP Slaves SYNC In the SYNC mode the output status of a DP Slave is refreshed each time it receives the SYNC service While no SYNC service is received the output status is held UNSYNC This service is for ending the SYNC mode This service is for synchronizing the input status of DP Slaves In the FREEZE mode the input status of a DP Slave is refreshed each time it receives the FREEZE service FREEZE While no FREEZE service is received the input status is held UNFREEZE _ This service is for ending the FREEZE service Supporting PROFIBUS DPV1 and PROFIBUS DPV2 PROFIBUS DPV1 and PROFIBUS DPV2 which are extended versions of PROFIBUS DP are supported The QJU71PB92V supports the following 1 PROFIBUS DPV1 e Acyclic communication with DP Slaves lt gt Section 4 2 1 e Alarm acquisition lt gt Section 4 2 2 e FDT DTM technology lt gt gt Section 4 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DPV2 e Time control function on DP Slaves gt gt Section 4 3 1 1 1 Features 1 3 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS
120. was detected on the DP Slave side E570H Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the DP Slave side ES71H Resource error was detected during read processing on the DP Slave side E572H Resource error was detected during write processing on the DP Slave side E573H The resource is already in use on the DP Slave side E574H There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave side E575H Incorrect parameter exists in the ACK request There is no alarm for which ACK can be requested Check the alarm status on the specified DP Slave and E581H The alarm specified for ACK request is not found retry o Check if the DP Slave supports the alarm function or not E582H Use of the alarm function is not allowed and retry E590H E591H E592H E593H E594H ae p Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative E595H Hardware failure 2h a explaining a detailed description of the problem E596H E597H E598H E599H ES9AH O E59BH Acyclic communication is executed to the same DP Slave Verify that the Acyclic communication is completed and E59CH There is no executable resource retry E59DH There is an invalid parameter setting Check the parameter settings and then retry 9 21 9 5 Error Codes To the next page 9 5 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A eres Error codes E59EH to E5A2H Table9 7 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Continued
121. 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 b3 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed The length of the alarm data is stored Unit byte 26449 6751H Stored value 1 to 64 The alarm type is stored Alarm type Diagnosis alarm Process alarm 26450 6752h Alarm data No 1 Pull alarm A5131 Plug alarm A5141 Status alarm A5151 Update alarm Manufacturer AS16H specific alarm The slot No is stored 26451 67 645 167035 Stored value 0 to 254 To the next page 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 32 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING 26452 6754H 26453 6755H to 26484 6774H 26485 6775H to 26488 6778H MELSEC TA eries Table7 31 Response Format When Normally Completed Continued Buffer memory address Result Alarm data No 1 The alarm status and sequence No are stored b15 b8 b7 to b3 b2 b1 b0 0 3 2 1 1 Alarm details category is stored 00 No additional information 01 Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot
122. 0 626788 Hour is set 10 o clock mov KO 26789 Minute is set 0 minutes U0 SS _ _ fnov KO 26790 Second is set 0 seconds U0 Mov Ko 626791 1 000 second value is set 0 UO qf 0 KO G26792 Clock status is set 0 Se E Y19 Time control is executed Reads the response HO UO H 1 mov 626800 D5000 code and error code Processing for normal completion D5000 H0A602 Time control completion j processing Y19 Processing for failed completion D5000 HOA602 Time control completion processing Figure 7 19 Program Example for Time Control Function Time Data Write Request 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 56 7 6 4 Program example OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING 7 57 MELSEC TA eries 7 7 Program Example for Temporary Slave Reservation Program example for temporary slave reservation refer to section 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 POINT The program for the temporary slave reservation must be executed before turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO gt Section 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 7 7 Program Example for Temporary Slave Reservation PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V ona MELSECNET H Remote
123. 0 M1001 4301 WOvP K20 D6001 tt RENTO J Kl K1 HO K2084 D6001 Kl M1002 M1002 M1003 RST M301 M1003 Processing for failed initialization X101B X101D X101F X20 X1000 k Hk FMOVP KO DO K96 KO gt Writing the initial value KO gt _ 7P RENTO n K1 K1 HO K14336 DO K96 M1004 of output data M1004 M1005 1 M302 Processing for failure of output data initial value writing M1005 1 f X101B X101D X101F X20 X1000 M302 ma ay Y1000 Y1000 I O data exchange start processing X1000 X101B X101D X101F 1 4 Figure 7 25 Program Example for the I O Data Exchange Function When Mounted on a Remote I O Station To the next page 7 63 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING M als 26 lA eries MO M303 H HH REMFR SI K1 K1 HO K6144 DO K96 M1006 a Reading input data M1006 M1007 z H SET M303 w y Processing for failure of input data reading MO M303 M304 f af KO gt Z O EKo gt 7P RENFR ri Ki KI HO K23040 D200 K25 M1008 Reading Slave status lt area 5 M1008 M1009 ar A SET M304 3 no mo Processing for failure of Slave status area reading a rr fr yf fr er rr fr rrr rrr X L g O E Program for control of
124. 00000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000 9 27 I INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE eeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 22 Input data area for mode I eececccccccccccocscocsoves 3 25 Input data start address area for mode 3 eseese9 3 28 I O data ExchangE eeeeescccceeccccoeooccocosocooooooo 4 2 I O data exchange arca coccccccccccccccccccccccccvcces 3 24 L List of I O signals 0000000000000000 000000000000000000000000 3 4 Index 1 TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES Local FDL address display area eeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeee 3 22 Local station error information area serreeeeeeeeeveee 3 21 Local station information areaseeresceccecccccccccccee 3 21 M Master parameters COCOCOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OO OOOOOOOOOO 6 7 Max bus cycle time ccooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000 3 43 Min bus cycle time 0000000000 000000000000000000000000000 3 43 Module READY signal X1 DB 3 1 6 O Offline test status Aredereececcccccccccccccccccccsccceee 3 22 Operation mode change AIR ccccccccccccccccvcvccecs 3 23 Operation mode change completed signal X11 3 14 Operation mode change request areareeeeeeeeeeees 3 23 Operation mode change request signal Y11 3 14 Operation mode change result area eereeseeeeeeeeee 3 23 Operation mode setting Occccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 6 4 Operation mode signal X1 eccccccccccccccccccoceees 3 13 Output data area for mode 3 eeecceeceececcecseceees 3 26 Output data start address area for mode 3 e s 3 28
125. 000000000000000000000000 2 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 3 Program examples using automatic refresh coocoooooooooooooooooooooo0o0000000000000000000000000000000000 6 Program example using dedicated instructions cococoooooooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000 9 Program example using the MOV instruction 0000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 11 7 2 Program Example for Acquisition of Extended Diagnostic Error Informationsssessessssccsccecsecceeee 7 12 7 3 Program Example for Global Control Function COC OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOOOOS 7 13 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves e eeeeeeeeeeeseeesceececesceccooecoooccoe 7 14 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 4 3 7 4 4 7 4 5 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_ SERVICE sssssssssssscecccccsccccccccccccceseseeevees 7 16 WRITE services Class1_ SERVICE Class2_ SERVICE eeeesseeeeeeeeeeeecececccceccccccececcceees 7 19 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE eeeeeeeseseeesesececececocceceooceceoooosooosososssosososesesee 7 22 ABORT service Class2_SERVICE e eeeeeeeessssseseesescecececececececococececececceseosssssssssssse 7 26 Program example 000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 28 7 5 Program Example for Alarm ACquisitiOnNee eeeeeeeccescccccccccecccocccccccccoccococoococcoccoccccocoscoscooooo 7 30 7 5 1 7 5 2 7 5 3 7 5 4 Alarm read re
126. 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 1 2 1 1 Precautions for use on MELSECNET H remote I O stations sssseesseeeseecseesscccscescccccsesseoees 2 4 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration cocooococoooooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 D 5 2 2 1 Basic configuration of the PROFIBUS DP NETWOrK eecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccvcce D 5 2 2 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples ccoocooocooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000 2 6 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only eeeeeeeescccccccocecoccocecoccocccoccoooosooooo 2 8 2 3 1 PROFIBUS DP network configuration cocoooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 8 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples cooocoocooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000 2 9 2 4 Checking the Function Version and Serial NO ceccccococoocoooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 14 CHAPTER3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 67 3 1 Performance Specifications cecereeececcccccceccecsccsccsocecsccsocsocscsscsecsocsocooscosecceccosossossocoocsoses 3 1 3 2 Function LiSteececccococooooooooooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 3 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU eeeeeseesesesecsososocoososocoocososoososoee3 4 3 3 1 List of I O signals sese eeseseseseseseseseeeeesececececccecoecoccccoocooososooosososoc
127. 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 1 1 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves eecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccoce 4 1 1 4 2 2 Alarm acquisition POCO OO OO OOOO OOOO SOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOO OO OS OO OOOOH OO SOO OS OOO OOOO SOS OOOH OOOO OOOOH OS OOOO OOOOOOOD 4 14 4 2 3 FDT DTM TECHNOLOGY eeeeeecececccccccccccccccccccccccccvocccccvccsccccocsccccocscccscossocscocsocscocsoeses 4 16 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 17 4 3 1 Time control over DP SlaVEs ccccccccccccococcococoocooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo0000o00000000000000000 4 17 4 4 Data Swap FUNCtion eseeeeeeseeeeeceseseecceooooooeccecocoooceococoocoococecceccooooeccccocoooooseecesssesseesese A 19 4 5 Data Consistency Function sseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeceoeoooccececococooococcocooooscccocoooossececocossssseeseees 4 21 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error esseeeeeseesesssseseeceoeoosccecceceooossssesoeos 4 24 4 7 Temporary slave reservation fUNCtION eeeeeeeeeeeeseseseecceoeooooeccecoecooeocecocoeosocecceseoosssssesoeos 4 27 4 8 Redundant system Support fUNCtON eeeeeeseseeeseeceescoceocecoecoococecceocoooosccecoecossssescoesesssseseee 4 29 4 9 QJ71 PB92D Compatible FunCtione eesceccccccooooocooooo
128. 1 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 1 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 Bits b15 to b13 of address 26424 6738n are fixed to 0 Figure 3 23 Each Station s Alarm Status Un G26417 to Un G26424 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area This area stores diagnostic information settings and actual diagnostic information OVERVIEW 1 Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 The time during which no diagnostic information is notified after communication start after Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON is set in this area Initial value 20 seconds CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Table3 15 Diagnostic Information Non notification Time Setting Area Un G2084 Set Value Description Set the time during which diagnostic information is not notified Unit seconds oO 0 to 65535 This setting prevents temporary error detection e g when turning ON a DP Slave after turning ON the QU71PB92V When diagnostic information is generated within the time duration set by this setting the conditions are as follows e The Diagnostic information detection signal X01 does not turn ON e The RSP ERR LED does not turn ON e No error
129. 1PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D Buffer memory address DEC 31 9 4 3 Buffer memory Changes have been made to buffer memory addresses Change programs referring to the following table TableApp 7 Buffer Memory Comparisons Area name Buffer memory address Area name MELSEC A eres Replacement precautions 2256 Operation mode change 2256 Operation mode change In the QJ71PB92V values stored in 8D0x result area 8D0x result area the buffer memory and operation specifications are different 2258 rine easa eanca 2258 Self diagnostic test status z Section 3 4 1 8D2 8D2 code area Modify the relevant parts of the sequence program 6144 to 10239 0 to 959 1800 to Input data area for mode 3 0s to 3BFs Input area 27F Fu 14336 to 960 to 1919 Buffer memory addresses have been 18431 changed Output data area for mode 3 3C0 to Output area i 3800 to 77Fs Modify the relevant parts of the 47FFu sequence program 22528 to 22777 Address information area for 1920 to 2039 f Address information area 58004 to mode 3 7801 to 7F 7x 58F9u 23072 to 23321 Diagnostic information area 2040 to 2079 SES Communication trouble area 5A20 to for mode 3 7F8x to 81Fx Buffer memory addresses have been 5B191 changed 23328 to In the QJ71PB92V values stored in 23454 Extended diagnostic 2096 to 2110 Expansion communication the buffer memory and operation 5B20x to
130. 2 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 1 Maximum configuration with no repeater connected DP Master QJ71PB92V 1 DP Slaves 31 DP Master Class 1 FDL address 0 Connection points counted as number of modules Power a QJ71 supply QCPU ppooy module Segment 1 Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave Bie cee DP Slave FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 31 S J V DP Slave 31 modules Figure 2 1 Maximum Configuration With No Repeater Connected 1 When using redundant CPUs configure the network as shown in Section 2 3 2 Maximum configuration with a repeater connected DP Master QJ71PB92V 1 DP Slaves 61 Repeater 1 DP Master Class 1 FDL address 0 Connection points counted as number of modules Power QJ71 supply QCPU PB92V module Segment 1 Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave PAO DP Slave FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 30 L vV J DP Slave 30 modules Bus terminator Repeater 1 Segment 2 DP Slave DP Slave PEE FDL address 31 FDL address 32 V DP Slave 31 modules DP Slave FDL address 61 J Figure 2 2 Maximum Configuration with a Repeater Connected 1 When using redundant CPUs configure the network as shown in Section 2 3 2 6 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration 2 2 2 PROFIBUS DP netw
131. 25 2 Set the CommRef No contained in the response format of the INITIATE service Set value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 Set Instance Reason 2 2H The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H 2 Set Subnet The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 30H Empty area Write 0000H 3 3H to 127 7FH ono Grn Set value Fixed to 0000H 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 26 7 4 4 ABORT service Class2_SERVICE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA cries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 25 Response Format When Normally Completed Offset Address Result 0 OH A response code is stored Stored value A413H 1 1H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value 0000H b When failed Table7 26 Response Format When Failed Offset Address Resul
132. 3 The time during which the FDT DTM technology is re executable varies depending on the DP Slave If not re executable retry until it becomes executable 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 2 3 FDT DTM technology 4 Functions M al 26 Kel series 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions if POINT g 1 To utilize PROFIBUS DPV2 functions use a DP Slave that supports the PROFIBUS DPV2 For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 2 When using the PROFIBUS DP2 function set a Min slave interval value Z greater than the bus cycle time calculated from Pt Tsdi and Lr lt 57 Section lt 3 5 1 aie If the Min slave interval is less than the value calculated from Pt Tsdi and 29 Lr the processing of the PROFIBUS DPV2 function may take time no 4 3 1 Time control over DP Slaves 6 xt O This function allows the QJ71PB92V to operate as the time master and set the time of each DP Slave DP Master Class 1 Power QJ71 supply QCPU PB92V module Time setting 7 Z O e Z U I Zz awo AcE w fa a 500 DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave aoe QFE OLG U gt anan Figure 4 14 Time Control Function 1 Requests available on the QJ71PB92V 2 For whether the DP Slave supports this function or not refer to the manual for the DP 7 Slave m a Requests for writing time data a Table4 6 Request for Writing Time Data
133. 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 11 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TA cries a Class1 services When executing a Class1 service verify in advance that the bit corresponding to the target DP Slave is ON in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 Table4 4 Available Services Class1 services Service Name Description READ Class1_SERVICE Reads data from any specified DP Slave WRITE Class1_SERVICE Writes data to any specified DP Slave 1 The data that can be read or written by READ or WRITE services vary depending on the DP Slave to be used For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave b Class2 services Connect the line to the DP Slave by the INITIATE service and execute the READ and or WRITE services To end the acyclic communication disconnect the line from the DP Slave by the ABORT service When executing a Class2 service to a DP Slave that is exchanging I O data verify in advance that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 When executing a Class2 service to a DP Slave that is not exchanging I O data verify in advance that the DP Slave has been completely activated For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave Table4 5 Available Services Class2 services Service Name Description INITIATE Class2_SERVICE Establishes a line connect
134. 5 for each DP Slave formula shown in Section 4 8 5 Yes Using GX Configurator DP check the parameters LLS GX Contigurator DP Operating Manual Were the same parameters written to both QJ71PB92Vs in System A and B Parameters set in GX Configurator DP No If any different parameter is found write the same parameters to the QU71PB92Vs in system A and B again Yes No Is the PROFIBUS cable Pr i Check the PROFIBUS cable connections lt gt Section 5 5 wiring correct Check if the devices that store the start command and output data in the sequence program are set as tracking devices Section 7 9 Are the devices that store the start command and output data in the sequence program within the tracking range Store the tracked output data in the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching the system from standby to control SM1518 3 Section 7 9 Were the tracked output data stored in the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 within 1 scan after system switching Completed Figure 9 6 When Output Data Turn OFF or Momentarily OFF in System Switching 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 8 9 4 1 When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching o zZ E O n Ww a a O APPENDICES INDEX
135. 54 6756x Alarm data 4th byte Alarm data 3rd byte to 26484 6774x Alarm data 64th byte Alarm data 63rd byte To the next page 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK 7 42 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres Table7 37 Response Format When Normally Completed Continued Buffer memory address Result 26485 6775H A response code is stored Stored value A501H The alarm type is stored Stored value Alarm type A510x Diagnosis alarm A511 Process alarm 26486 6776H Pull alarm Plug alarm Status alarm Update alarm Manufacturer specific alarm Alarm data No 1 The alarm status and sequence No are stored a b15 b8 b7 to b3 b2 bi bO 0 3 2 1 1 Alarm details category is stored 00 No additional information 26487 6777 01 Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot H 10 No error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 11 Error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 2 Whether individual ACK is required or not is stored 0 No ACK return from the user is required 1 ACK return from the user is required 3 Sequence No is store
136. 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Each bit indicates the n th DP Slave 23052 5A0Cu 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 23053 5A0Dx 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 23054 5A0En 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 23055 5A0Fu 1 1 11125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 Bits b15 to b13 of address 23055 5A0Fn are fixed to 0 Figure 3 17 Slave Status Area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 When the Data exchange start completed signal X00 is turned ON the data in the Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 are updated The following is an example QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP a 0 J C DP Slave DP Slave oe Slave eto owe DP Slave _ FDLaddress 9 FDL address 1 i i FDL address 6 FDL address 7 l i N DP SI Temporary slave Normal DP Slave Resewedistation ubelal save oma ave __teservation ____feservation 1st module 2nd module 3rd module 4th module 5th module Results stored in Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 Address DEC HEX 615 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 23048 5A08 0 0 0
137. 5H 6 6H Profile Ident Number is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 S_Type is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 2 S_Len is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 7 7H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 D_Type is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 2 D_Len is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 8 8H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value 0000H 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE 7 24 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA cries b When failed Table7 23 Response Format When Failed Offset Address Result 0 OH An error code is stored lt gt Section 9 5 3 1 1H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef N
138. 71PB92D compatible function enabled C 4 in this section No Check the parameter settings Yes lt 2 Perform self diagnostics on the QJ 71PB92V Use output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error No Set the output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error by GX Developer and write the PLC parameters to the QCPU Reset the QCPU j 1 Figure 4 35 Procedures before System Operation 4 9 QU71PB92D Compatible Function 4 FUNCTIONS M als 6 Q il z S In GX Configurator DP set the PROFIBUS DP parameters i Select QJ 71P B92D as the module for the GX Configurator DP fi lt 3 5 in this section fo project Connect a PROFIBUS cable to the QJ 71PB92V 6 y z Connect the PROFIBUS cable to a DP Slave and start up the S DP Slave aie 2S y OS Change the operation mode of the QJ 71PB92D to a mode that allows communications with DP Slaves y Start the I O data exchange z amp y Z S a Has the I O data exchange been 2 No Check the parameter settings started normally Check the LEDs gt 2 Yes Completed 1 The operation mode is changed by either of the following Change it from GX Configurator DP Except for GX Configurator DP Version 7 01B Use the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 and Operation mode change request signal Y 11 2 I O
139. 71PB92V and Former Models App 2 Appendix 2 1 Specification comparisons TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES 2 Functional comparisons TableApp 4 Functional Comparisons M ELSEC series PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D PROFIBUS DPVO I O data exchange o o o Acquisition of diagnostic and 2 extended diagnostic O O O information Global control function O O O PROFIBUS DPV1 _ Acyclic communication with DP Slaves 9 x 7 Alarm acquisition O x x Support of FDT DTM technology O 5 PROFIBUS DPV2 _ Time control over DP Slaves O x x Data swap function O O x Data consistency function O O o Output status setting for the O G x case of a CPU stop error Temporary slave reservation O 7 n Redundant system support function O x x QJ71PB92D compatible function O x x O Available x Not available 1 They are different in the number of connectable DP Slaves and I O data size lt 3 1 in this appendix 2 Extended diagnostic information cannot be read from any station 3 Data consistency function by the FROM TO instruction only is executable Data consistency function by automatic refresh or dedicated instructions is not executable 4 Set by the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer lt gt Section 6 7 App 3 Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 1
140. Address Table3 8 Buffer Memory List Continued Description Initial 26 el series Reference DEC HEX value Section 2265 to 2271 System area Use prohibited 8D9x to 8DFx gt Use p 2272 Section Current bus cycle time This area stores the current bus cycle time 0 R 8E0u 3 4 8 2273 Min b scy le time This area stores the minimum value of the bus 0 R Section 8E1H en cycle time 3 4 8 2274 Max b s ycle tiie This area stores the maximum value of the bus 0 R Section 8E2k eee cycle time 3 4 8 2275 to 6143 System area Use prohibited _ 8E3u to 17FFH Use prohibitad sao E In Communication mode mode 3 this area is Bean Input data area for mode 3 used to store the input data received from each 0 R 18004 to 27F Fx 3 4 4 DP Slave 10240 to 14335 System area Use prohibited 28001 to 37FFx gt Usep 14336 to 18431 In Communication mode mode 3 this area is Section Output data area for mode 3 used to set the output data to be sent to each 0 R W 3800H to 47FFH 3 4 4 DP Slave 18432 to 22527 System area Use prohibited 48001 to 57FFx gt Use p In Communication mode mode 3 this area is F 22528 to 22777 Address information area oe hti Section used to store the FDL address of each DP FFFFH R 5800 to 58F9x for mode 3 3 4 4 Sl
141. Alarm read request signal Y18 e Turning OFF the Alarm read request signal Y18 turns OFF the Alarm read response signal X18 Remark Eco ooo ooo For details on acquisition of alarms refer to Section 4 2 2 eeeeeeseeeveeeeeoeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeoseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee e 6 3 15 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 12 Time control start request signal Y19 Time control start response signal X19 OVERVIEW a Turn ON the Time control start request signal Y19 when executing the time control over DP Slaves according to the information set in the Time control setting request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 b Turning ON the Time control start request signal Y19 clears the information in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 c The Time control start response signal X19 turns ON when the time control over DP Slaves is executed and the execution result is stored in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G2681 2 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM io d Read the execution result from the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 and turn OFF the Time control start request signal Y19 e Turning OFF the Time control start request signal Y19 turns OFF the Time control start response signal X19 2 Z O z o i O M a o eeaeeeeeeveee
142. B92V The following shows the I O signals to from the QCPU Table3 4 List of I O Signals Signal Direction QJ71PB92V QCPU Signal Direction QCPU QJ71PB92V SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION 3 X00 Data exchange start completed signal YOO Data exchange start request signal n Diagnostic information detection reset request X01 Diagnostic information detection signal Y01 signal X02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal Y02 Diagnostic information area clear request signal X03 Use prohibited Y03 Use prohibited X04 Global control completed signal Y04 Global control request signal X05 Global control failed signal Y0O5 Use prohibited X06 Extended diagnostic information read response vos Extended diagnostic information read request signal signal X07 Y07 X08 Y08 X09 Use prohibited Yo09 Use prohibited X0A YOA QW X0B YOB Ze X0C Data consistency requesting signal YOC Data consistency start request signal i mi X0D YOD Restart request signal a S X0E Use prohibited YOE 8 XOF YOF Use prohibited eae X10 Operation mode signal Y10 X11 Operation mode change completed signal Y11 Operation mode change request signal X12 Y12 X13 Y13 sE U hibited as U hibited se prohibite se prohibite X15 p Y15 j X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Alarm read response signal Y18 Alarm read request signal X19 Time control start response signal Y19 Time control start request signal To t
143. CK response completion status are stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 1 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored Bit Description Bit Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 bO 0 Failed or not executed b4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed b6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 26448 6750H 2 The ACK response completion status is stored Bit Completion status of response to alarm data No 1 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed b8 b12 Description Completion status of response to alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed b9 Completion status of response to alarm data No 2 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed b13 Completion status of response to alarm data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response
144. CPU stop error monne ee D b When the QJ71PB92V is mounted to a redundant system I O data exchange with DP m Slaves is continued regardless of the setting until systems A and B go down Temporary slave reservation Without modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP this function allows the Section 4 7 function DP Slave station type to be changed to Reserved station temporarily Redundant system support When the control system CPU or the QU71PB92V detects an error the control and Section 4 8 function standby systems are switched each other to continue communications This function is used to replace the QJ71PB92D with the QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D compatible j i ae i F g eia When the QJ71PB92D has failed replace it with the QJ71PB92V using the Section 4 9 A uncti QJ71PB92D compatible function S a a nO Zz 2E EO 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Ll series 4 1 PROFIBUS DPVO Functions 4 1 1 I O data exchange The QJ71PB92V can operate as a DP Master Class 1 on the PROFIBUS DP system and perform I O data exchange with DP Slaves Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V enabling the exchange of I O data up to 8192 bytes 1 Up to 124 DP Slaves when the QJ71PB92V is used in a redundant system QCPU QJ71PB92V De
145. Conditions for write to output data 2nd word SB49 Data link status own station MO Refresh start request SW70 0 Baton pass status of each station M1 For MC instruction SW74 0 Cyclic transmission status of each station M300 ON for 1 scan only after start of communication SW78 0 Parameter communication status of each station M301 For REMTO REMEFR instruction interlock TO to T4 For MELSECNET H interlock M302 For holding I O data exchange run M303 For REMTO REMFR instruction interlock M304 For REMTO REMEFR instruction interlock M1000 REMTO instruction Completion M1001 REMTO instruction Result M1002 REMTO instruction Completion M1003 REMTO instruction Result M1004 REMTO instruction Completion _ M1005 REMTO instruction Result M1006 REMFR instruction Completion M1007 REMFR instruction Result M1008 REMFR instruction Completion M1009 REMFR instruction Result M1010 REMTO instruction Completion M1011 REMTO instruction Result c Devices used as buffer memory read target Table7 62 List of Devices Used as Buffer Memory Read Target Device Description Device Description DO to D95 Input data D6000 Diagnostic information invalid setting area Diagnostic information non notification time setting D100 to D195 Output data D6001 area D200 to D207 Slave status area Normal communication detection D208 to D215 Slave status area Reserved station setting status D216 to D224 7 61 Slave status area D
146. DP Slaves lt 37 Section 7 1 1 2 a l S J g nE N MO M304 c KJ Ha RENTO J1 K1 K1 HO K14336 D100 K96 M1010 M1010 M1011 y a RST 303 Writing output data Z 5 RST H304 5 A Processing for failure of ee output data writing 00 of ee a a a G l M M a M M l M l Z 72 SET 4300 i Zine me o om o om o om o om o o am o m o a 0 am o am o am o am o am o am o am o am o o ol I N 2 w an m Sano Not required when initial settings are not changed aes SoFi Figure 7 25 Program Example for the I O Data Exchange Function When Mounted on a Remote I O Station Continued E o Z E m n ae Lu Ee lu PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 64 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING MELSEG ores 7 8 2 Other precautions When programming for the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H remote I O station pay attention to the following 1 QJ71PB92V I O signals I O signals of the QU71PB92V are refreshed into link devices LX LY on the remote O station and then transferred to the remote master station Make the link devices LX LY of the remote master station refreshed into the devices X Y of the QCPU and use them in sequence programs 2 QJ71PB92V buffer memory Use
147. DURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres 7 9 3 Program example for global control function If a system switching occurs during execution of the global control function the processing cannot be continued This section explains a program example for reexecuting the global control function in the case of system switching 1 Device assignments in program example a Devices used by the QU71PB92V The devices are the same as those in Section 7 3 1 a b Devices used by the user Table7 74 List of User Devices Description Device Description ON for 1 scan only after switching system from SM1518 y Weening sy X25 Global control execution command standby to control MO Refresh start request lt 3 Section 7 9 1 2 Tracking devices for reexecuting the function after system switching Data in the following devices are tracking transferred e Start command device by which the Global control request signal Y04 is turned ON e Start command device to which global control request data are set Table7 75 Tracking Transfer Devices in the Program Example for the Global Control Function Description Description Global control execution command 3 Program example If system switching occurs with Global control execution command X25 ON the global control may be reexecuted after the system
148. E440H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range E441H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry to the local station QJ71PB92V 7 Check if the specified write data length is correct and E442H The write data length is incorrect retry n Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E443H Write error response actions E444H The slot number is incorrect Check if the specified slot number is correct and retry E445H The index is incorrect Check if the specified index is correct and retry Aa Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E446H The CommRef number is incorrect retry Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO to Class1 service of Acyclic communication was executed while start iD data exchange VI unl F Fi E447H Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in I O data exchange is stopped as the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 and then retry Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions oe Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in A physical execution error detected or system switching wg E450H ocurred durna senice execution in theredindantsystem the Slave status area Normal communication detection occu uri VI xecull I u 9 y Un G23040 to Un G23047 and then retry Check the detailed er
149. EDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE a zZ E W no vm W E W lt rs lt a OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEG TA cores Table6 8 Setting Items for Automatic Refresh Settings PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings Continued Item Description Data Transfer using Set communication method between the master module and the CPU module Copy Select this item in case of communication using the FROM TO MOV instruction and dedicated Instructions instruction AutoRefresh Select this item in case of communication using the automatic refresh Update of If selecting this item automatic refresh parameters are written to the CPU module when the project is CPU downloaded Select this item in case of communication using the automatic refresh If selecting this item automatic refresh parameters are written to the project file of GX IEC Developer The project file of GX IEC Developer is set with GX IEC Developer GID Settings tab PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings AutoRefresh Update of CPU Device Access GX IEC Developer GID Settings GID Project GX IEC Developer GID Project Ic MELSEC GX IEC Developer 7 00 SOFTCTRL PRO Writing to the CPU module can be performed from GX IEC Developer lt POINT Set Block Transfer for the following applications e To refresh I O data of
150. EM oO o Z O Q 3 O w a 7 22908 597Cu Input data start address of 125th module Figure 3 12 Input Data Start Address Area for mode 3 Un G22784 to Un G22908 5 Output data start address area for mode 3 Un G22912 to Un G23036 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 the start address buffer memory address for each DP Slave s output data is stored in this area Creating a sequence program utilizing the Output data start address area for mode 3 Un G22912 to Un G23036 allows address specification of the Output data area without consideration of the output points for each DP Slave Information of 125 modules is stored in the Output data start address area for mode 3 in the same order for each module FUNCTIONS Address DEC HEX b15 bO 22912 5980 Output data start address of 1st module The start address buffer memory address of the output data of the 1st module is stored 22913 5981h Output data start address of 2nd module initial value FFFFu i 22912 5980n 3800H to 47FFH Output data start address to FFFFuH Output data not assigned PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 22036 59FCu Output data start address of 125th module PARAMETER SETTING Figure 3 13 Output Data Start Address Area for mode 3 Un G22912 to Un G23036 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 28
151. FFH Continued MELSEC A eres Error Code Error Description Action Access to an access disabled area was attempted from E4AAH the DP Slave side E4ABH Access is not available on the DP Slave side E4ACH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave E4ADH f side E4AEH Incorrect request was detected on the DP Slave side E4AFH Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the E4B0H l DP Slave side E4B1H Resource error was detected during read processing on Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is the DP Slave side correctly set or not and retry E4B2 Resource error was detected during write processing on For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave H the DP Slave side E4B3H The resource is already in use on the DP Slave side There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave E4B4uH side The service not available for the specified DP Slave was E4B5H requested Memories used for request processing are insufficient on E4B6H f the DP Slave side E4B7H The DP Slave side made this service invalid E4B8H The DP Slave side did not respond to the request ne Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E4C0H The CommRef number is incorrect retry E4D0H E4D1H E4D2H E4D3H E4D4H E4D5H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representa
152. FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 22 3 4 2 Local station information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries 3 4 3 Operation mode change area This area is used to change the operation mode of the local station QU71PB92V For changing the operation mode refer to Section 6 2 1 Operation mode change request area Un G2255 For execution of the operation mode change request set a desired operation mode Initial value FFFEu The initial value FFFEu is used for malfunction prevention If the Operation mode change request signal Y11 is turned ON with the initial value stored in the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 E300h is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 and the operation mode is not changed Table3 13 Operation Mode Change Request Area Un G2255 Set Value Description 0001H The mode is changed to Parameter setting mode 0002H The mode is changed to Self diagnostics mode 0003H The mode is changed to Communication mode mode 3 0009H The mode is changed to Flash ROM clear mode 0101H The mode is changed to Parameter setting mode The Parameter setting mode is registered to the flash ROM at the same time as the operation mode change 0103H The mode is changed to Communication mode mode 3 The Communication mode
153. G lA oris POINT 1 The number of mountable modules is restricted depending on the automatic refresh setting on the QJ71PB92V lt gt gt Section 6 6 4 For details refer to Section 6 6 4 2 To utilize the data consistency function and dedicated instructions use a QCPU whose first 5 digits of the serial No is 02092 or later b When mounting to remote I O station of MELSECNET H The following shows the mountable network modules No of mountable modules and mountable base unit of the QU71PB92V module Power shortage may occur depending on the combination with other mounted modules or the number of mounted modules When mounting modules pay attention to the power supply capacity When the power shortage occurs review the combination of modules to be mounted Table2 2 When mounting to remote I O station of MELSECNET H Mountable base unit 2 i Main base unit of Extension base unit module modules remote I O station of remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72LP25GE QJ72BR15 Mountable network No of mountable Up to 64 O Mountable x Not mountable 1 Limited to the range of the number of I O points in the network module 2 Mountable on any I O slot of the mountable base unit Remark eeeeeeeevaoeeveeeveeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeceaeeeaeeeeeee 8 The Basic model QCPU cannot create the MELSECNET H remote I O network eeeeseececoaoevseeceeocee eae eeoeceoeeeeoeeeee
154. G6144 DO K96 Reading input data UO rBwoy 623040 D200 K25 Reads Slave status area Program for DP Slave control lt gt Section 7 1 1 2 a ji NO UO l Buoy D100 614336 K9 Writing output data eee eee eee N Program for reading diagnostic information gt Section 7 1 1 2 b Figure 7 11 I O Data Exchange Program Example MOV instruction 7 11 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 1 3 Program example using the MOV instruction PROGRAMMING M als 26 lA cries 7 2 Program Example for Acquisition of Extended Diagnostic Error Information zi gt ii 1 Assignment of devices in program examples 35 The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a Devices used by the QU71PB92V Zz Table7 9 List of Devices for the QU71PB92V E ec Device Description Device Description 5 Fe Extended diagnostic information read response f QE X06 A ag S p Y06 Extended diagnostic information read request signal a8 I b Devices used by the user Table7 10 List of Devices for the User 2 O Device Description Device Description lt X24 Extended diagnostic information read command G gt c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 11 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device Description Device Description D2000 to l 9 2 Extended diagnostic error information read result
155. GX Developer Set output status at the time of CPU stop error redundant system support function and QJ71PB92D compatible function 1 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error a For the QJ71PB92V For the setting method refer to Section 4 6 b For the QJ71PB92D compatible function For how to set refer to 2 in this section 2 Redundant system support function and QJ71PB92D compatible function The following setting should be made only when using the redundant system support function or QJ71PB92D compatible function POINT When setting intelligent function module switch setting set either redundant system support function or QJ71PB92D compatible function The redundant system support function cannot be used together with the QJ71PB92D compatible function a Start procedure 1 Double click PLC parameter in the project window of GX Developer 2 Enter I O data on the I O assignment screen and click the Switch setting button b Setting items Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module Input format Q25PRHCPU QU71PBS2V Cancel Figure 6 14 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Screen 6 24 6 7 Parameter Setting by GX Developer 6 PARAMETER SETTING M al 2G Q series 1 For the redundant system support function
156. Gp4 l Gp5 Gp l Gp7 l Gps Slave is active r I Swap 1 0 Bytes in Master rye Pate Cancel Default T Sync Dutput I Freeze Input I Initialize slave when failing to respond User Param Select Modules When DP Slave has Hold Clear function for output data Set the Clear Hold setting for output data to Hold for the DP Slave Output data can be held with the DP Slave s watchdog timer enabled Example Hold Clear setting of output Data for ST1Y2 TE2 Set it to Hold sii vo 1e 2 af f POINT Whether or not output data are output from each DP Slave to external devices after stop of I O data exchange differs depending on the DP Slave setting For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 4 38 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series c Precautions on the GX Configurator DP side 1 When using Slave list z The monitoring target is the QJ71PB92V which is mounted on the same base as the redundant CPU where GX Configurator DP is connected by RS 232 z cable USB cable etc 2 When using Current Configuration The monitoring target is the QJ71PB92V which is mounted on the same base z as the redundant CPU where GX Configurator DP is connected by RS 232 E cable USB cable etc 23 To display the parameters written to the QJ71PB92V in the standby system bz perform the following e Change the operation mode of the redundant CP
157. HEX b15 to b8 b7 to bO 25120 6220H See below See below Z O The request acceptance status is stored lt 0 Not accepted z A 1 Acceptance competed DZ gt nO Bit Description Initial value bO Acceptance status of request instruction No 1 0 3 b1 Acceptance status of request instruction No 2 0 b2 Acceptance status of request instruction No 3 0 g QO b3 Acceptance status of request instruction No 4 0 z b4 Acceptance status of request instruction No 5 0 W b5 Acceptance status of request instruction No 6 0 o b6 Acceptance status of request instruction No 7 0 b7 Acceptance status of request instruction No 8 0 The request completed status is stored 0 Not executed or in execution 1 Execution completed Z Bit Description Initial value z ma b8 Completion status of request instruction No 1 0 b9 Completion status of request instruction No 2 0 b10 Completion status of request instruction No 3 0 PA b11 Completion status of request instruction No 4 0 z5 7 W W b12 Completion status of request instruction No 5 0 ao 5 ag b13 Completion status of request instruction No 6 0 S a K2 b14 Completion status of request instruction No 7 0 Oo b15 Completion status of request instruction No 8 0 Figure 3 31 Acyclic Communication Request Result Area Un G25120 g i n ae Lu i o Z lt x ae o PE a nO Zz aQ Ww be 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 48 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area 3 S
158. ICATIONS MELSEC TA eries 2 When multiple DP Masters are used The bus cycle time Bc can be obtained by the following calculation formula when there are multiple DP Masters on the same network TBc ms 2 Bc i n Number of DP Masters a f Bc Bus cycle time of each DP Master _ gt 1 in this section The following shows an example where two DP Masters exist on the same network DP Master 1 executes polling DP Master 2 executes polling DP Master 1 executes polling i DP Master 1 bus cycle DP Master 2 bus cycle amg I l time Be 1 time Bc 2 TBc Figure 3 40 Bus Cycle Time When Two DP Masters Exist on the Same Network 3 61 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A eres 3 5 2 Transmission delay time The transmission delay times of the input data and output data vary depending on the data a consistency setting i The calculation formulas for the transmission delay time are shown in 1 and 2 below Note that the following symbols are used in calculation formulas 1 and 2 Bc Bus cycle time Scan Scan time 6 1 When multiple DP Masters exist on the same network replace Bc with TBc z0 re 1 When the data consistency function is disabled 26 When reading writing I O data by automatic refresh data consistency function disabled the MOV instruction or FROM TO instruction the transmission delay time is as shown below oO a Outp
159. Interface Module User s Manual amp 7 Z e e Z U PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 4 45 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC Af ssries CHAPTER5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION This chapter explains the procedures for connecting the QJ71PB92V to PROFIBUS DP wiring and other information 5 1 Implementation and Installation This section provides the handling precautions from unpacking to installation of the QJ71PB92V For details on implementation and installation of the QJ71PB92V refer to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 5 1 1 Handling precautions The following are precautions for handling the QJ71PB92V as a unit 1 Do not drop the module case or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of resin 2 Do not remove the printed circuit board of each module from its case This may cause a failure in the module 3 Be careful not to let foreign objects such as wire chips enter the module during wiring In the event any foreign object enters remove it immediately 4 A protective film is attached onto the module top to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips entering the module when wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation 5 Tighten the mo
160. K word Device detail settings Tracking block No 1 X a areena block No 1 Device range settings C Points Start Start End Device total Set tracking devices i Tk f Maximum 100 K word File register file settings Target memory File name Tracking characteristics setting Synchronized tracking mode T ake more scan time Program priority mode Default Cancel Figure 7 34 I O Data Exchange Parameter Setting Example GX Developer 1 For tracking devices used for continuing respective functions of the QU71PB92YV refer to 4 in this section and sections 7 9 2 to 7 9 7 For details on the tracking settings refer to the QNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 7 73 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING M als 26 lA ceries 3 Device assignments in program example The program examples in this section use the following device assignments z gt a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 68 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Data exchange start completed signal Data exchange start request signal 2 a X01 Diagnostic information detection signal YO1 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Bg X02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal Y02 Diagnostic information area clear request signal 08 X0C Data consistency requesting signal YOC Data co
161. LO nk Fs w Wo w2a QFE eae ann 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 78 PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres c When using the MOV instruction This section explains a program in which the QJ71PB92V communicates with a DP Slave using the MOV instruction J Not needed when the initial setting is not changed g D M402 1 Turn ON the initial SET M400 i i I m J setting execution command W400 XIB x10 XIF x0 vo uor I Initializes Diagnostic info if i 7 4 yer Habe aed invalid setting area nov K20 ora I Initializes Diagnostic info non I notification time setting area UO e nov Ko azseds e I Sets conditions for system I switching hy itchi l H 1 Sets a system switching I o_oouo8 8 wi came DP Slave 1st rove ah J Specifies the 2nd temporary I slave reservation l i 1 Turn OFF the initial setting I Rar Wang J execution command SM1518 X1B X1D X1F UO Initializes Dia tic inf I gnostic info I o Hapa Gzo80 J invalid setting area uov KO BA 1 Sets 0 in Diagnostic info non I notification time setting area UO iti nov Ko ara643 J I Sets conditions for system I switching 0 ee l a Sets a system switching c tov HI G23649 K I J DP Slave 1st nov He ee Specifies the 2nd temporary VELL Slave
162. MELSECNET H dedicated instructions REMFR REMTO instructions for reading from or writing to the buffer memory of the QU71PB92V After execution of the REMFR REMTO instruction several scans are required until read write of actual data is completed For details on the REMFR REMTO instructions refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 7 65 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 2 Other precautions PROGRAMMING M als 26 lA eries 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System z This section explains program examples for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system z 1 Making a sequence program The following explains the sequence program creation for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system 6 q lt ec a Handling output signals of the QU71PB92V 5 1 How to turn ON an output signal of the QU71PB92V 26 An output signal of the QJ71PB92V is turned ON with the OUT instruction using the start command device To keep each function enabled or re executable 1 in the case of system b switching tracking transfer the start command device data 6 Tracking transfer is not needed for output signals of the QU71PB92V S 1 For whether or not each QJ71PB92V function can be continued or reexecuted in system switching a refer to Sections 7 9 1 to 7 9 7 Start command Output signal dev
163. MMING PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 47 MELSEC TA eries 2 Acyclic communication request execution instruction area Un G23808 Set the execution instruction for acyclic communication in this area When a bit is turned ON 1 the request instruction corresponding to the bit is executed Initial value 0000H 0 Not execute 1 Execute DEE ES b15 to b8 b7 to 23808 5D00 00H Fixed See below Bit Description Initial value b0 Execution instruction of request instruction No 1 0 b1 Execution instruction of request instruction No 2 0 b2 Execution instruction of request instruction No 3 0 b3 Execution instruction of request instruction No 4 0 b4 Execution instruction of request instruction No 5 0 b5 Execution instruction of request instruction No 6 0 b6 Execution instruction of request instruction No 7 0 b7 Execution instruction of request instruction No 8 0 Figure 3 30 Acyclic Communication Request Execution Instruction Area Un G23808 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEG LY series 3 Acyclic communication request result area Un G25120 This area stores the request acceptance status and request execution completion z status of acyclic communication gt Address DEC
164. NATION orF Don z PROFIBUS I F Zn gus 95 age 29 o cw gt 96 anw 17mm i gt QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V m 14 J ie Figure 4 34 PROFIBUS Interface Connector Position z b Bus terminator The QU71PB92V does not have a built in bus terminator When the bus terminator setting switch on the QJ71PB92D has been set to ON use a connector with a built in bus terminator for the QU71PB92V For wiring specifications for the bus terminator of the QU71PB92V refer to Section g 5 5 1 5 Remari For details on PROFIBUS cables and connectors access the following website e PROFIBUS International http www profibus com eeeeesecoeeosceeeseeeaceeceeac ees eeaoeeesceeoeseeeaeece ees eeeees eee e eee ee 2 ae ae 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 4 41 4 FUNCTIONS 4 42 MELSEC TA eries 3 Procedures before system operation In the Intelligent function module switch setting enable the QJ71PB92D compatible function The following shows how to enable the QJ71PB92D compatible function Start Steps shown in __ are the same as those for the QJ 71PB92D y Replace the QJ 71PB92D mounted on the base unit with C3 PROFIBUS DP Interface Module the QJ 71PB92V User s Manual 5 1 Procedures before Operation y Turn on the power y Enable the QJ 71PB92D compatible function with GX sms Section 6 7 Developer and write PLC parameters to the QCPU a y Resetthe QCPU y Is the QJ
165. NG SYSTEM OPERATION DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS 5 Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 This area stores the latest extended diagnostic information occurred during communication MELSEC TA eries Address DEC HEX b15 b8 b7 bO The FDL address of the DP Slave that notified of the latest extended diagnostic information in addresses 23328 5B20 23329 to 23454 B2114 to SB9En is stored Initial value 0000 00004 to 007D 0 to 125 FDL address The data size of the latest extended diagnostic information in addresses 23330 to 23454 5B224 to 5B9Ex 23329 5B21n S stored Initial value 0000 0006 to OOF 4x Data size of extended diagnostic information unit byte The latest information of status 1 is stored The latest information of status 2 is stored Initial value 00H Initial value 00x 23330 5B22n 001 Normal 00u Normal Other than 004 lt 3 This section 4 b Other than 00x gt This section 4 b The latest status 3 information Whether or not any The latest FDL address of the DP Master is stored extended diagnostic information other than the one Initial value 00H 23331 5B23x sent this time is stored in the DP Slave is stored For the DP Slave that has not started I O data Initial value 00H exchange FF is stored 001 No other extended diagnostic information 00 to 7Dx 0 to 125 FDL address exists 804 O
166. O data size is set Figure 7 4 Example of I O Data Exchange Parameter Settings PARAMETER SETTING N PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 4 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries 3 Assignment of devices in program examples The program examples given in Sections 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 use the following device assignments a Devices used by the QU71PB92V Table7 6 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description X00 Data exchange start completed signal YOO Data exchange start request signal X01 Diagnostic information detection signal Y01 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal X02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal Yo2 Diagnostic information area clear request signal X0C Data consistency requesting signal YOC Data consistency start request signal X11 Operation mode change completed signal Y11 Operation mode change request signal X1B Communication READY signal X1D Module READY signal X1F Watchdog timer error signal b Devices used by the user Table7 7 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X20 I O data exchange start command SM402 ON for 1 scan only after RUN X21 Communication error detection reset command MO Refresh start request X22 Communication error area clear command M2 For operation mode change interlock X23 Operation mode change command M400 Initia
167. P Slaves are initialized Inputs and outputs are turned OFF b When using Class 2 service If system switching occurs before execution of the ABORT service the INITIATE service is not completed normally in the new control system In this case after the time for the INITIATE service transmission timeout has elapsed execute the INITIATE service again 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 82 7 9 4 Program example for acyclic communication with DP Slaves OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEG ores 7 9 5 Program example for alarm acquisition If a system switching occurs the function of the alarm acquisition cannot be continued In redundant systems do not use the alarm acquisition To use the function pay attention to the this section and fully examine the possible operations in advance 1 After the system switching After the system switching only the alarms that is newly generated after the switching can be obtained When system switching occurs in the redundant system the alarms that have been obtained before the system switching cannot be read out in the new control system 7 9 6 Program example for time control over DP Slaves If a system switching occurs during execution of the time control function the processin
168. PECIFICATIONS 3 49 M ELSEG series 4 Acyclic communication response area Un G25121 to Un G26144 The execution result of acyclic communication is stored in this area Initial value 00001 For the response format for the execution result refer to Section 7 4 Address DEC HEX 25121 62211 to 25248 62A0n 25249 62A1H to 25376 6320x 25377 6321n to 25504 63A0x 25505 63A1H to 25632 6420n 25633 6421n to 25760 64A0x 25761 64A1n to 25888 6520x 25889 6521n to 26016 65A0x 26017 65A1H to 26144 6620x Response area for request instruction No 1 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 2 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 3 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 4 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 5 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 6 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 7 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 8 Data size 128 words Figure 3 32 Acyclic Communication Response Area Un G25121 to Un G26144 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M aLS AG A i 3 4 11 Alarm area This area is used for the alarm acquisition OVERVIEW 1 Alarm request area Un G26432 to Un G26434 Set request data
169. PECIFICATIONS MELSEC LY series b Setting global control services b5 to b2 The following service combinations are not executable at the same time e SYNC and UNSYNC lf both services are attempted concurrently UNSYNC only is enabled FREEZE and UNFREEZE If both services are attempted concurrently UNFREEZE only is enabled The following shows the services and their set values for b5 to b2 1 Setting for execution of the SYNC and UNSYNC services Table3 19 SYNC UNSYNC Settings b5 b4 F Set Value L o o a SYNC 1 0 UNSYNC o 1 1 When 1 is set to this bit it is handled as an invalid value The operation is the same as when the value is set to 0 2 Setting for execution of the FREEZE and UNFREEZE services Table3 20 FREEZE UNFREEZE Settings b3 b2 Set Value eee fe a o y FREEZE 1 0 UNFREEZE 0 1 1 1 When 1 is set to this bit it is handled as an invalid value The operation is the same as when the value is set to 0 O Setting the target group No b15 to b8 Multiple group Nos can be set for the target group No When Os are set to all of b8 to b15 the set global control service is sent to all DP Slaves including DP Slaves for which group No is not set Remark eeeeoeeeeoeseeeeveeeeeeeeoeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeceeaeeeaeseeee ee 8 For details on the global control refer to Section 4 1 3 eeeeeeceacoacevaceeeaeeeceeneaseeaoeeeceeceeceae ee eeceeeeeaeeaeaeeeeaeeee eee ee
170. PU system K gt Section 7 1 2 26 e Redundant system lt gt Section 7 9 1 no 3 Precautions a Applicable QCPUs E For QCPUs supporting the data consistency function refer to Section 2 1 g b Transmission delay time when the data consistency function is used When the data consistency function is used the transmission delay time between the QCPU and DP Slaves increases because the time waiting for read write from the QCPU or data transfer from to DP Slaves arises _ gt Section 3 5 2 The data consistency function can be disabled in the automatic refresh setting If this function is unnecessary disable it o Z Q e Z U O wa When the data consistency function is enabled in the automatic refresh setting Dedicated instructions are not executable They are not processed Dedicated instructions are executable if the data consistency function is disabled in the automatic refresh setting PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MOV or FROM TO instruction The data consistency function is not usable when data refresh are performed between the QCPU and the QJ71PB92V buffer memory by the MOV or FROM TO instruction Ss PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 5 Data Consistency Function 4 23 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LY series 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error This function sets whether to stop or continue I O data excha
171. Pt Tsdi and Lr lt gt Section lt 3 5 1 aie If the Min slave interval is less than the value calculated from Pt Tsdi and 29 Lr the processing of the PROFIBUS DPV1 function may take time no 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves 6 xt O This function allows data reading writing to DP Slaves at any specific timing independently of I O data exchange Up to eight requests are executable DP Master Class 1 Power supply QJ71 module QOPU PB92V I O data exchange o Z O a O Z U Reading data from Writing data to any DP Slave any DP Slave Zz J L awo mav np a i wi wi oo DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Ags ore OLG U gt Figure 4 9 Acyclic Communication Te 1 Services available on the QJ71PB92V g In acyclic communications there are two types of services Class1 and Class2 n services cc A f The services available on the QJ71PB92V differ depending on whether or not the target DP Slave is performing I O data exchange Table4 3 Available Services Available Service Target DP Slave Class1 service Class2 service DP Slave performing I O data exchange o O A DP Slave not performing I O data exchange x O O O Available x Not available Whether the DP Slave supports each service or not can be checked in the GSD file For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 2 ae EO
172. Requests available on the QJ71PB92V There are the following two ways for acquiring alarms using the Alarm read request without ACK and Alarm ACK request and using the Alarm read request with ACK Whether the DP Slave supports this function or not can be checked in the GSD file For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave a Alarm read request without ACK Alarm ACK request Use these requests when a certain time may be required to return ACK after reading an alarm from a DP Slave e g when taking corrective actions for the DP Slave error The Alarm ACK request enables ACK to be returned for each read out alarm a 3 Alarm generation The alarm is read from the DP Slave Alarm read request without ACK Take corrective actions for the error that occurred on the DP Slave ACK is returned to the alarm for which processing is complete Completed Figure 4 11 Procedure Using Alarm Read Request without ACK and Alarm ACK Request Alarm ACK request 4 14 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 2 2 Alarm acquisition 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC IA series b Alarm read request with ACK This request automatically sends ACK after reading an alarm 3 ACK is returned in response to all read out alarms ae F Alarm generation The alarm is read from the DP Slave z Alarm read request with ACK E 0 ACK is returned to the ala
173. S DP 3 f network configuration correct No Check the PROFIBUS network configuration No of connected modules etc L gt 7 Section 2 2 Section 2 3 Yes No Has each station connected to PROFIBUS DP been powered ON Power ON each station Yes Hardware failure of the QJ71PB92V Please No consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Is the RUN LED on QJ71PB92V ON Yes The PRM SET LED is ON Write the parameters to the QJ71PB92V No The PRM SET LED is flashing Is the PRM SET LED on QJ71PB92V OFF The written parameters are invalid or corrupted Refer to Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions and take corrective actions lt _3 Section 9 1 Yes Is the FAULT LED on QJ71PB92V OFF No Check the Local station error information area and take corrective actions Yes 1 Figure 9 5 Troubleshooting When Communications with DP Slaves Are Not Possible 9 3 When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible 9 6 Q TROUBLESHOOTING Are the parameter settings consistent with actual slave configurations Is the QJ71PB92V s Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON Has an error occurred on the DP Slave Diagnostic information detection signal X01 is OFF or the RSP ERR LED is OFF End MELSEC TA cries Correct the parameters and write them again Turn ON the Data e
174. Select Modules Figure 4 8 Group Setting GX Configurator DP 3 Executing the global control function Execute the global control function by the following procedure a Write the service to be sent and the target group to the Global control area Un G2081 b Turn ON the Global control request signal Y04 c When global control processing is completed the Global control completed signal X04 turns ON If the processing failed the Global control failed signal X05 turns ON d After confirming completion of the global control turn OFF the Global control request signal Y04 EIPOINT To execute the global control function to all DP Slaves including DP Slaves for which group No is not set set Os to all of b15 to b8 in the Global control area Un G2081 For program examples on the global control function refer to the following e Single CPU system L gt Section 7 3 e Redundant system gt Section 7 9 3 eeeevneeveeeeveeeoeseeeeeeeeneseeeeeeeoseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeee ee 4 10 4 1 PROFIBUS DPVO Functions 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A eres 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions POINT 1 To utilize PROFIBUS DPV1 functions use a DP Slave that supports the 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 2 When using the PROFIBUS DPV1 function set a Min slave interval value Z greater than the bus cycle time calculated from
175. Specification comparisons APPENDICES MELSEC IA series Appendix 2 2 Precautions for replacing the system POINT The Communication mode mode 3 of the QJ71PB92V supports the PROFIBUS DPV1 and DPV2 functions Because of this the bus cycle time is increased compared with the former models If fast response is required reexamine and replace the existing system since some control timing may be delayed in the system For details on the bus cycle time of the QJ71PB92V refer to Section 3 5 TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES 1 PROFIBUS cable The PROFIBUS cables used for former models can be used for this model 2 Wiring INDEX a PROFIBUS interface connector position The PROFIBUS interface connector position is different from that of the former models If the PROFIBUS cable length is not long enough extend the cable length by using an extension connector QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V RUN TEST RUN TEST SD RD TOKEN SD RD TOKEN READY PRM SET READY PRM SET RSP ERR FAULT RSP ERR FAULT PROFIBUS I F BUS TERMINATION orF Don PROFIBUS I F Olcso O QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V L J Figure App 1 QJ71PB92V and QJ71PB92D Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models App 4 Appendix 2 2 Precautions for replacing the system APPENDICES MELSEG TA eres b Bus terminator The QJ71PB92V does not have any
176. TER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 31 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LY series The following lists the QU71PB92V errors that may cause system switching Table4 9 Errors by Which System Switching Request is Automatically Generated Error Code Error Description ESE Hardware failure E5A1H F101H No DP Slaves are set to perform I O data exchange in the parameter settings F10En F10FH Hardware failure F1FFH An error has occurred during processing of system switching Standby system ae Control system 1 Systems are not switched when the power turns OFF and then ON or in Separate mode Remark Oooo ooo oe ooo ore For details on the error codes refer to Section 9 5 eeeeonoevseaeseeaeeeeneeeeceeeoeaosneeseeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee ee ee 4 32 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEG LAY series b System switching due to a DP Slave error The QJ71PB92V performs system switching when it detects a error in 2 communication with a DP Slave S oc Ww Control system Standby system 35 Continues communication New standby system New control system Lx 5 Executes system 6 switching lt v a 2S HO Bus terminator Bus terminator no Zz re Communication E failure O Le S wW ee n
177. TING 2 Checking the LED status on GX Developer The status of the QJ71PB92V s LEDs can be also checked on the H W LED Information screen H W LED information of GX Developer For checking the LED status use GX Developer Version 8 27D or later Start Procedure Diagnostics System monitor Module s Detailed Information H W Information button HM Information Module Module Name QJ71PB92V HAW LED Information Product information 070910000000000 B p Display format HEX C DEC HAW SW Information Item Value Item Value Item Value Item Value RUN 0001 READY 0001 0000 Stop monitor Figure 9 2 H W Information Screen MELSEC TA eries button Table9 2 Values Displayed at H W LED Information Value 0000 Description The LED on the QJ71PB92V is OFF 0001 Displaying 0000 and 0001 alternately 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions The LED on the QJ71PB92V is ON The LED on the QJ71PB92V is flashing Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSECTA cries 9 2 When Parameters cannot be Written from GX Configurator DP The following shows the troubleshooting procedures to be taken when parameters cannot be written to the QJ71PB92V from GX Configurator DP 1 When the QJ71PB92D compatible function is disabled Par
178. Table7 48 Response Format When Failed Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0H An error code is stored K gt Section 9 5 5 2 26801 68B1H to Empty area E 2681 2 68BCH Stored value 0000H g N n zZz O E O Z T Zz awo aF oth a ToS m ne ann PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 52 7 6 2 Time data write request UTC format PROGRAMMING 7 6 3 Time data write request MELSEC TA eries This section explains the request and response formats of the time data write request 1 Request format Table7 49 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value Set a request code 26784 68A0H Set value 1602H Set the year 26785 68A1H Set value 1984 to 2036 Set the month 26786 68A2H Set value 1 to 12 Set the day 26787 68A3H Set value 1 to 31 Set the hour 26788 68A4H Set value 0 to 23 Set the minute 26789 68A5H Set value 0 to 59 Set the second 26790 68A6H Set value 0 to 59 Set 1 1000 second 26791 68A7H Set value 0 to 999 Set the clock status b15b14 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3b2 bi b0 6 5 0 4 3 0 2 0 1 1 Set the synchronous setting with the time master 0 Not synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 1 Synchronize the time setting with that of the time master
179. U to Separate or Debug mode Stop the tracking transfer between the redundant CPUs 2 F 5 o Z Q e Z U PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 39 4 FUNCTIONS 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function MELSEC TA cries This function is used to replace the QUJ71PB92D with the QU71PB92V When the QJ71PB92D has failed replace it with the QJU71PB92V using the QJ71PB92D compatible function Since the existing network configuration or sequence programs for the QJ71PB92D can be utilized a faulty QJU71PB92D can be smoothly replaced with the QU71PB92V lt POINT This manual describes only the overview of the QJ71PB92D compatible function For details refer to the following manual C gt gt PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual QJ71PB92D failed oooo00 es i amp Replaced t id amp QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D compatible function Figure 4 33 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 1 System configuration for using the QJ71PB92D compatible function Same as that of the QU71PB92D except for the supported software packages Table4 15 Supported Software Packages for Use of the QJ71PB92D Compatible Function Software Version Single CPU system GX Developer GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later Version 5 to
180. URATION SYSTEM io DL Addr Input Addr Input Size Output Addr Output Size Order of assignment E 6144 18 14336 18 6153 af 14345 1 Last known CPU Error BATTERY ERROR o Z O Q 3 O w a 7 2 When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s on GX Configurator DP the buffer memory is reassigned After modifying parameters review the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program s gt Section 6 5 FUNCTIONS 3 Input data of a DP Slave which has failed in I O data exchange are not stored in the Input data area of the QU71PB92V Data stored before the fault are held in the relevant Input data area for the DP Slave 1 DP Slave corresponding to the bit that is turned OFF in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 24 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries 1 Input data area for mode 3 Un G6144 to Un G10239 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 input data from DP Slaves are stored in this area a Data length setting The data length unit byte for each station is var
181. US DP bus cycle and QCPU sequence scan are performed asynchronously Because of this when the QCPU reads input data in the buffer memory during input data transfer from a DP Slave to the buffer memory the original data may be divided generating inconsistency in the input data The same applies to output data The following shows an example of data inconsistency when data are read from the QCPU during the input data transfer from a DP Slave to the buffer memory lt Before the data consistency function is used gt QJ 71PB92V k QCPU Buffer memory DP Slave L 0 TMM 5 ta D z os MUI Updated area for data 2o O i transferred from DP D C U o O ES LS Slave Read during Data transfer Not updated area for data data transfer i in process transferred from DP Slave Figure 4 20 Example of Input Data Inconsistency b When the data consistency function is enabled it makes reading from the QCPU wait until data transfer from a DP Slave to the QJ71PB92V buffer memory Input data area is completed and the reading is executed upon completion of the data transfer Alternatively the QJ71PB92V stands by for data transfer to DP Slaves until writing from the QCPU to the QJ71PB92V buffer memory Output data area is completed and executes the data transfer upon completion
182. Un G2258 and retry the self diagnostics If the diagnostics fails again a QJU71PB92V hardware error is probable Please check the value currently stored in the Offline test status area Un G2258 and consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem CONFIGURATION SYSTEM O Values that may be stored in the Offline test status area Un G2258 Any of the following values is stored in the Offline test status area Un G2258 after execution of self diagnostics SPECIFICATIONS Table5 5 Self diagnostics Result Stored Value Description 07FFH Normal completion F700H ROM check test error F701H Timer test error F702H MPU test error F703H RAM test error F704H 2 port RAM test error F705H Swap port test error FUNCTIONS Ol z TE zoz ty Wi g oOo TE 2 fh okD cu gt Ln PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 5 4 Self diagnostics 5 8 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC TA eries 5 5 Wiring This section explains PROFIBUS cable wiring and relevant precautions 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring The following describes the pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface connector on the QJ71PB92V the PROFIBUS cable wiring specifications bus terminator and other information 1 Pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface connector The following shows the pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface conn
183. V detects a critical error Dz Ti OE W gt e When the QJ71PB92V detects a communication error of a DP Slave EO Control system Standby system 4 4 Continues communication g New standby system New control system La tc g z 8 E w gm amp as E z Lu 5 3 ai i z Bus terminator Bus terminator o zZz lt L jam o fe o oa Figure 1 3 When the QJ71PB92V detects a communication error of a DP Slave a a Ww be 5 2 A AZ 1 1 Features 1 5 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC TA eries 9 QJ71PB92D can be easily replaced with QJ71PB92V The QJ71PB92V has a function for replacing the QU71PB92D with the QU71PB92V lt Section 4 9 Since the existing network configuration and sequence programs for the QU71PB92D can be utilized a faulty QU71PB92D can be smoothly replaced with the QU71PB92V QJ71PB92D failed oooo00 5 QJ71PB92V i QJ71PB92D compatible function Replaced N Figure 1 4 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 1 1 Features 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A eres CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the QJ71PB92V OVERVIEW 2 1 Applicable System N This section describes applicable systems 1 Mountable modules No of mountable modules a
184. V is installed For details refer to the manual for the QCPU 6 3 Master Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC IA series POINT 1 When Error action flag is checked outputs of all DP Slaves are cleared a when a communication error occurs even in one DP Slave T To restart output perform either of the following operations 5 e Turn OFF the Data exchange start request signal YOO and then turn it ON e Reset the QCPU Z 2 When using the PROFIBUS DPV1 or PROFIBUS DPV2 function set a Min 7 slave interval value greater than the bus cycle time calculated from Pt Tsdi Z0 and Lr L gt Section 3 5 1 26 If the Min slave interval is less than the value calculated from Pt Tsdi and Lr the processing of the PROFIBUS DPV1 or PROFIBUS DPV2 function may take time no z O FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION leg Z E Wu D jam w Ww lt x jam lt a PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 3 Master Parameters 6 9 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TA cries 6 4 Bus Parameters Set the PROFIBUS DP parameters Normally the bus parameters are used as default values When changing some of the bus parameters make sure of the PROFIBUS DP standard in advance 1 Start procedure a Right click on the DP Master graphic Modify Settings b Click the button in the Master Settings screen 2 Setting items Bus Parameter Select Baud
185. Y0 yi 4s ap iir I O data exchange start processin 1 1 1 4 Ho owen HO J _ A vor a TG BBLKRD UO K6144 DO K96 PBEKRD exeeulion Le Reading input data Mo uoy BMOV 623040 D200 K25 Reads Slave status area Program for DP Slave control lt 3 Section 7 1 1 2 a l NE e a ag ee ee ee S a eg ee XOC i py pre a Kt uo K14336 DIO0 K968 E Program for reading diagnostic information lt 3 Section 7 1 1 2 b Uea a a a l a a re 7 77 END Figure 7 36 I O Data Exchange Program Example Dedicated Instructions 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELS ECLA series Confirm that Consistency is disabled with Autom Refresh enabled a N gt C gt Section 6 3 i O When the automatic refresh and data consistency functions are enabled dedicated instructions are not processed Master Settings Module QJ71PB92V Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION iver EA lt Name PROFIBUS Mester 3 Baudrate 15Mbee z L FDL address 0 10 125 Nz Starting 1 0 number ooo 00 0sFEO a g Error action flag I Goto Clear State Min slave interval a 1 65535 100 ps Poling timeout 5 1 65535 1me Data control time T_wd 6 65535 10ms T Watchdog Estimated bus cycle time ms n Zz G Watchdog for time sync O 065S Oms T Bus Param 2 g Make sure the box is unchecked h n zZz fo E O Z r Z Sge
186. Y01 turns OFF the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 The following processing is performed at the same time that the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns OFF e The RSP ERR LED turns OFF e The corresponding bit in the slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 of the station that sent the diagnostic information turns ON c When new diagnostics information is generated while the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 is ON the behavior is as follows e The Diagnostic information detection signal X01 does not turn ON e The RSP ERR LED does not turn ON e The corresponding bit in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 of the station that sent the diagnostic information does not turn ON d After the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns OFF take actions for the error cause and turn OFF the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 3 7 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA cries e After the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 is turned OFF the QJ71PB92V checks for diagnostic information again If any diagnostic information has been generated the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns ON and processing at a is performed OVERVIEW Diagnostic information Diagn
187. a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC System Q Programmable Logic Controllers Users s Manual QJ71PB92V Profibus DP Master Art no 166558 01 05 2007 a aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Versi ersion C SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module used In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions DANGER 4 ok resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions A CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage w e e e e e e Note that the NCAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS When a communication error occurs on PROFIBUS DP the status of the faulty station is as shown below Create an interlock circuit in th
188. a exchange according to the dala exchange is stopped DP Master parameter settings 2 While I O data are exchanged Check if any parameter has been changed from the DP Master Class 2 on the network Check the DP Slave status and communication b8 Unable to exchange I O data with DP Slaves line DP Master Check the parameters 1 When I O data exchange is started Normally operating This occurs every time I O b9 The DP Slave is not ready to exchange O data date exenange is started DP Slave 2 While I O data are exchanged Check the DP Slave status and communication line Status 1 b10 a ne E se aaa a Check the DP Slave parameters DP Slave b11 There is some extended diagnostic information Check the DP Slave status DP Master The function requested by the DP Master is not Cheek if the DP Slave supports the global control b12 supported function or not DP Slave Verify the DP Slave specifications b13 Illegal response from DP Slave Check the DP Slave or network status DP Master b14 Illegal parameter s sent from the DP Master Check the parameters DP Slave Check if more than one DP Master are b15 Controlled by another DP Master communicating with the same DP Slave DP Master Check the parameters 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 40 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM io o Z O z o i O Mr o 5 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTI
189. able7 12 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description X04 Global control completed signal Y04 Global control request signal X05 Global control failed signal b Devices used by the user Table7 13 List of Devices for the User Device Device Description Description Global control execution command Refresh start request lt _ gt Section 7 1 1 2 Program example MO X25 Y4 X4 UO f H ttt a WF mov H320 62081 J Sends SYNC service to groups tand 2 SET Y4 Global control request Y4 J Global control completion processing X5 Processing for failure of To global control RST Y4 J Global control completion processing Figure 7 13 Program Example for Global Control Function 7 13 7 3 Program Example for Global Control Function PROGRAMMING MELSEC A eres 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves The following explains the request and response formats in acyclic communications providing a program example The request and response formats in this section employ offset addresses in word units The offset address refers to the n th data in word units starting from the start address of the request instruction No area to be used Table7 14 List of Start Addresses in Request Instruction No Areas Start Address of Acyclic Start Address of Acyclic Communication Request Area Communication R
190. according to the information set in the Alarm request area Un G26432 to Un G26434 b Turning ON the Alarm read request signal Y18 clears the information in the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 Note however that the information in the following areas are not cleared when the alarm ACK request request code 1501 is executed Table3 7 Areas Not Cleared At Alarm ACK Request Execution Buffer Memory Address 26449 to 26484 6751H to 6774H 26489 to 26524 6779H to 679CH 26529 to 26564 67A1H to 67C4H 26569 to 26604 67C9H to 67ECH 26609 to 26644 67F1H to 6814H 26649 to 26684 6819H to 683CH 26689 to 26724 6841H to 6864H 26729 to 26764 6869H to 688CH Description Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 1 is stored Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 2 is stored Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 3 is stored Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 4 is stored Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 5 is stored Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 6 is stored Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 7 is stored Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 8 is stored c The Alarm read response signal X18 turns ON when alarms on the specified DP Slave are read and the execution result is stored to the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 d Read the alarm information from the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 and turn OFF the
191. address of the 23456 Extended diagnostic information f Section station from which the extended diagnostic FFFFH R W 5BA0n read request area f S 3 4 7 information is read 23457 to 23583 Extended diagnostic information This area stores the execution result of the 0 R Section 5BA1n to 5C1Fh read response area extended diagnostic information read request 3 4 7 This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are 23584 to 23591 Parameter setting status area etto Normal BE Glave by thasiav 0 R Section 5C20n to 5C27x Active station y 3 4 5 parameters This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are 23592 to 23599 Parameter setting status area setto Reseed station bine stave 0 R Section 5C28x to 5C2F Reserved station y 3 4 5 parameters This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are 23600 to 23607 Temporary slave reservation Sb ta Temporary slave reservation by the 0 R Section 5C30u to 5C37x status area PASY J 3 4 5 temporary slave reservation function This area is used to set DP Slaves to 23608 to 23615 Temporary slave reservation Temporary slave reservation usinathe 0 R W Section 5C38x to 5C3Fu request area porary g 3 4 13 temporary slave reservation function 23616 to 23647 System area Use prohibited 5C40n to SC5Fx Esap System switching condition When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a 23648 to 23656 S ie 2 pews Section setting area Disconnected redundant system this area is
192. ameters cannot be written Is QJ71PB92V selected for Module on the Master Settings screen of GX Configurator DP No In the Change Master Type dialog box of GX Configurator DP select QU71PB92V as the DP Master type 1 Check the settings in the Transfer Setup dialog box 2 Check Module Slot in the Transfer Setup List dialog box Has Transfer Setup been set up in GX Configurator DP 1 Set a blank no setting for Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches in GX Developer 2 Write the PLC parameters to the QCPU 3 Reset the QCPU or power it OFF and then ON Is a blank no setting set for Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches in GX Developer Completed Figure 9 3 When the QJ71PB92D Compatible Function is Disabled 9 2 When Parameters cannot be Written from GX Configurator DP 9 4 o Z O I a w l a O ia E APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG LY series 2 When the QJ71PB92D compatible function is enabled Parameters cannot be written GX Configurator DP Version 7 00A cannot be used Is any other than GX Configurator DP Upgrade the GX Configurator DP Version 7 00A to Version 7 00A being used Version 7 01B or later Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative No In the Change Master Type dialog box of GX Configurator DP select QJ71PB92D as
193. ams The former models are shown in the following table TableApp 2 List of Former Models Model Remarks The model QJ71PB92D is compared here For replacement with the QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D compatible function refer to the following manual PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual SH 080127 Products of hardware version B and software version F or later are compared here For versions earlier than the above refer to the following manual to check differences PROFIBUS DP Interface Module Type AJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D User s Manual IB 66773 Products of software version B or later are compared in this manual For versions earlier than the above refer to the following manual to check AJ71PB92D differences PROFIBUS DP Interface Module Type AJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D User s Manual IB 66773 QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D App 1 Appendix 1 Functional Upgrade of the QU71PB92V APPENDICES MELSEC A eres Appendix 2 1 Specification comparisons The following compares the performance specifications and functions between the QJ71PB92V and former models 1 Comparisons of performance specifications TableApp 3 Comparisons of Performance Specifications oole O QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D PROFIBUS DP station type DP Master Class 1 IEC 61158 DP Master Class 1 EN50170 compliant compliant Transmission specifications Electrical standard EIA RS485 compliant Data lin
194. an B V NETHERLANDS ICOS RUSSIA ax 33 0 Industrial Solutions Haarlerbergweg 21 23 Industrial Computer Systems ZAO MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V IRELAND Woluwelaan 31 NL 1101 CH Amsterdam Ryazanskij Prospekt 8A Office 100 Irish Branch BE 1800 Vilvoorde Phone 31 0 20 587 76 00 RU 109428 Moscow Westgate Business Park Ballymount Phone 32 0 2 257 02 40 Fax 31 0 20 587 76 05 Phone 7 495 232 0207 IRL Dublin 24 Fax 32 0 2 257 0249 Beijer Electronics AS Norway Fax 7495 232 0327 ie o A AKHNATON BULGARIA Postboks 487 NPP URALELEKTRA RUSSIA ax 353 0 4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd Pb 21 NO 3002 Drammen Sverdlova 11A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V ITALY BG 1756 Sofia Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Italian Branch Phone 359 0 2 97 4405 8 Fax 47 0 32 8485 77 Phone 7 343 353 2745 Viale Colleoni 7 Fax 359 0 2 97 4406 1 MPL Technolo Fax 7 343 353 2461 gy Sp Z 0 0 POLAND ae Agrate pranda MI INEA CR d o 0 CROATIA UI Krakowska 50 F EE 16053312 Losinjska 4a PL 32 083 Balice aKF HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 48 0 12 630 47 00 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN Phone 385 0 1 36 940 01 02 03 Fax 48 0 12 630 47 01 MIDDLE EAST Office Iie Z a set Fax 385 0 1 36 940 03 Sirus Trading amp Services sri ROMANIA REPRESENTATIVES 812 1 chome Harami Chuo Ku AutoCont Control Systems s r o CZECH REPUBLIC Aleea Lacul Morii Nr 3 lan amp Gavish Ltd ISRAEL Tokyo 104 6212 i Phon
195. arately PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual Explains the overview of the QJ71PB92D compatible function system configurations specifcations functions procedures before system operation programming and dedicated instructions Sold separately 1 Refer to it when using the QJ71PB92D compatible function COMFORMANCE TO THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES Manual Number Model Code SH 080579ENG 13JU54 SH 080582ENG 13JU55 SH 080127 13JR22 When incorporating the Mitsubishi programmable controller into other machinery or equipment and keeping compliance with the EMC and low voltage directives refer to Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction of the User s Manual hardware supplied with your CPU module or base unit The CE logo is printed on the rating plate of the programmable controller indicating compliance with the directives Note that no additional measures are necessary for this product to make compliance with the directives ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS General term Abbreviation Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the Type QU71PB92V PROFIBUS DP Master Module Description QJ71PB92V Abbreviation for the QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP Master module PROFIBUS DP Abbreviation of PROFIBUS DP network MELSECNET H Abbreviation of MELSECNET H network system QCPU Generic term for the QOOJCPU
196. area Un G23665 to Un G23672 are all Os 23670 5C76H 23671 5C77H 23672 5C78H SoS S amp S SS SS SS 3 57 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 14 Redundant system area MELSEC IA series 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 5 Processing Time MaAIAHSAO This section explains the bus cycle time and transmission delay time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time NOLLVYNSISNOO oo 1 When a single DP Master is used Time HeGeeR eee ee Seek eee See eee ee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee WALSAS QJ71PB92V Buffer memory SNOILVOISIOAdS Internal buffer DP Slave 1 DP Slave 2 SNOILONNA DP Slave 3 2 gt m NOILvHY3dO WALSAS 390439 SONILLAS aNy SSYNds90 d 5 wn D o p gl g z oO D 5 gos 2 a Ej x a g n n 3 S gt 5 p 3 T 2 amp a ao i pani ONILLAS Y3 LJWVHYd Figure 3 38 Bus Cycle Time DP Master 1 DP Slave 3 1 MSI Minimum polling cycle or Total of Treq Max_Tsdr and Tres whichever is greater is Bc Bus cycle time lt 37 1 a in this section 2 If MSI Minimum polling cycle is greater than Total of Treq Max_Tsdr and Tres the QJ71PB92V transfers data from the internal buffer to the buffer memory within the MSI Minimum polling cycle SNOILONYLSNI qa lvoldad 3 58 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 1 Bus cycle tim
197. ata No 1 Description Read completion status of alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed b6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 b3 0 Failed or not executed b7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 2 The ACK response completion status is stored Bit Description Bit Description Completion status of response to alarm data No 1 Completion status of response to alarm data No 5 b8 0 Failed or not executed b12 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm data No 2 1 data No 6 b9 0 Failed or not executed b13 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm b10 data No 3 b14 data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Nor
198. ates Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective companies SPREAD Copyright C 1998 FarPoint Technologies Inc a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA Kazpromautomatics Ltd KAZAKHSTAN German Branch Wiener Stra e 89 Savanoriu Pr 187 2 Scladskaya str Gothaer StraBe 8 AT 2500 Baden LT 02300 Vilnius KAZ 470046 Karaganda D 40880 Ratingen Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 370 0 5 232 3101 Phone 7 3212 50 1150 Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 370 0 5 232 2980 Fax 7 3212 50 1150 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 TEHNIKON BELARUS _INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA ELEKTROSTILY RUSSIA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V FRANCE Oktyabrskaya 16 5 Off 703 711 bld Traian 23 1 Rubzowskaja nab 4 3 No 8 French Branch BY 220030 Minsk MD 2060 Kishinev RU 105082 Moscow 25 Boulevard des Bouvets Phone 375 0 17 210 46 26 Phone 373 0 22 66 4242 Phone 7 495 545 3419 F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Fax 375 0 17 21046 26 Fax 373 0 22 66 4280 Fax 7 495 545 3419 e oy F 2 68 Koning amp Hartman B V BELGIUM Koning amp Hartm
199. atic No refresh function Set the automatic refresh parameter L Section 6 6 Write the parameters set on GX Configurator DP to QJ71PB92V GX Configurator DP Operating Manual 2 in this section 1 To the next page Figure 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure 6 1 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS eg Z E Wu D jam w Ww lt x jam lt a PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEG TA eres Is the QU71PB92V mounted No to a redundant system Set the standby master FDL address in GX Developer Poe Section 6 7 aoe set on GX Developer to a redundant ne GX Developer Operating Manual Figure 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure Continued 2 Precautions for using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system and writing parameters through GX Configurator DP a Parameter writing from GX Configurator DP When writing parameters from GX Configurator DP the write target varies depending on the operation mode of the redundant CPU Table6 1 Parameter Writing from GX Configurator DP Target for parameter writing Description MELSOFT GX Configurator DP A The connected system supports redundancy Both PLCs will be updated Note during the download the system will be switched to Separate mode and device tracking will be disabled Backup mode O x When clicking the
200. ation Example for I O Data Exchange When Mounted on a Redundant ow System z Q lt wi an m TE 1 Modules are installed in order from slot 1 as shown in the figure and the following start I O Nos m ra are to be set 7 2 1 0 Assignment so Twe Modelname Points starxy moe ae eja e A too eLo Q25PRHCPU Opoint 32points v 16points w Figure 7 32 I O Assignment in Program Example PARAMETER SETTING Table7 64 Assignment of Input and Output Signals QJ71PB92V X00 to X1F Y00 to Y1F o QX41 X20 to X3F z 0 e nO Zz aQ Ww be E mE 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 70 25 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING 7 71 2 Settings a QJ71PB92V settings Table7 65 QJ71PB92V Settings MELSEC TA eries ee ee FDL address Control master FDL address FDL address 0 Standby master FDL address FDL address 1 Transmission speed 1 5Mbps Operation mode Communication mode mode 3 I O data area for FDL address 2 Buffer memory Input data area for mode 3 6144 1800H to 6239 185FH Output data area for mode 3 14336 3800H to 14431 385FH I O data area for FDL address 3 Buffer memory Input data area for mode 3 6240 1860H Output data area for mode 3 14332 3860H 1 Set the control master FDL address in the mas
201. ave Select this item when setting devices used in the communication in units of DP Slaves Specific Devices can be set by the Buffer MIT Address of each DP Slave in the I O Mapping dialog box after Transfer selecting this item lt 3 2 in this section Select this item when setting devices used in the communication to the same kinds of devices of all DP Slaves Block Devices are set in the following Input or Output A Input Device used for the communication of input data is set Default D1000 For a bit device setting must be made in units of 16 points Output Device used for the communication of output data is set Default D2000 For a bit device setting must be made in units of 16 points Comm Set the automatic refresh target device of the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Trouble Area Un G23321 Extd Comm Set the automatic refresh target device of the Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Trouble Area Un G23328 to Un G23454 Slave Status Area Set the automatic refresh target devices of the following areas e Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 e Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 e Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 To the next page 6 17 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings SYSTEM DEDICATED PROC
202. ave and I O data length 22778 to 22783 System area Use prohibited 58FAn to 58FFu Usep In Communication mode mode 3 this area is 22784 to 22908 Input data start address area hin yn i Section 5900n to 597Cx for mode 3 used to store the start address buffer memory 0 R 3 4 4 H H oo address of the input data of each DP Slave 22909 to 22911 System area Use prohibited 597Dx to 597Fx MER In Communication mode mode 3 this area is 22912 to 23036 Output data start address area aire j thi Section 5980n to 59FCx for mode 3 used to store the start address buffer memory 0 R 3 4 4 H H oo address of the output data of each DP Slave 23037 to 23039 System area Use prohibited 59FDu to 59FFH Usep 23040 to 23047 Slave status area Normal This area stores the communication status of 0 R Section 5A004 to 5A07x communication detection each DP Slave 3 4 5 23048 to 23055 Slave status area Reserved This area stores the reserved or temporary 0 R Section 5A08x to 5A0F station setting status slave reservation setting of each DP Slave 3 4 5 23056 to 23064 Slave status area Diagnostic This area stores the diagnostic information 0 R Section 5A104 to 5A18x information detection generation status of each DP Slave 3 4 5 23065 to 23070 System area Use prohibited 5A19s to 5A1En se prohibited 23071 Local station error information This area stores the error
203. b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 23649 5C61H 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Each bit represents 23650 5C62x 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 Rene on 23651 5C63x 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 23652 5C64x 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 23653 5C65 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 23654 5C66x 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 23655 5C67H 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 23656 5C68xH 1 1 1 1 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b12 of address 23656 5C68n are fixed to 0 Figure 3 35 System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 By turning ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 the DP Slaves specified in the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 become the target for system switching System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Specifies system switching condition Un G23648 to Un G23656 ON OFF Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON OFF Data exchange start completed signa
204. been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s in GX Configurator DP the order of the assigned DP Slaves is changed After modifying parameters check the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program lt gt gt Section 6 5 3 53 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M aLS AG Qe 1 Control master FDL address display area Un G2263 This area stores the FDL address of the control system QJ71PB92V when it is used in a redundant system The FDL address is stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON The FDL addresses for the control system are set in GX Configurator DP lt Section 6 3 OVERVIEW Table3 21 Control Master FDL Address Display Area Un G2263 Set Value Description CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 00001 to 007DH 0 to 125 The FDL address of the QU71PB92V in the control system ie e Parameter not registered e The QJ71PB92V is not mounted to a redundant system FFFFH 2 Standby master FDL address display area Un G2264 This area stores the FDL address of the standby system QJ71PB92V when it is used in a redundant system The FDL address is stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON The FDL addresses for the standby system are set in the Intelligent function module
205. bi b0 23057 5A11H 16 15 14113 12 11 10 19 8 7 6 1514 312 1 4 Each bit indicates he n th DP Slave 23058 5A12H the n t Slave 23059 5A13H 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 23060 5A14x 64 63 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 23061 5A15x PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 80 79 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 23062 5A16x 96 95 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 23063 5A17x 112 111 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 23064 5A18x 1 1 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 a lu 1 Bits b15 to b13 of address 23064 5A18x are fixed to 0 E Figure 3 19 Each Station s Diagnostic Status Un G23057 to Un G23064 7 o zZ lt x ae o nO Zz ae Se 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 32 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 33 MELSEC TA eries 4 Parameter setting status area Active station Un G23584 to Un G23591 Address DEC HEX 23584 5C 20H 23585 5C21H 23586 5C 22H 23587 5C 23H 23588 5C 24H 23589 5C 25H 23590 5C 26H 23591 5C271 This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are set to Normal DP Slave by the slave parameters Init
206. bishi Electric Europe B V FA European Business Group Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Germany FACTORY AUTOMATION Tel 49 0 2102 4860 Fax 49 0 2102 4861120 info mitsubishi automation com www mitsubishi automation com Specifications subject to change 01 2008
207. button parameters are written to both systems A and B When parameters are written the operation mode of the redundant CPU is changed to Separate mode and tracking transfer is stopped MELSOFT GX Configurator DP m The connected system supports redundancy Should both PLCs be updated Note during the download device tracking will be disabled Separate mode O oO When clicking the _ Yes _ button parameters are written to both systems A and B When clicking the _No__ button parameters are written to the one system The tracking transfer of the redundant CPU is stopped when parameters are written To the next page 6 2 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC A eres Table6 1 Parameter Writing from GX Configurator DP Continued Target for parameter writing z Description z MELSOFT GX Configurator DP i Only the directly connected PLC will be updated 6 E Debug mode x O 6 ire When clicking the _ OK _ button parameters are written A 6 to the system of the redundant CPU where cables including RS 232 cable or USB cable are connected O Writable X Not writable 7 1 Parameters are written to the system of the redundant CPU that is set in Target System of the Transfer Setup dialog box lt However when Not specified is set in Target System parameters are written to the system of the redundant CPU whe
208. by adding the number of read data to the start address of reading data exceeds the buffer memory size e When the points available for the start address of reading data or after is less than the number of read data 8 4 8 2 G BBLKRD 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC IA series Program example At the timing of M10 ON data of 960 points are read to DO to D959 from address 6144 1800 of the Input data area for mode 3 of the QJ71PB92V module start I O No 0 with z data consistency ensured g 35 M10 XOG H Haua G BBLERD UO K6144 DO K960 Figure 8 4 BBLKRD Instruction Program Example z0 n 6 3 D FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING jee 2 Z is S T 2 Z 1p D 07 41 8 2 G BBLKRD 8 5 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC lA orie 8 3 G BBLKWR Table8 5 Device Usable in the BBLKWR Instruction Usable device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent index Set data System user File function i Constant register register module device K H Instruction Execution symbol condition Command G BBLKWR G BBLKWR Un n1 n2 Figure 8 5 BBLKWR Instruction Set data Table8 6 Set Data in the BBLKWR Instruction Set data Description Setting range Data type QJ71PB92V module start I O number Un a 0 to FEH Upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3
209. c Communication READ service Class1_SERVICE 7 29 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 5 Program example PROGRAMMING M als eG aries 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition The following explains the request and response formats in alarm acquisition providing a 3 program example z 1 Making a sequence program For details on the program example refer to Section 7 5 4 6 I O data 5 20 exchange a ep norma Reads alarm status of each station ae Un G26417 to Un G26424 I O data exchange nor al Y1 8 X1 8 A Writes request data Un G26432 to Un G26434 2 Alarm generation O amp L SET Y18 9 I O data 5 exchange X18 normal Read the response code and error code Un G26446 Normally completed 7 Reads the execution result g UMG26446Response code Un G26447 to Un G26768 O 2 R Zz Failed Sge Reads the detailed error code TO lt gt Un G26446 Response code Un G26447 to Un G26768 fe mi i TE uzi SE amp U gt Processing for failed completion Eo Figure 7 16 Sequence Program Alarm Acquisition PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 30 PROGRAMMING 7 31 MELSEC LA eries 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK This section explains the request and response formats of the alarm read request witho
210. cPU 0 1 0 0 Intelli v QJ71LP21 25 32points v 2 la Input v 0x42 64points 3 26 2 x Figure 7 21 I O Assignment in Program Example Remote Master Station v Table7 56 Assignment of Input and Output Signals Remote Master Station QJ71LP21 25 X00 to X1F YOO to Y1F QX42 X20 to X5F 2 The QJ71PB92V is to be installed in slot 0 of the base unit as shown in the figure with the start I O No set to OOH 170 Assignment sit Type Modelname Points Stawy 0 Remote 1 0 Remote 1 0 v QJ72LP25 25 ee A oeo inteni v 0J71PB92v E O y Figure 7 22 I O Assignment in Program Example Remote I O Station Table7 57 Assignment of Input and Output Signals Remote I O Station QJ71PB92V X00 to X1F Y00 to Y1F 7 59 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING 2 MELSECNET H remote I O network settings a Remote master station QJ71LP21 25 settings MELS Table7 58 Remote Master Station Settings Item EG Q series Description Station No Station No 0 Transmission speed 25 Mbps MODE 4 Operation mode Online b Remote I O station QU72LP25 25 settings Table7 59 Remote I O Station Settings Item Description Station No Station No 1 Transmission speed 25 Mbp
211. cautions COOOL OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOH OO OOS OS OOOOH OOOO SOD OHO OOOO OOOO OHHH OOO OOOOH OOOO OOOO OOO 7 65 79 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System CO COOOL OOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOO OO OOOOH OOOO OOOO OOOOOOS 7 66 7 9 1 7 9 2 I O Data Exchange Program ExamplEs eeeeeeeeeseececceccooccoccocccccccccoccococoocooooocococcoceooo 7 70 Program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic error information eeeeeeeseseeeeoeo00 7 B0 A 9 7 9 3 Program example for global Control fUNCtONeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseceeseccecececceccececcoceececeecocecceeee 7 8 7 9 4 Program example for acyclic communication with DP Slavessssessesessesseseesecccsceceesecsecees 7 B2 7 9 5 Program example for alarm acquisition eeeeeeseececeececeececcececccceceocececceccececcececcececcecseecee 7 83 7 9 6 Program example for time control over DP Slaves eeeeeeseseeseeeececcececcececceceececeecececceceee 7 83 7 9 7 Program example for temporary slave reservation eeeeseseeeeseeseceececeecececceceececeececeececeee 7 B5 CHAPTERS DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 8 1to8 7 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions cooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 2 8 2 G BBLKRD cooooooooooooooooooo0o000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Z 4 8 3 G BBLKWHR seesccccco00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 9 s 6
212. ces are available for dedicated instructions Table8 2 Usable Devices File register Constant O Sn S 2 ra T ST C D W R ZR K H 1 Available devices are given in the Constant field in each section awo ae Fe lt O8 w a a TE wuZ2q uz ope anan PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING ee 2 Z aQ nm ae lt 5 SE ng az 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 1 Before executing a dedicated instruction MELSEC TA eries Before executing a dedicated instruction be sure to confirm the following a Turn ON the Data consistency start request signal YOC a Before executing a dedicated instruction turn ON the Data consistency start request signal YOC Attempting to execute a dedicated instruction with the Data consistency start request signal YOC OFF will result in non processing non execution Use the Data consistency requesting signal XOC as an interlock for execution of dedicated instructions Execution command 1 voc G BBLKRD uo K6144 DO K960 Figure 8 1 Interlock Example for Dedicated Instruction Check that Consistency is disabled with Autom Refresh enabled If the automatic refresh and data consistency functions are enabled use of dedicated instructions is not allowed They are not processed Dedicated instructions are executable if the data consistency function is disabled in the automatic refresh setting gt
213. code 1 is stored lt gt Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E443 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 1 When E443 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 2 is stored gt Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E443 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 When E4431 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 3 is stored lt gt Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E443 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 Empty area Stored value 0000H 2 2H 3 3H 4 4H 5 5H to 127 7FH 7 21 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC A eres 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_ SERVICE This section explains the request and response formats of the INITIATE service ai Class2_SERVICE i 1 Request format Table7 21 Request format 2 Offset Address Description Set Value E ec Set a request code la O OH aoe Set value 1412H F TN Set the FDL address of the DP Slave to which the network line is connected we 1 Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 Set a transmission timeout value Unit 10ms 2
214. coeccoeccoosocoeooeeoe 3 AG 3 4 11 Alarm area v e e e esceccccccccooocooocoooocooocooococooocooooocoooooooooooooocooooocooocooooooooooooooosoooooo0000 3 50 3 4 12 Time control Aregeceeecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccc ccc cccccccocccccccocccoccoccooccooce 3 H0 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation area e eeseeeeseeeceeecooeccoeccoecooeccoococeccoeccooccoooccoeccoeeooeoo 3 D 3 4 14 Redundant system arca eeeeeeeeeceeesceccceecceccccccoocccocccceccoeccoocccceccceeccoccoooccoescoecoee00 3 53 3 5 Processing TIME eeeseeeeeeeseeeecceccooccoocccocccocccocccooccocccceccooecoocccocccceccoeccooecoocccoeccoeeoeeo0 3 DG 3 5 1 Bus cycle tiMe eeeeeeeeeecceecccecccocccccccocccccccocccooccocccceccooccoocccooccceccceecooccooeccoeccoesoee00 3 5G 3 5 2 Transmission delay time 000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 62 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system 00000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 64 CHAPTER4 FUNCTIONS 4 1t04 45 4 1 PROFIBUS DPVO Functions ccoocooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 2 4 1 1 I O data exchangEe eesessessescececoceoceocccccccccoccocococcoccoccocccccccccoccococoocoocoecocoseosoeooeoooo A 2 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information eeeseeesseeeeesseeeesseeocessooees 4 4 4 1 3 Global control function cococooooocoooooooooooooo00000
215. creen of GX Configurator DP lt gt GX Configurator DP Operating Manual 2 The time differs as shown below depending on the transmission speed Table3 31 Time Corresponding to Transmission Speed TAR Time Corresponding to Time Corresponding to g t Transmission speed a deo ae Common Processing time Transmission Speed 1 Transmission Speed 2 9 6kbps 0 9 ms 1 8 ms 500 ms 19 2kbps 0 6 ms 1 4 ms 250 ms 93 75kbps 0 18 ms 1 0 ms 60 ms 187 5kbps 0 09 ms 1 0 ms 50 ms 500kbps 0 035 ms 1 0 ms 40 ms 1 5Mbps 0 01 ms 1 0 ms 35 ms 3Mbps 0 007 ms 0 9 ms 35 ms 6Mbps 0 0025 ms 0 8 ms 35 ms 12Mbps 0 002 ms 0 8 ms 30 ms 3 65 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series b Redundant system switching time calculation example Shown below is a calculation example for the system switching time in the redundant system The calculation is based on the following conditions e Scan time is 5 ms e AND is set in System switching condition Un G23648 e In System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 1st to 3rd DP Slaves are set as switching targets OVERVIEW Transmission speed 1 5Mbps DP Master FDL address 0 DP Master FDL address 1 No of DP Slave 3 modules QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92V Bus terminator PROFIBUS DP Bus terminator li 0 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM
216. d Stored value 0 to 31 ko 26488 6778H The slot No is stored Stored value 0 to 254 26489 6779h to Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26528 67A0h 26529 67A1H to Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8h 26569 67C9h to Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26608 67F0H 26609 67F1H to Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 26648 681 8H 26649 681 9h to Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26688 6840H 26689 6841H to Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26728 6868H 26729 6869h to Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 26768 6890H 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Normal completion the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 67504 is ON 7 43 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK PROGRAMMING MELSEC A series b When failed Table7 38 Response Format When Failed Result OVERVIEW Buffer memory address 26446 674EH An error code is stored gt Section 9 5 4 26447 674FH The FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm was read is stored Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 26448 6750H The alarm data read completion status and the ACK response completion status are stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO EE 1 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored Bit Read completion status of alarm d
217. d diagnostic information 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LY series 4 Acquiring extended diagnostic information a Checking the station generating extended diagnostic information For whether extended diagnostic information is stored in any of DP Slaves or not check each DP Slave s Status 1 information that is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 In the case of the 1st DP Slave check b11 of buffer memory address 23073 5A214 Acquiring extended diagnostic information from DP Slaves Perform the following procedure to acquire extended diagnostic information 1 Write the FDL address of the DP Slave from which extended diagnostic information is read to the Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 2 Turn ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 3 When reading of the extended diagnostic information is completed the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 turns ON and the extended diagnostic information is stored in the Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 4 Check the read extended diagnostic information and turn OFF the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 EIPOINT The latest extended diagnostic information that occurred during I O data exchange is stored in the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V To check the latest extended diagnostic information read it fro
218. dress DEC HEX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 23600 5C30x 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14 Each bit represents 23601 5C31H 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 H E 23602 5C32x 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 23603 5C33x 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 23604 5C34x 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM n 23605 5C35x 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 23606 5C36x 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 23607 5C37 1 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23607 5C374 are fixed to 0 Figure 3 22 Temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 o Z O Q 3 O w a 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 34 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 35 Address DEC HEX 26417 6731H 26418 6732H 26419 6733H 26420 6734H 26421 67351 26422 6736H 26423 6737H 26424 6738H MELSEC TA cries 7 Slave stat
219. ds for Coordinated Universal Time UTC In order to adjust the time gap with the GMT Greenwich Mean Time the leap second has been added Time master A master station that can send a request for time control QJ71PB92V etc System A The system to which the system A connector of the tracking cable is connected System B The system to which the system B connector of the tracking cable is connected Control system The system that is controlling the redundant system and performing network communication Standby system The system for backup in the redundant system The system changed from the standby system status to the control system status due to system New control system KREA switching The system changed from the control system status to the standby system status due to system New standby system switching QJ71PB92D compatible function The function used to replace the QJ71PB92D with the QU71PB92V The QJ71PB92V type PROFIBUS DP master module has this function QJ71PB92D The QJ71PB92D type PROFIBUS DP interface module PACKING LIST The following indicates the packing list of the QU71PB92V Model QJ71PB92V A 14 Product name Quantity QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP master module 1 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW MELSECTE cries This manual explains the specifications functions procedures before system operation and troubleshooting for the QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP master module hereinafter referred to as QJ71PB92V
220. due to poor contact of the cable A protective film is attached onto the module top to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module when wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation STARTING AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Before cleaning be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system Failure to do so may cause electrical shocks A CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so may cause failure malfunctions personal injuries and or a fire When using a wireless communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS keep it at least 25cm 9 85 inch away from the entire programmable controller system in all directions Failure to do so may cause a malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in failure or malfunctions of the module Module installation to or removal from the base unit is limited to 50 times after the first use of the product IEC 61131 2 compliant Exceeding 50 times may cause malfunctions Before handling modules touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Not doing so may cause failure or malfunctions of the module DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS Z CAUTION When disposing of this product treat is as an industrial was
221. dule fixing screws and connector screws using torque within the following ranges Table5 1 Screw Tightening Torque Screw Location Tightening Torque Range Module fixing screw M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48 N m PROFIBUS cable connector screw 4 40UNC screws 0 20 to 0 28 N m 1 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module mounting screw if the module is subject to significant vibration or shock 5 1 5 1 Implementation and Installation 5 1 1 Handling precautions PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC lA cries 5 2 Procedures and Settings before System Operation The following diagram illustrates the procedure before system operation 5 2 1 In the case of the single CPU system ra O o Mount the QJ71PB92V on the base unit EE as y Turn ON the power y Perform self diagnostics of the QJ71PB92V F L Section 5 4 2 5 Set the PROFIBUS DP parameters on GX Configurator DP L Section 6 1 G ao n y Use output status No setting for the case of a CPU stop error 2 Make I O assignments on GX Developer set the error time 2 output mode and write the PLC parameters to the QCPU L Section 4 6 z ma Ol Reset the QCPU Connect the PROFIBUS cable to the QU71PB92V C Section 5 5 Connect the PROFIBUS cable to
222. e 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries a Bus cycle time Bc calculation formula The bus cycle time Bc of the DP Master can be obtained from the following calculation formula The symbols within the brackets indicate units Bc ms Max MSI 2 Pt i Tsdi my Lr i 1 n number of DP Slaves Max A B Aor B whichever is greater Table3 23 Items in the bus cycle time Bc calculation formula Item Description MSI ms Minimum polling cycle Min slave interval Polling time to i th station Treqi Max_Tsdr i Tresii e Treq i ms Request transmission time of i th station Number of bytes output to i th station 9 x 11 bit x 10 Transmission speed bps Pti ms l E eee a e Max_Tsdr i ms Response time TBit of i th station x 10 Transmission speed bps e Tres i ms Response transmission time of i th station Number of bytes input from i th station 9 x 11 bit x 10 Transmission speed bps Tsdi ms Request response processing time Tsi of DP Master Qu71 PB92vV 4x 103 Transmission speed bps Lr ms Data refresh time 5 50 Number of DP Slaves x 150 x 10 1 The value set on the Master Settings screen of GX Configurator DP 2 The MaxTsdr value described in the GSD DDB file of the DP Slave 3 Tsi Bit Time is a unit that expresses the time required for 1 bit data transmission as 1 The actual processing time differ
223. e Differs depending on the transmission speed lt 5 1 in this section Max No of repeaters 3 repeaters Number of connectable modules Per segment 32 per segment including repeater s Number of connectable modules Per network 126 per network total of DP Masters and DP Slaves lt 3 Section 2 2 Max No of DP Slaves 2 125 per QJ71PB92V 5 Section 2 2 Per QU71PB92V I O data Input data Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave size Output data Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave Number of writes to flash ROM Max 100000 times No of occupied I O points 32 I O assignment 32 intelligent points Internal current consumption 0 57A 5VDC External dimensions 98 3 86 in H x 27 4 1 08 in W x 90 3 54 in D mm Weight 0 13 kg 1 The transmission speed is controlled within 0 2 Compliant with IEC 61158 2 2 Up to 124 when the QU71PB92V is mounted to a redundant system lt gt Section 2 3 3 1 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A eres 1 Transmission distance Table3 2 Transmission Distance i Max Transmission Distance when z Transmission Speed Transmission Distance 4 Repeater is Used 9 6 kbps 19 2 kbps 1200 m 3937 ft segment 4800 m 15748 ft network 93 75 kbps 187 5 kbps 1000 m 3281 ft segment 4000 m 13123 ft ne
224. e 81 3 622 160 60 Jelinkova 59 3 RO 060841 Bucuresti Sector 6 Automation Service i a 62216075 CZ 721 00 Ostrava Svinov Phone 40 0 21 430 40 06 24 Shenkar St Kiryat Arie akt Phone 420 0 59 5691 150 Fax 40 0 21 430 40 02 1L 49001 Petah Tiqva MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V UK Fax 420 0 59 5691 199 CRAFT Consulting amp Engineering d o o SERBIA Phone 972 0 3 922 18 24 oe e AutoCont Control Systems s r o CZECH REPUBLIC Bulevar Svetog Cara Konstantina 80 86 Fax 972 0 3 924 0761 Technologick 374 6 SER 18106 Nis Texel Electronics Ltd ISRAEL ea e aE Z 708 00 Ostrava Pustkovec Phone 381 0 18 292 24 4 5 523 962 Ha umanut P 0 B 6272 peT ioe 12869 Phone 420 595 691 150 Fax 381 0 18 292 24 4 5 523 962 1L 42160 Netanya Fax 420 595 691 199 INEA SR d 0 0 SERBIA Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE BV SPAIN B TECH as CZECH REPUBLIC Karadjordjeva 12 260 Fax 972 0 9 885 2430 annn ea 76 80 Na Ostrove 84 SER 113000 Smederevo is SMUD O7 daal i CZ 58001 Havlickuv Brod Phone 381 0 26 617 163 alates mat tad Barcelona Phone 420 0 569 408 841 Fax 381 0 26 617 163 Fax 34 93 589 1579 Fax 420 0 569 408 889 CS MTrade Slovensko s r o SLOVAKIA AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION ix ae ee en a CBI Ltd SOUTH AFRICA 500 Corporate Woods Parkway U Borov 69 Phone 421 0 33 Yay 42760 Private Bag 2016 Vernon Hills IL 60061 7 580 01 Havlickuv Brod Fax 421 0
225. e 00H 00H Other extended diagnostic information exists 80H No other extended diagnostic information exists The status 1 information of the 1st The status 2 information of the 1st module is stored module is stored 23073 5A21h Initial value 00x Initial value 00H 00H Normal 00H Normal Other than 00H lt gt b Other than 001 lt 37 gt b Figure 3 25 Diagnostic Information Area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 POINT 1 Order of assignment 2 Data are assigned to the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 in the order of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in the order of FDL addresses The actual assignment order can be confirmed in the Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Slave List of GX Configurator DP Last known CPU Error BATTERY ERROR When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s on GX Configurator DP the buffer memory is reassigned After modifying parameters review the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program lt Section 6 5 The information in Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 is not cleared even if the problem occurred on the DP Slave has been solved To clear the information
226. e is stored z Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 E O 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE 3 1 1H a b15 b8 b7 bO 2 2 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored z Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 5 Z The length of the written data is stored Unit byte 2 2H Set value 1 to 240 3 3H Set the written slot No 3 Set value 0 to 254 aws 26 Set the written index OLE 4 4H Em a Set value 0 to 255 Ta O Empty area BEE 5 5H to 127 7FH OEE A H Stored value 0000H ene o Z E i n ae W m PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 20 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres b When failed Table7 20 Response Format When Failed Offset Address Result 0 OH An error code is stored gt gt Section 9 5 3 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 1H 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value 00H to 7EH 0 to 126 1 When E4431 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error
227. e sequence program using the communication status information to ensure the system operates safely Input X1 buffer memory 5A20H to 5B19H 23072 to 23321 An erroneous output or malfunction may cause accidents 1 The QJ71PB92V holds the input data before the communication failure 2 When the QJ71PB92V has gone down the output status of each DP Slave is dependent on the QJ71PB92V parameter setting on GX Configurator DP 3 When a DP Slave has gone down the output status of the other DP Slaves is dependent on the QJ71PB92V parameter setting on GX Configurator DP Do not output the use prohibited signal as the output signal to an intelligent function module from the programmable controller CPU Wiring data into the system area or outputting a signal for Use prohibited may cause system malfunction in the programmable controller DESIGN PRECAUTIONS When a stop error has occurred to the CPU module the communication status varies depending on the error time output mode setting of GX Developer as shown below Set the communication status for when a stop error has occurred to the CPU module according to the system specifications Note that if the QJ71PB92V is mounted to a redundant system it operates as described in 1 below regardless of the setting 1 When Error time output mode is set to Hold a Since the communication with the DP Slave is continued values at the time of the CPU module stop error occurrence are
228. e4 10 Functions available for redundant systems Function NEMET LAY Reference PROFIBUS DPVO I O data exchange A 1 Section 4 1 1 Acquisition of diagnostic and extended diagnostic A information Ar sete Global control function A 1 Section 4 1 3 PROFIBUS DPV1 Z Acyclic communication with DP Slaves x Section 4 2 1 Alarm acquisition x Section 4 2 2 Support of FDT DTM technology x Section 4 2 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Time control over DP Slaves A 1 Section 4 3 1 Data swap function O Section 4 4 Data Data consistency function by automatic refresh O Section 4 5 consistency indion Data consistency function by dedicated instructions A 1 Chapter 8 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error O 2 Section 4 6 Temporary slave reservation function A 1 Section 4 7 QJ71PB92D compatible function x Section 4 9 Available A Available with restriction x Not available 1 For precautions for using respective functions in the redundant system refer to section 7 9 to 7 9 7 2 Independently of the setting I O data exchange with DP Slaves is continued until both A and B systems go down 4 Setting for using the QJ71PB92V in the redundant system To use the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system make the following settings Table4 11 Setting for using the QJ71PB92V in the redundant system Item Description Reference In GX Configurator DP set the parameters of the QU71PB92V Parameter se
229. ector D sub 9 pin female connector on the QU71PB92V Table5 6 Pin Assignments of the PROFIBUS Interface Connector Signal Code Description Cable color 1 _ SHIELD 1 Shield protective ground 2 Open 2 3 B B RxD TxD P Receive send data P Red O sO O 4 Open BC O 3 7O 5 C C DGND 2 Data Ground _ eO OF oO 6 yP 2 Voltage if Open j 8 A A RxD TxD N Receive send data N Green Figure 5 5 PROFIBUS Interface Connector 2 B m Open T 1 Optional signal 2 Signal used to connect the bus terminator 2 PROFIBUS cable The following shows the PROFIBUS cable and wiring specifications a PROFIBUS cable Use a PROFIBUS cable that meets the following specifications Type A IEC 61158 2 compliant Table5 7 PROFIBUS Cable Applicable cable Shielded twisted pair cable Impedance 135 to 165 Q f 3 to 20 MHz Capacity Less than 30 pF m Conductor resistance Less than 110 Q km Cross sectional area 0 34mm or more 22AWG 5 9 5 5 Wiring 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSECIA series b Wiring specifications QJ71PB92V a SHIELD PROFIBUS cable RxD TxD P red f RxD TxD N green 3 DE as Figure 5 6 PROFIBUS Cable Wiring Specifications n 6 E 3 Connector S Use a D sub 9 pin male connector for the PROFIBUS cable F The appl
230. eed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not
231. een a DP Master Class 1 and DP Slaves Global control This function enables synchronization command transmission for I O data from a DP Master Class 1 to DP Slaves Diagnostic information Diagnostic information of PROFIBUS DP which is detected by a DP Master or notified by a DP Slave Extended diagnostic error information Diagnostic information specific to each DP Slave Each of DP Slaves notifies of it to the DP Master when an error is detected To the next page A 13 Term Bus cycle time FDT Field Device Tool Description PROFIBUS DP processing time for the DP Master to perform cyclic communication with each DP Slave A tool by which the following operations are performed to DP Slaves on the PROFIBUS DP via a DP Master e Writing or reading parameters of DP Slaves e Monitoring DP Slave status etc DTM Device Type Manager A file in which communication settings and DP Slave parameters are defined when FDT is used The DTM consists of CommDTM and DeviceDTM An abbreviation of Communication DTM CommDTM CommDTM is a file used to define the communication settings needed for transmission via a DP Master DeviceDTM Device DTM is a file in which parameters to be set for a DP Slave are defined KN A specific number for each module that is connected to PROFIBUS DP Ten Ident No is described in a GSD file of each module The UTC is based on the UTC which stan
232. eeseseeeee ee eee ee 8 3 Precautions for bus parameter setting Fore ach set value of the max T_sdr Quiet Time T_qui and Setup Time T_set set the maximum value among those of the stations connected to PROFIBUS DP including the DP Master The default value of the QU71PB92V varies depending on the transmission speed Table6 5 Default Values of max T_sdr Quiet Time T_qui and Setup Time T_set 187 5kbps or less 60 450 800 Default Values of QJU71PB92V max T_sdr 100 150 250 Quiet Time T_qui 0 0 0 3 6 9 Setup Time T_set 1 1 1 4 8 16 6 4 Bus Parameters 6 11 SYSTEM DEDICATED PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE 0 Z E W D faa W W z lt iva lt a OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEG TA eres 6 5 Slave Parameters Set parameters for each DP Slave 1 Start procedure a Right click on the graphic of the cable Insert DP Slave b Select a DP Slave in the Device Database screen 2 Setting items a Slave Parameter Settings screen Slave Parameter Settings Model MHKKRRRRRX Revision Vendor nce KERR Slave Properties Name Slave_Nr_001 FDL Address 1 0 125 Watchdog min T_sdr 11 1 255 Group identification number l Gpi T Gp2 f Gp3 l Gp4 Gp5 7 Gp amp l Gp Gps IV Slave is active jE E 5 Initialize slave when faili
233. en retry Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions f Pa Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in A physical execution error detected or system switching ae E410H occ rr d durna Service execution inthe red nd nt system the Slave status area Normal communication detection u uri VI xecutl I u r 5 Un G23040 to Un G23047 and then retry Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions E411H Execution error on the protocol was detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E412H Execution error on the application was detected corrective actions E420H Read error was detected on the DP Slave side E421H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side E422H Module error was detected on the DP Slave side E423H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available E424H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side E425u Request not supported error was detected on the DP Slave side E426H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E427H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E428H Incorrect slot number was detected on the DP Slave side F459 l Pana detected on the DPS id correctly set or not and retry 2 ONSA eae bias eee ee ee TS AVO ee For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E42 AH Access to an access disabled area was attempted from the DP Slave side E42BH Access
234. ency function in automatic refresh Configurator DP disable the data consistency function lt _ Section 6 3 Diagnostic information was generated on a Check Diagnostic information area for diagnostic F120H RSP ERR LED ON DP Slave information generated in a DP Slave and take corrective actions Check the FDL addresses of the DP Master and DP Slaves and set correct parameters without There is a DP Master or DP Slave that has duplication Fiel RSP ERR LED ON a duplicated FDL address on the same line When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system reset Switch 1 in the intelligent function module switch setting 37 Section 6 7 F122H Check the wiring status of the bus terminator s An error has been detected on the line and PROFIBUS cable s F123H RSP ERR LED ON Or some master parameter is not If the terminating resistor and PROFIBUS cable appropriate wiring status is correct increase the set value of F124H the master parameter Min slave interval Since Error action flag is check marked in the The DP Master is in the clear request master parameter settings the clear request has F125H RSP ERR LED ON oe been sent to all DP Slaves transmission status To disable transmission of the clear request uncheck Error action flag F1FEH FAULT LED ON Hardware failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative F1FFH explaining a detailed description of the problem The standby master FDL address is out of Reset Swi
235. er eesseee 9 3 Communication READY signal X1B eesesesseeeee 3 16 Connector eeccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccce 5 Control master FDL address display area seeeeeee 3 54 Current bus cycle tiME eeeeeeceseececeececeececcceeceee 3 43 Current diagnostic information non notification time area 0000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 3 37 Current operation mode area eeeeseseeeeseseeeeee 3 21 D Data consistency FUNCTION cecececcccccccccccccccccccces 4 2 Data consistency requesting signal XOC essssss9 3 13 Data consistency start request signal YOC e 3 13 Data exchange start completed signal X00 3 6 Data exchange start request signal YOO eeseeseee 3 6 Data swap FUNCTION eocccecccccccccccccccccccccccvcvcccse 4 19 Diagnostic information area eeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeeeeee 3 36 Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 3 9 Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 3 9 Diagnostic information area for mode 3 eeeseeeee 3 39 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 eceecccccccccoceccecoccococoococooooo 3 7 Diagnostic information detection signal X01 s s 3 7 Diagnostic information invalid setting area ssesse 3 38 Diagnostic information non notification time setting arca ccccccccccccccccccvccccccccccccccccccoes 3 36 E Each station s alarm Status eecccccccccccccccccccccceee 3 35 Each station s diagnostic Status eeersceeeceeeceeeeees 3 32 Error
236. er memory address Result 26446 674En An error code is stored lt gt Section 9 5 4 The FDL address of the DP Slave from which the alarm was read is stored 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 0 See below Bit Description Bit Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed BEASTIE Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 1 When E506 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 1 is stored lt 37 Section 9 5 4 26449 6751H 2 When a value other than E506h is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 1 When E506 is currently stored in buffer mem
237. es DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 DP Slave 124 Repeater 4 OVERVIEW 2 Connection points counted as number of modules Controli system DP Master Class 1 Standby systern DP Master Class 1 y FDL address 0 y Sy FDL address 1 z0 us eed Redundant QJ71 a Redundant QJ71 DZ nO module CPU PB92V module CPU PB92V Tracking cable n Segment 1 O m z Bus terminator Bus terminator 2 S DP Slave DP Slave PE DP Slave a FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 30 W J Repeater 1 v DP Slave 29 modules Segment 2 2 fe E O 5 DP Slave DP Slave cisci DP Slave FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 60 R ter 2 X J X DP Slave 30 modules Sge lt LO lt nw Hi Segment 3 gt Be uZzq SoFi U gt anan DP Slave DP Slave PEES DP Slave FDL address 61 FDL address 62 FDL address 89 Repeater 3 1 S V Repeater 3 2 z DP Slave 29 modules m rm W m Segment 4 Segment 5 a DP Slave EEN DP Slave DP Slave PONERTE DP Slave FDL address 90 FDL address 120 FDL address 121 FDL address 125 J J Y D4 D DP Slave 31 modules DP Slave 5 modules p lt x Figure 2 6 When Connecting 124 DP Slaves Non Redundant DP Slaves Only T g nO Zz aQ Ww be Se 2 3 Redundant System Configurati
238. escription FDL address FDL address 2 Input data size 1 words 2 bytes V O data size p 2 bytes 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples Output data size 1 words 2 bytes PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres c Parameter settings on GX Configurator DP lt Master parameters gt Master Settings Module QJ71PB92V Revision gt ahd Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION The transmission speed is set PROFIBUS Master z 1 5Mbps lt Sahe rL acces tT pps T EE Starting 1 0 number ooo 0x0 OxFEO 3 6 Set the I O No of the Error action flag Goto Clear State nada Min slave interval 80 1 65535 100 ps Polling timeout 50 1 65535 1 ms Data control time 100 T_wd 6 65535 10 ms 2 I Watchdog z Estimated bus cycle time 17 ms T D a in Oo Watchdog for time sync 0 0 65535 10 ms Cancel Default Bus Param lt Slave parameters gt 2 Slave Parameter Settings 5 Model Fananrcxnnne Revision T Vendor Prnnscxnns wan Slave Properties Z Name Slave_Nr_001 owo Set the FDL address of 4 Sk the DP Slave ABLES Oia MV Watchdo Slave Watchdog time 5 g D 5 Ww g i 1 65025 1 ms a 9 z min T_sdr 11 1 255 8 F 5 Group identification number Gpl T Gp2 l Gp3 l Gp4 TOW i Gp5 Gp amp Gp Gps Set this for normal Initialize slave when failing to respond Swap 1 0 Bytes in Master DP V1A4V 2 Slave Parameters Cancel Default User Param Select Modules lt I
239. esentative F10FH explaining a detailed description of the problem To the next page 9 5 Error Codes 9 24 9 5 6 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Local diagnostic information of the QJ71PB92V o zZ e ie n im l fra 0 APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code LED Status M LSet el series Table9 9 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Continued Action Error Description Although Data consistency start request Modify the sequence program so that the BBLKRD F110H signal YOC is ON the BBLKRD instruction is executed when Data consistency start instruction is not executed request signal YOC is ON Although Data consistency start request Modify the sequence program so that the BBLKWR F111H signal YOC is ON the BBLKWR instruction is executed when Data consistency start instruction is not executed request signal YOC is ON Although Data consistency start request Modify the sequence program so that the BBLKRD F112H signal YOC is ON the BBLKRD and and BBLKWR instructions are executed when Data BBLKWR instructions are not executed consistency start request signal YOC is ON The data consistency function in automatic refresh Data consistency start request signal YOC and dedicated instructions are not concurrently F113H _ was turned ON during execution of the data executable In the master parameter setting of GX consist
240. esponse Area 23809 5D01 25121 6221H Request Instruction No Request instruction No 1 Request instruction No 2 23937 5D81h 25249 62A1H Request instruction No 3 24065 5E01H 25377 6321H Request instruction No 4 24193 5E81H 25505 63A1H Request instruction No 5 25633 Request instruction No 6 24449 5F81H 25761 64A1H 24578 6001H 25889 6521H Request instruction No 7 24321 5F01H 6421H Request instruction No 8 24705 6081H 26017 65A1H 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 14 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEG ores 1 Making a sequence program The following example program is created for executing request instruction No 1 For details on the program example refer to Section 7 4 5 I O data exchange normal Reads the execution result and completion status Un G 25120 I O data DP Slave exchange exchange Acceptance normal normal status Completion status Writes the request instruction a Un G23809 to Un G23936 Acyclic communication execution command Writes the execution instruction Set the value to 1 Un G23808 mpletion C
241. ffset Address Description Set Value 1 Sets D_Type 8 8H The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H 2 Set D_Len The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H Empty area Write 0000H to 127 7F baa ELEH Set value Fixed to 0000H 7 23 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING 26 el series 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 22 Response Format When Normally Completed Offset Address Result O OH A response code is stored Stored value A412H 1 1H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value 00H to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H Max LenDataUnit is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 3 3H Features Supported is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 4 4H Profile Features Supported is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 5
242. formation area clear request signal Y02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 a Turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 when clearing the following information e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 e Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e Local station error information area Un G23071 b When the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 is turned ON and the processing at a is completed the Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 turns ON c When new diagnostics information is generated while the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 is ON the following information stays cleared No diagnostic extended diagnostic or local station error information is stored e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 e Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e Local station error information area Un G23071 d After the Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 has turned ON turn OFF the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 e Taking corrective actions for the error and turning OFF the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 turns OFF the Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 f After the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 is turned OFF the QJ71PB92V checks
243. g cannot be continued The following explains a program example for reexecuting the time control function after system switching 1 Request and response formats For the request and response formats used for the time control over DP Slaves refer to Sections 7 6 1 to 7 6 3 2 Program example a Settings The setting is the same as in Section 7 6 4 1 b Device assignments in program example 1 Devices used by the QU71PB92V The devices are the same as in Section 7 6 4 2 2 Devices used by the user Table7 76 List of User Devices Description Device Description Time control execution command SM1518 3 Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target The device assignment is the same as that in Section 7 6 4 2 ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control 7 83 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 5 Program example for alarm acquisition PROGRAMMING MELSEC A series c Tracking devices for reexecuting the function in the case of system switching In the program for the time control over DP Slaves data in the following devices 3 are tracking transferred x 2 A oc e Start command device by which the Time control start request signal Y19 is z turned ON Start command device to which time control request data are set Table7 77 Tracking Transfer Devices in the Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 2
244. g oO 1 Summer time setting i 4 Advance notice of summer winter time switching is stored 0 Not switch between summer and winter times in an hour 1 Switches between summer and winter times in an hour a 5 Time difference the time to be added or subtracted is stored 7 The value 0 means No addition or subtraction Stored value 0 to 31 Unit x 0 5 hours 6 Time calculation method is stored 0 Adds the time difference 1 Subtracts the time difference b When failed PROGRAMMING Table7 45 Response Format When Failed Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0H An error code is stored lt 3 gt Section 9 5 5 26801 68B1H to Empty area a 6 26812 68BCH Stored value 0000H z S SE 7 ue 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 50 7 6 1 Time data read request PROGRAMMING MELSEG sries 7 6 2 Time data write request UTC format This section explains the request and response formats of the time data write request UTC format 1 Request format Table7 46 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value Set a request code 26784 68A0H Set value 1601H Set the UTC second year month day hour minute second The set value 9DFF4400H represents January 1st in 1984 00 00 00 Set value 9DFF4400H to FFFFFFFFH 26787 68A3h to Set UTC nanosecond ms to ns setting 26788 68A4H Set value 00000000H to FFFFFFFFH Set the clock status
245. ge 3 19 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Table3 8 Buffer Memory List Continued Description 26 el series Reference DEC HEX Section 26145 to 26415 System area Use prohibited 6621n to 672Fn ee pened 26416 to 26424 Slave status area This area stores the alarm status of each DP R Section 6730n to 6738 Alarm detection Slave 3 4 5 26425 to 26431 System area Use prohibited 6739n to 673Fn gt seip 26432 to 26434 This area is used to set the request data for Section Alarm request area Ky R W 6740H to 67421 alarm acquisition 3 4 11 26435 to 26445 System area Use prohibited _ 6743n to 674Dn gt Mee penned 26446 to 26768 This area stores the execution result of alarm Section Alarm response area E R 674En to 6890n acquisition 3 4 11 26769 to 26783 System area Use prohibited 6891 to 689Fn 26784 to 26792 _ A This area is used to set the request data for Section Time control setting request area R W 68A0n to 68A8x time control 3 4 12 26793 to 26799 System area Use prohibited 68A9x to 68AFx Usep 26800 to 26812 Time control setting response This area stores the execution result of time R Section 68B0u to 68BCn area control 3 4 12 26813 to 32767 System area Use prohibited 68BDu to 7FFFn gt Use prohibited
246. gned in order of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in order of the FDL address The actual assignment order can be confirmed in the Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Slave List of GX Configurator DP Order of assignment Last known CPU Error BATTERY ERROR 2 When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s in GX Configurator DP the order of the assigned DP Slaves is changed After modifying parameters check the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program gt Section 6 5 1 Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 This area is used to set DP Slaves to Temporary slave reservation using the temporary slave reservation function Initial value 0000 0 Not specify the DP Slave to Temporary slave reservation 1 Specify the DP Slave to Temporary slave reservation b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14 Each bit represents 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 the n th DP Slave 17 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63
247. gnostics on the QU71PB92Vs in systems A and B ae Section 5 4 Set the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Backup mode 1 In Debug mode setting of Redundant parameter in GX Developer select Do not start with Debug mode 2 Write the configured redundant parameters to the redundant CPUs in systems A and B 3 Reset the redundant CPUs in systems A and B at the same time or turn the power OFF and then ON a QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 7 2 Set PROFIBUS DP parameters in GX Configurator DP j can EF Section 6 1 y Set the standby master FDL address in GX Developer a t ES Section 6 7 v Connect PROFIBUS cables to the QU71PB92Vs in systems Aand B CS Section 5 5 Connect PROFIBUS cables to DP Slaves and boot them lt Manual for DP Slave Set the RUN STOP switches of the redundant CPUs in systems A and B to RUN Reset the redundant CPUs in systems A and B at the same time or turn the power OFF and then ON 1 To the next page Figure 5 2 Procedures before System Operation Redundant System 5 3 5 2 Procedures and Settings before System Operation 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION M als eG aries 1 Check the LEDs of the QU71PB92Vs in systems A and B 7 Section 5 3 for an error 2 Start I O data exchange 1 Did I O data exchange start successfu
248. hanta ae hey Detaled sting Ae O a8 Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur r Base setting 2 Base mode O paj a a Main C Detail Q Medrea E Ext Base2 w Ent Base3 8 Slot Default 5 st Base5 12 Slot Default l ERAR Ean Import Multiple CPU Parameter Read PLC data 7 Z e O Z U Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple CPU settings Default Check End Cancel Figure 4 24 I O Assignment Setting GX Developer a awo b Intelligent function module detailed settings 265 w an w 1 Startup procedure 595 U Parameters PLC parameter lt lt I O assignment gt gt gt SFr U gt ann Detailed setting button o Z Intelligent function module detailed setting E n Ri petal reais ahs a Hes Ae 1 0 response mau PLC i bei operation time z m de Lojpic Pic Hea fma ora QU7IPBS2V om L a 3 o D o Z lt L E oO fe an a settings should be set as same when using multiple CPU Figure 4 25 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error GX Developer a 5 a BZ 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error 4 25 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TA cries 2 Output status for the case of a CPU stop error a When Error time output mode is set to Clear The QJ71PB92V stops I O data exchange when a CPU stop error occ
249. hapter explains the troubleshooting and error codes of the QJ71PB92V Before troubleshooting the QJ71PB92V check that no errors have occurred on the QCPU or MELSECNET H remote I O network If any error is identified check the error details and take corrective actions For the troubleshooting in Section 9 1 to 9 4 refer to the following flowchart Troubleshooting Do the LEDs indicate an error status RUN LED OFF RSP ERR LED ON TOKEN LED OFF lt PRM SET LED Flashing FAULT LED ON Yes Check the error indicated by LEDs and take corrective actions gt Section 9 1 No Unable to write the parameters from GX Configurator DP Yes Takes actions for the case where parameters cannot be written from GX Configurator DP lt 3 Section 9 2 No Yes Troubleshooting when communication with DP Slaves is Unable to communicate with DP Slaves not possible lt 37 Section 9 3 No Is the QU71PB92V mounted Yes to the single CPU system No For the QU71PB92Vs used in the redundant system has the following error occurred Output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching FAULT LED of QJ71PB92V in new standby system is ON Yes When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching lt gt Section 9 4 1 and 9 4 2 No When the QJ71PB92V is used in the redundant system is maintenance to be performed
250. he module of DP Slave from the tree view Buffer MIT Address Displays or sets the CPU module devices used in the communication between the QJ71PB92V and the CPU module This item can be set when selecting Slave Specific Transfer from the PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings dialog box and selecting DP Slave from the tree view c User MIT Address When accessing to the device set at User MIT Address in a program of GX IEC Developer accessing to the I O data is enabled When the address of I O data is changed due to increase and decrease of modules the address is recalculated by the I O Mapping Therefore when exporting and incorporating the user library again accessing to the I O data is enabled as well as before increase or decrease of modules A program needs no modification 6 20 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC IA series 6 6 3 Writing Automatic Refresh Parameters Write the automatic refresh parameters to the QCPU ai Reset the QCPU after writing the automatic refresh parameters i Before writing them check the PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings screen to see 2 that AutoRefresh Update of CPU or AutoRefresh Update of GID Project is selected Slave Status Area z Data Transfer using a m 5 w DE Ae n Pak corea D Verify that either of them is selected D Figure 6 11 W
251. he next page a wW z Q A a 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 4 3 3 1 List of I O signals SPECIFICATIONS PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION FUNCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA cries Table3 4 List of I O Signals Continued Signal Direction QJ71PB92V QCPU Signal Direction QCPU QJ71PB92V 3 5 X1A Use prohibited YIA X1B Communication READY signal Y1B X1C Use prohibited Y1C PE XID Module READY signal Y1D use prohibita X1E Use prohibited Y1E X1F Watchdog timer error signal Y1F POINT Among the I O signals for the QCPU do not output turn ON the signals indicated as Use prohibited If any of the Use prohibited signals is output the programmable controller system may malfunction Remark Sooo ooo ooo ooo For how to use the output signals to continue or reexecute respective functions in event of system switching in the redundant system refer to Section 7 9 eeeeeeeeceoceaoeeneeaeoeoeceaeeeceeaeeeeeeeeaeoeaoeeaea eae cae eeeeeeeeae eee ea 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 1 List of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 1 Data exchange start request signal Y00 data exchange start completed signal X00 OVERVIEW a Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO to start I O da
252. held as the output data sent to the DP Slave from the QJ71PB92V b Input data received from DP Slaves are updated into the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V 2 When Error time output mode is set to Clear a Communications with DP Slaves are interrupted and output data are not sent b Input data received from DP Slaves are held in the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V When the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system set the watchdog timer for DP Slaves so that the calculation formula shown in Section 4 8 5 is satisfied If the formula is not satisfied a watchdog timer error occurs in DP Slaves during system switching A CAUTION Do not install PROFIBUS cables together with the main circuit or power lines or bring them close to each other Keep a distance of 100mm 3 9inch or more between them Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to noise INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the programmable controller under the environment specified in the user s manual of the CPU module to be used Otherwise it may cause electric shocks fires malfunctions product deterioration or damage While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of the module insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole in the base unit to mount the module Incorrect mounting may cause malfunctions a failure or a drop of the module In an environment of frequent vibrations secure the module with the screw
253. iable and assigned based on the slave parameter Select Modules set on GX Configurator DP For the DP Slave that has a fixed data length the slave parameter Select Modules setting is ignored Data length range The maximum data length per module is 244 bytes and the total data length for all DP Slaves can be set up to 8192 bytes When the data length is an odd number of bytes 00H is stored to the final high byte The input data of the next station is assigned starting from the next buffer memory address Address DEC HEX OOS i b15 b8 b7 bO 6144 1800H 6144 1800H 2nd byte of 1st module 1st byte of 1st module Input data of 1st module 6145 1801H 4th byte of 1st module 3rd byte of 1st module to Input data length 23 bytes 6156 180CH 6157 180DH out data of 2nd module N 6155 180BH 22nd byte of 1st module 21st byte of 1st module to Input data length N 6156 180CH 00H 23rd byte of 1st module 7 bytes 6160 1810H 6157 180Dh 2nd byte of 2nd module 1st byte of 2nd module 6158 180Ex 4th byte of 2nd module 3rd byte of 2nd module as 6159 180FH 6th byte of 2nd module 5th byte of 2nd module io 6160 1810H 00H 7th byte of 2nd module Input data of n th module 10239 27FFH Figure 3 9 Example of Input Data Assignment 1st module 23 bytes 2nd module 7 bytes E POINT If a DP Slave with no input data is assigned its space in the input data area is
254. iagnostic signals information By sending services SYNC UNSYNC FREEZE UNFREEZE to each DP Slave in a f Global control function Section 4 1 3 group synchronous control of DP Slave 1 O data is available PROFIBUS DPV1 a Acyclic communication This function allows data reading writing to DP Slaves at any specific timing Section 4 2 1 with DP Slaves independently of I O data exchange a mAN This function enables acquisition of up to 8 alarms or status information data that have Alarm acquisition Section 4 2 2 been generated on any DP Slave Support of FDT DTM Using a commercially available FDT reading writing the DP Slave parameters and Section 4 2 3 technology monitoring the DP Slave status are executable via the QJ71PB92V D PROFIBUS DPV2 Time control over DP This function allows the QJ71PB92V to operate as the time master and set the time of Section 4 3 1 Slaves each DP Slave This function swaps the upper and lower bytes in word units when I O data is sent and Data swap function Section 4 4 received When I O data from DP Slaves are read from or written to the buffer memory this n function prevents the I O data from being separated and incorrectly mixed f Data consistency function f i Section 4 5 Automatic refresh setting GX Configurator DP e Dedicated instructions BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions This function sets whether to stop or continue I O data exchange with DP Slaves when a z CPU stop err
255. iagnostic information E302H Unable to change the operation mode in the current Global control function operation status e Acyclic communication e Alarm acquisition FDT DTM technology e Time control function E303H Failed to write to the flash ROM Initialize the flash ROM Or failed to initialize the flash ROM If the same error occurs again replace the QU71PB92V Initialize the flash ROM ae If the same error occurs again please consult your local E304H The flash ROM clear mode processing is incorrect a j a A Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem E305H The operation mode of the QJ71PB92D was set with the Set the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V when the QJ71PB92D compatible function disabled QJ71PB92D compatible function is disabled The operation mode was changed during Class2 service A E306H p i g a After execution of ABORT change the operation mode execution of Acyclic communication Change the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Unable to change the operation mode of the QU71PB92V 9 p E307H in the c rrent op eration inode of the ted ridant CP Separate or Debug mode and then change the operation I I H p mode of the QJ71PB92V E3A0H E3A1H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure ae i rae E3A2H explaining a detailed description of the problem E3A3H 9 5 Error Codes 9 14 9 5 2 Error codes E300H to E3FFH Error codes generated when swi
256. iagnostic information detection 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING MELSEC A series 5 Program example z a Interlock program example for remote master station and remote I O station Provide interlocks depending on the link status of the remote master station host z station and remote I O station other station The following example shows a communication program interlock using the link status SB47 SB49 of the remote master station and the link status SW70 bO SW74 b0 SW78 b0 of the remote I O station station No 1 5 3847 H K Tg 1k To SB47 Host baton pass status Og SB49 H KO ates 11 SB49 Host data link status SW70 0 H KO H IT SW70 Baton pass status SW74 0 H KO of each station 9 e SW74 Cyclic transmission status of each station 5 SW78 0 H KO z H 14 SW78 Parameter communication 9 B20 To tt n 3 T4 status of each station D fF AF iF A if uc No M SB20 Module status NO MI E eh ee ae fe ee E E A E ee l l O 8 enn 5 NO Zz awo AF END Pi eo TE Figure 7 24 MELSECNET H Remote I O Network Interlock Program Example E i OHV U gt anw Set an appropriate value for the timer constant KO according to the following Table7 63 Set Value for Timer Con
257. ial value O000H The set data are stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON 0 Reserved or not configured station 1 Normal DP Slave b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 41 3 4 2 1 Each bit represents 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 d ai 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 4 1 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115114 113 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23591 5C27n are fixed to 0 Figure 3 20 Parameter setting status area Active station Un G23584 to Un G23591 5 Parameter setting status area Reserved station Un G23592 to Address DEC HEX 23592 5C28n 23593 5C29n 23594 5C2An 23595 5C2Bu 23596 5C2Cu 23597 5C2Dn 23598 5C2En 23599 5C2Fn Un G23599 This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are set to Reserved station by the slave parameters Initial value 0000H The set data are stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON 0 No
258. ic Transfer Input Block Transfer Output Comm Trouble Area D10000 D10249 AA D10300 D10426 gg Refresh ranges are different D10500 D10524 between the QJ71PB92D and QJ71PB92V Vv iv iv E 5 lave Status Area Data Transfer using C Copy Instructions AutoRefresh Update of CPU AutoRefresh Update of GID Project Cancel Figure App 2 Checking Auto refresh Parameters App 5 Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 2 Precautions for replacing the system APPENDICES MELSEC A eres Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs 1 O signals TROUBLESHOOTING a Input signals Some input signals have been changed Change programs referring to the following table TableApp 5 Input Signal Comparisons Compa Replacement precautions 7 W Q fa Z W a a lt A1SJ71PB92D tibility QJ71PB92V AJ71PB92D QJ71PB92D Data exchange start completed signal X00 ON I O data exchange start completed O OFF I O data exchange start not completed Diagnostic information detection signal X01 ON Diagnostic information detected A OFF No diagnostic information detected 2 a in this section INDEX Diagnostic information area cleared signal Communication trouble area clear end signal 5 z X02 GN Area cieared nh jea a A lt 3 2 b in this section OFF Area not cleared
259. ic information Table9 4 Error codes E200H to E2FFH Error Code Error Description Action E200H The specified FDL address is out of the range E201H No FDL address has been specified E202H The specified FDL address belongs to the local station E FBSEV Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry E203H The specified FDL address belongs to a reserved or temporarily reserved station E204H No extended diagnostic information is found in the specified FDL address Change the QJ71PB92V operation mode to mode 3 and retry E205H Invalid mode When a value is set for Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches delete it and leave it as blank no setting 9 13 9 5 Error Codes 9 5 1 Error codes E200H to E2FFH Error codes generated when reading extended diagnostic information Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG Ce series 9 5 2 Error codes E3004 to E3FFu Error codes generated when switching operation mode Error Code Table9 5 Error codes E300H to E3FFH Error Description Action Check if the operation mode set in Operation mode E300H The specified operation mode is invalid change request area is correct and retry i After writing parameters change the mode to E301H Parameters have not been written to the module Sixt Communication mode mode 3 After completing the following processing change the operation mode Acquisition of extended d
260. icable screw size is 4 40 UNC e 4 Wiring specifications for bus terminator When the QJ71PB92V is a terminal station use a connector with built in bus terminator that meets the following wiring specifications 2 O VP 6 o z Ru 3902 2 min1 4W Ol RxD TxD P 3 o _ J Ria 2200 2 min1 4W RxD TxD N 8 o a TE lt 6 lt to Wi wi aa FEE 2 fi E OLB u gt anw Ra 3902 2 min1 4w DGND 5 o Figure 5 7 Wiring Specifications for Bus Terminator g m 5 PROFIBUS equipment E The PROFIBUS cables connectors and other PROFIBUS equipment must be 7 purchased or obtained at user s discretion For details on PROFIBUS equipment access the following website e PROFIBUS International http www profibus com g z S g nO a ES Or 85 az 5 5 Wiring 5 10 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC TA eries 5 5 2 Wiring precautions As one of the requirements to give full play to QU71PB92V s functions and make up the system with high reliability it is necessary to have an external wiring unsusceptible to an influence of noise The following gives the precautions for external wiring of the QU71PB92V 1 Communication cable wiring Do not install the QU71PB92V communication cable together with the main circuit power lines and or load carrying wires for other than the programmab
261. ice of QU71PB92V 6 Start command device data Using the start command device it 5 are tracking transferred turns ON with the OUT instruction 5 Figure 7 26 How to Turn ON an Output Signal of the QJ71PB92V 2 Processing after system switching FE Output signals of the QJ71PB92V are turned OFF in the timing of ON for 1 gue scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 This age prevents the QU71PB92V s output signals from remaining ON in the new SE amp ann control system after system switching ON for 1 scan only after switching g the system from standby to control SM1518 X1B X1D XIF m aye FMOv HO k4Y0 K2 E Turns OFF the QU71PB92V s output signal Fs This is the case where output signals of QU71PB92V are YOO to Y1F Figure 7 27 Processing After System Switching 7 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 66 PROGRAMMING MELSEG ores b When keeping the I O data exchange function enabled after system switching 1 Initial setting The initial setting is performed in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 Initial setting for QJ71PB92V startup al moo M400 X1B X1D XIF XO Yo UO eT P Initializes Diagnostic info ae af Loy haa ue J invalid eres HOV k20 ee J Initializes Diagnostic info non notificatio
262. in the System switching DP Slave specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 Control system Standby system New standby system New control system Q fe Power Power 5 suppl Redundant QJ71 Executes system supply Redundant QJ71 z y CPU PB92V _switching CPU PB92V T module module Tracking cable Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 4 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION failure Before recovery of the switching target DP Slave an g error occurred at another DP SEVGA D rm W i New standby system New control system z lt a ee Redundant QJ71 es Redundant QJ71 itchi modul CPU PB92V switching module CPU PB92V Tracking cable o Z lt x ae Bus terminator S PE DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 4 failure failure a Zz aQ mF Q HZ 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 56 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LY series 4 System switching condition setting result area Disconnected station detection Un G23664 to Un G23672 a System switching condition setting result Un G23664 The results of the setting in the System switching condition Un G23648 are stored 0 OR condition 1 AND condition b Syste
263. information of the 0 R Section 5A1FH area local station QU71PB92V 3 4 2 In Communication mode mode 3 this area is 23072 to 23321 Diagnostic information area used to store the diagnostic information of the 0 R Section H tO H for mode error occurred on eac Slave during 4 5A20n to 5B19x f de 3 d h DP SI duri 3 4 6 communication 1 This indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequence program R Read only R W Read write executable To 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory list the next page 3 18 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM ie 7 Z O z o i O mm o 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Table3 8 Buffer Memory List Continued Description Initial M ELSEG Eseries Reference 13 em 129 value Section 23322 to 23327 System area Use prohibited 5B1An to 5B1Fx Use prohibited In Communication mode mode 3 this area is 23328 to 23454 Extended diagnostic information used to store the extended diagnostic 0 R Section 5B20n to 5B9Ex area for mode 3 information of the error occurred on each DP 3 4 6 Slave during communication 23455 System area Use prohibited _ _ 5B9Fx y Usep This area is used to set the FDL
264. instruction instruction Set an operation mode in Check the result in Operation Operation mode change mode change result area and request area Current operation mode Figure 3 8 Operation mode change request signal Y11 Operation mode change completed signal X11 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION E POINT 1 Do not turn the power OFF or reset the QCPU during the operation mode registration to the flash ROM by turning ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 Turn the power OFF or reset the QCPU after the Operation mode change completed signal X11 has turned ON If the power is turned OFF or the QCPU is reset by mistake register the operation mode to the flash ROM again 2 If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 ICF Section 9 5 2 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode lt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 14 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEG LY series 11 Alarm read request signal Y18 Alarm read response signal X18 a Turn ON the Alarm read request signal Y18 when reading alarms on the specified DP Slave
265. ion of the product e The serial No displayed on Product inf list of GX Developer indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product is updated when a new function is added z O z 5 0 us Z 0 oO SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 4 Checking the Function Version and Serial No 2 15 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA cries CHAPTER3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains the performance and transmission specifications of the QU71PB92V For details of the general specifications refer to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 1 Performance Specifications The performance specifications of the QU71PB92V are given below Table3 1 Performance Specifications Item Specifications PROFIBUS DP station type DP Master Class 1 Transmission specifications Electrical standard EIA RS485 compliant characteristics Medium Shielded twisted pair cable lt 37 Section 5 5 1 Network topology Bus topology Tree topology when repeaters are used Data link method e Between DP Master and DP Master Token passing method e Between DP Master and DP Slave Polling method Encoding method NRZ Transmission speed 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps lt 3 1 in this section Transmission distanc
266. ion explains the request and response formats in the time control function gt providing a program example z 1 Making a sequence program For details on the program example refer to Section 7 6 4 E I O data exchange a 2 normal Y19 X19 Writes request data v N Un G26784 to Un G26792 ao Time control execution command SET Y19 I O data 2 exchange Ss normal X19 S Read the response code and error code z k Un G26800 G D Normally completed Reads the execution result Un G26800 Response code Un G26801 to Un G26812 RST Y19 2 fe 8 Failed 5 lt gt Un G26800 Response code Processing for failed completion Zz Sge RST Y19 Tog mi an m TE Figure 7 18 Sequence Program Time Control Function m a OHV U gt anan PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 48 PROGRAMMING 7 49 MELSEC TA eries 7 6 1 Time data read request This section explains the request and response formats of the time data read request 1 Request format Table7 43 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value Set a request code 26784 68A0 4 Set value 1600H 26785 68A14 to Empty area Write 0000n 26792 68A8h Set value Fixed to 0000H 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 1 Time data read request PROGRAMMING M als 26 lA ceries
267. ion request area eeereeeeeeeeeee 3 46 Acyclic communication request execution instruction arca cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoscccosoccoces 3 47 Acyclic communication request result areasessee 3 48 Acyclic communication response area seeeeeeeeeeee 3 49 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves seeeeeeeeeee 4 11 Address information area for mode 3 eeeeseeeeeees 3 27 Alarm ACK FEQUESTereeececcccccccccecsccccccocooceosecs 7 35 Alarm acquisition Cvcccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccos 4 4 Alarm arca v se ecccccccocoooo000000000000000000000000000 3 50 Alarm read request signal Y18 esssessessceeeeeeeees 3 15 Alarm read request with ACK sesseeeeececcecceceeee 7 40 Alarm read request without ACK sesesseseeeeeceees 7 31 Alarm read response Signal X18 sseseseeseeeeeeeeee 3 15 Alarm request AAA ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 3 50 Alarm response Areaceeececccccccccccccccccccccccoccces 3 50 All Stations alarm status ececccccccccccccccccccvcvcceee 3 35 All stations diagnostic StatUSessseereccecceecceccveeee 3 32 Applicable SYStEMeeeeccccccccccccccccccccccocccccccocers 2 1 Automatic Refresh Parameters eeeseeseceeeceeeceeeee G 16 B Buffer memory list eccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 3 1 7 BUS cycle tiMe rsereeeesceeccccccccccsccccccsccccscsecoess 3 58 Bus cycle time area seseseesesesesecesesesesoseseoeoee 3 43 BUS parameters sererecccccsccccccccccccsccccccsccccccese G C Checking the LED status on GX Develop
268. ion that sent the diagnostic information does not turn ON in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 POINT Set values into the Diagnostic information invalid setting area Un G2080 when the Data exchange start request signal Y00 is OFF Values set with the Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON are ignored PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 38 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address DEC HEX 23072 5A20h 23073 5A21H 23074 5A22n 23075 5A23x to 23320 5B 18h 23321 5B19h 3 39 MELSEC TA eries 4 Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 a This area stores the diagnostic information generated on DP Slaves during communication Information of 125 modules is stored in Diagnostic information area for mode 3 in the same order for each module b15 b8 b7 bO Diagnostic information area of 1st module The status 3 information Whether The FDL address of the 1st or not any extended diagnostic module is stored information other than the one sent Initial value 00x Diagnostic information area of 2nd module this time is stored in the DP Slave In the normal status 00x is stored 23072 5A20n of the 1st module is stored 00x to 7Du 0 to 125 FDL address Diagnostic information area of 125th module Initial valu
269. ion trouble detection signal X01 Even while Y01 is ON another failure is detected In the QJ71PB92V Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 Diagnostic information detection signal X01 a While Y01 is ON another failure is not detected Figure App 3 When Another Communication Failure Occurs While Y01 is ON When the Communication trouble detection signal X01 turns OFF by the Communication trouble detection signal reset Y01 during a communication failure even if the reset signal YO1 is turned OFF the QJ71PB92D does not detect this failure again The QJU71PB92V detects the failure Communication failure 1 _In the QJ71PB92D Communication trouble detection signal reset Y01 Communication trouble detection signal X01 Currently existing failure is not detected again even if Y01 is turned OFF _In the QJ71PB92V Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 Diagnostic information detection signal X01 UM Currently existing failure is detected upon turn OFF of Y01 Figure App 4 When Y01 is Turned OFF App 11 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEG TA eres b Communication trouble area clear request signal Y02 and Communication trouble area clear end signal X02 If a
270. ion with any specified DP Slave ABORT Class2_SERVICE Disconnects a line connection from any specified DP Slave Reads data from a DP Slave connected to the line by the INITIATE 2 READ Class2_SERVICE service Writes data to a DP Slave connected to the line by the INITIATE 2 WRITE Class2_SERVICE service 2 The data that can be read or written by READ or WRITE services vary depending on the DP Slave to be used For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 4 12 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series 2 Executing acyclic communication Execute the acyclic communication by the following procedure OVERVIEW a Write the request instruction to be executed to the Acyclic communication request area Un G23809 to Un G24832 b Turn ON 1 the bit corresponding to the request instruction No in the Acyclic communication request execution instruction area Un G23808 c When the QJ71PB92V accepts the acyclic communication request instruction the acceptance status bit in the Acyclic communication request result area Un G25120 turns ON 1 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM d When execution of the acyclic communication is completed the completion status bit in the Acyclic communication request result area Un G25120 turns ON 1 and the execution result is stored in the Acyclic communication response area Un G25121 to Un G26144
271. is not available on the DP Slave side E42CH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side E42DH Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave side E42EH Incorrect request was detected on the DP Slave side E42FH Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the DP E430H 9 15 Slave side 9 5 Error Codes To the next page 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication Q TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code M aLS AG Le eries Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Continued Error Description Resource error was detected during read processing on the Action E431H DP Slave side E432H Resource error was detected during write processing on the DP Slave side E433H The resource is already in use on the DP Slave side Check if th ax ted by the DP SI f ecl e request data supporte e DP Slave is E434H There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave side l q PP y Th lable for th fied DP SI correctly set or not and retry r E435H F SONICS MOr AVALAT TO meer o avew For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave requested Memories used for request processing are insufficient on the E436H DP Slave side E437H The DP Slave side made this service invalid E438H The DP Slave side did not respond to the request
272. itching methods There are the following cases where system switching occurs by an error z gt Table4 8 System Switching Methods Switching by system switching request from QJ71PB92V 2 a and 2 b in this section Switching by system switching request from other network module than QU71PB92V 2 System switching when a fault occurs in the control QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant Ls system System cu System switching using GX Developer 58 System switching by system switching instruction a System switching due to a QU71PB92V error The QU71PB92V performs system switching when it detects a error that disables 2 the system operation F Control system Error in Standby system 5 4 4 Continues communication New standby system New control system L nooo ooo000 Executes sys Switching id amp o Z Q e Z U Tracking cable Bus terminator Bus terminator lt gt fo f PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION o0 0000 onogon oooo0u o0o0o0 ooonon ooogo0n ououon OD 00 OO as on o0o00 ono0o000 o0o0o00 ooog0u ooo000 o0oo0oo00 DP Slave QJ 71PB93D DP Slave ST1H PB Figure 4 31 System Switching due to QJ71PB92V Error PARAME
273. itions Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS EC Q series 3 Reapply power to or reset the QCPU The PRM SET LED on the QJ71PB92V turns ON and the QJ71PB92V starts in the Parameter setting mode mode 1 Write the QJ71PB92V parameters on GX Configurator DP io Z E Q O I ol W l faa 0 fid APPENDICES INDEX 9 6 How to Return the QJ71PB92V to Its Factory set Conditions 9 28 APPENDICES MELSEG TA eres APPENDICES Appendix 1 Functional Upgrade of the QU71PB92V The following table shows the functions added to the QJ71PB92V and the applicable function version and serial No for each function Refer to this section and check if your QU71PB92V supports respective functions TableApp 1 Function Upgrade of the QJ71PB92V Additional function Function version Seano O Temporary slave reservation D function E Redundant system support function D QJ71PB92D compatible function 09052 or later _ No restrictions Remark eeeeeeseseseeoevoeeveoeoeecoeoeoeeevneeeeeeeeeeaeseoacevoeeeeaoeseeaeeeeeee 8 For how to check the function version and serial No refer to Section 2 4 eeeeeoeseeeeoevoeeoeoeoeevoeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee eee eeeaeee eee eeoeeeee ee Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models This section compares the specifications of the QJ71PB92V and those of the former models and explains the precautions to be taken when replacing the system and progr
274. k method characteristics Medium Shielded twisted pair cable Network topology Bus topology Tree topology when repeaters are used e Between DP Masters Token passing method Between DP Master and DP Slave Polling method Encoding method NRZ Transmission speed 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 93 75kbps 187 5kbps 500kbps 1 5Mbps 3Mbps 6Mbps 12Mbps Transmission distance 100 m to 1200 m Differs depending on the transmission speed Max no of repeaters 3 repeaters Number of connectable modules Per segment 32 per segment including repeater s Number of connectable modules Per network 126 per network total of DP Masters and DP Slaves Max no of DP Slaves 125 per QU71PB92V 60 per QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D 1 In normal service mode Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes Max 32 bytes per DP Slave per DP Slave 2 In extended service mode Max 1920 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave Input data I O data size Output data 1 In normal service mode Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes Max 32 bytes per DP Slave per DP Slave 2 In extended service mode Max 1920 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave No of occupied I O points 32 I O assignment 32 special 2 I O i t 32 intelligent points I O assignmen i igent points paints 1 The number of DP Slaves is 124 when the QU71PB92V is used in a redundant system Appendix 2 Differences between the QU
275. l X00 1 Setings N system switching _ condition ra ha a System switching condition setting result area Disconnected station detection Un G23664 to Un G23672 Figure 3 36 Operation in System Switching Condition Setting Area Disconnected station detection Stores result data 3 55 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEG LAY series System switching is performed when an error occurs in communication with a DP Slave which is specified in the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 POINT 1 Set values into the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 when the Data exchange start request signal YOO is OFF Values set with the Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON are ignored OVERVIEW 2 With a communication error identified in a system switching target DP Slave after system switching no system switching is performed even if a communication error occurs in another DP Slave To perform system switching again restore all of the switching target DP CONFIGURATION SYSTEM io Slaves to normal condition The DP Slave status can be confirmed in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 Section 3 4 5 o Z O Q 3 O w a 7 1 Itis any of all the DP Slaves that are specified
276. l setting execution command X30 Conditions for write to output data 1st word X31 Conditions for write to output data 2nd word _ c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 8 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device Description Device Description DO to D95 Input data D1000 Diagnostic information read target D100 to D195 Output data D1100 Read target of operation mode change result D200 to D207 Slave status area Normal communication detection D208 to D215 Slave status area Reserved station setting status D216 to D224 N 5 Slave status area Diagnostic information detection 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSECTA eries 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh This section explains a program for the case where the QU71PB92V communicates with DP Slaves using automatic refresh Program examples in this section are based on the system configuration example shown in Section 7 1 1 Setting automatic refresh parameters Enable the automatic refresh parameters and the data consistency function The figure below shows the case that automatic refresh parameters are set by Block Transfer Set the I O data refresh target Set the refresh target in the Slave status area Enable the auto refresh function The auto refresh parameters are written to the QCPU at the time of paramete
277. le controller or bring them close Doing so may cause the QU71PB92V to be affected by noise and surge induction 2 Wirings from programmable controller and I O modules Keep the PROFIBUS cable away from I O module cables as much as possible Input module Output module QJ71PB92V ooooo0 ema Wiring of input module PROFIBUS cable 7 l __ Wiring of output module en oo aN Shield jacket Figure 5 8 Programmable Controller Wiring 3 Grounding For use of the QU71PB92V ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable controllers power supply module 5 11 5 5 Wiring 5 5 2 Wiring precautions 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Le ceries CHAPTER6 PARAMETER SETTING This section explains the procedure for setting QJ71PB92V parameters and details of the parameters 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure The following describes the QJU71PB92V parameter setting procedure 1 Setting procedure Start Install GX Configurator DP on the personal computer Start GX Configurator DP and register GSD DDB files of i DP Slaves s a ye L3 GX Configurator DP Operating Manual y Create new parameters Select the module model Set Master Parameters L Section 6 3 Set Bus Parameters L Section 6 4 Set Slave Parameters L gt Section 6 5 i PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Use the autom
278. le time 0 ms r Watchdog for time sync 0 0 65535 10 ms Cancel Default Bus Param Figure 6 3 Master Settings Screen eg Z E Wu D jam w Ww lt x jam lt a Table6 3 Master Parameter Setting Items k Z Item Description Set the name of the DP Master Name n fo Setting range Up to 17 alphanumeric characters Q oa panera Set the transmission speed of the PROFIBUS DP Setting range 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps Default 1 5 Mbps Set the FDL address FDL address Setting range 0 to 125 Default 0 nO To the next page ae EO 6 3 Master Parameters 6 7 6 PARAMETER SETTING Item Starting I O number MELSEC TA eries Table6 3 Master Parameter Setting Items Continued Description Set the first 3 digits of starting I O number of the QJ71PB92V expressed in 4 digits Set this item for using the POU for GX IEC Developer command of GX Configurator DP Setting range 0004 to the value shown in 1 Default 000H Error action flag Min slave interval Check this checkbox when sending a clear request to all DP Slaves from the DP Master When a communication error occurs even in one DP Slave the clear request is sent to all DP Slaves Not checked The clear request is not sent to all DP Slaves Checked The clear request is sent to all DP Slaves Set the minimum required time from the slave polling cycle to the next one This set value is enabled on all connected DP Slaves
279. lly Check the LED status lt 7 Section 5 3 No Check the parameter settings gt 2 To the previous page Yes Completed 1 Start I O data exchange by either of the following methods Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO Start it from GX Configurator DP 2 Check the Local station error information area Un G23071 to see if the QU71PB92V has an error or not 37 Section 3 4 2 If an error exists remove the error cause When an error exists system switching is not executed Figure 5 2 Procedures before System Operation Redundant System Continued 5 2 Procedures and Settings before System Operation 5 4 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS Ol Zz ore lt lt to Wi wi cma TE UZ 7 OLB cud ann PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC TA cries 5 3 Part Names and Settings This section explains the names and settings of each part of the QU71PB92V QJ71PB92V RUN TEST SDIRD TOKEN READY PRMSET 1 RSPERR FAULT PROFIBUS I F O 0Q 0O OO0000 p QJ71PB92V E Figure 5 3 QJ71PB92V Appearance Table5 2 Names of Parts No Name Description These LEDs indicate the operation status of the QU71PB92V For details refer to 1 in this section 2
280. ls LEDs e Writing parameters by GX Configurator DP e Changing the operation mode lt gt Section 6 2 e Restarting the QU71PB92V using the Restart request signal YOD I Section 3 3 2 8 1 When the redundant CPU is in Backup mode GX Configurator DP automatically changes it to the Separate mode to write the parameters 4 36 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS b Precautions on the DP Slave side 1 Watchdog timer setting value Set a watchdog timer value so that it satisfies the following formula If the formula is not satisfied a watchdog timer error occurs in DP Slaves during system switching System Configuration When using only non redundant DP Slaves When using redundant and non redundant DP Slaves Table4 13 Watchdog timer setting value Description Watchdog timer Bus cycle time x 2 Redundant system switching time _ gt Section 3 5 1 3 5 3 MELSEC A eres Reference Section 2 3 2 1 Section 2 3 2 3 When using only redundant DP Slaves Line switching time of DP Slave For the line switching time for a DP Slave refer to the manual of the DP Slave or contact the manufacturer Section 2 3 2 2 Multi master system configuration HSA x MSI gt Section 3 5 1 6 4 1 In addition to the QJ71PB92V used in the redundant system another DP Mastier is connected on the same PROFIBUS network 2 When using only redundan
281. lt _ gt Section 5 5 1 If the bus terminators and PROFIBUS cables are correctly connected increase the set value of the An error has occurred during processing of master parameter Min slave interval FB04H FAULTLEDON _ system switching Standby system Inthemuli master systemc nfiguration checkit ii the FDL address of the control master is Z Control system H duplicated with that of another DP Master If the same error occurs again after performing the above please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 5 Error Codes 9 26 9 5 6 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Local diagnostic information of the QJ71PB92V Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG lA series 9 6 How to Return the QU71PB92V to Its Factory set Conditions This section explains how to return the QU71PB92V to its factory set condition This procedure initializes the flash ROM of the QU71PB92V Perform the following procedure for example when parameters in the flash ROM are corrupted The PRM SET LED is flashing 1 Stop the QCPU 2 Connect the GX Developer to the QCPU and perform the following steps a to k by using the Device test on the GX Developer a Write 9 to the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 of the QJ71PB92V b Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 c When the Operation mode change completed signal X11 has turned ON turn OFF the Ope
282. lti master system Z More than one DP Master with different FDL addresses can be connected to the 9 same network 2 38 W Se a 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration 2 7 2 2 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 3 Redundant System Con MELSEC TA eries figuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 1 PROFIBUS DP network configuration This section explains configu QJ71PB92Vs are mounted ration of a redundant PROFIBUS DP system in which the For the redundant system using the QU71PB92V refer to Section 4 8 1 System equipment The following table shows the equipment required for the redundant PROFIBUS DP system System Equipment DP Master Class 1 Table2 5 System Equipment QJ71PB92V function version D or later lt lt 3 Section 2 4 Configuration tool GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later DP Slave Redundant or non redundant DP Slave QJ71PB93D ST1H PB etc Repeater Required when 32 or more DP Slaves are connected PROFIBUS cable Bus terminator Section 5 5 1 2 Network configuration To use the QJ71PB92V in a redundant PROFIBUS DP system configuration the following conditions must be met a Number of connectable modules in an entire network When repeaters are used Control system QU71 z7496 1 PB92V Standby system QJ71PB92V DP Slaves 1 Up to 124 DP Slaves are connectable 2 A redundant DP Slave may ha
283. lue Description 7D 00004 to 007DH Set the FDL address of the DP Slave 0 to 125 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM ie By setting the FDL address is set in the Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 and turning ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 the extended diagnostic information is stored in the Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 2 Z O z o i O M a o 2 Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 The execution result of the extended diagnostic information read request is stored in this area g zZz If the request failed the values in address 23458 to 23583 5BA2H to 5C1FH become z O Ou 5 Address DEC HEX b15 b8 b7 bO The read result is stored Initial value 00001 a wd 23457 5BA1H A2001 Normally completed z g z Other than A2001 Failed Error code 37 Section 9 5 1 Tag i ag The data size of the extended diagnostic information in addresses 23459 to 23583 5BA3x to 5C1Fu is stored E a 23458 5BA2 Initial value 0000x Tus 00061 to OOF 4n Data size of extended diagnostic information unit byte The information of status 1 is stored The latest information of status 2 is stored Initial value 00H Initial value 00H o 23459 5BA3x G9 Normal 001 Normal Other than 00n 37 Section 3 4 6 4 b Other than 00n 37 Section
284. m switching DP Slave specification result Un G23665 to Un G23672 The results of the setting in the System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 are stored 0 Not system switching target 1 System switching target Address DEC HEX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 23665 5C71n 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14 Each bit represents the n th DP Slave 5C72x 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 23667 5C73x 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 23668 5C741 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 23669 5C75H 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 1 1 4 1 1124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b12 of address 23672 5C78x are fixed to 0 Figure 3 37 System Switching DP Slave Specification Result Un G23665 to Un G23672 POINT In either of the following cases check the System switching condition setting Un G23648 again e A value other than 0 and 1 is stored in the System switching condition setting result area Un G23664 e Although setting is made in the System switching DP Slave specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 data in the System switching DP Slave specification result
285. m the following buffer memory area e Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 Remark Se ooo ooo ooo cocoa For program examples on acquisition of extended diagnostic information refer to the following e Single CPU system K gt Section 7 2 e Redundant system L gt Section 7 9 2 eeeeeseecoeoseeoeceeeeeeeeeseseeeaeseeeaeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeee eee 4 6 4 1 PROFIBUS DPVO0 Functions 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information 4 Functions M als 26 Q series 4 1 3 Global control function By multicasting broadcasting data the QU71PB92V can simultaneously control I O data a of each DP Slave in a specified group i O DP Master Class 1 QJ71 QCPU PBg2v 2 Sent to group 1 S o BE i 28 7 f DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave 7 2 Group 1 Group 2 2 xt 1S Figure 4 5 Global Control Function W 5 o Z Q e Z U PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 1 PROFIBUS DPVO0 Functions 4 7 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEG LA series 1 Global control services a SYNC UNSYNC 1 SYNC This service starts the SYNC output synchronization mode In the SYNC mode the output status is refreshed every time a DP Slave
286. mally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 4 data No 8 Completion status of response to alarm b11 0 Failed or not executed b15 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed To the next page 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 44 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING Buffer memory address 26449 6751H 26450 6752H 26451 6753H 26452 6754H to 26484 6774H 26485 6775H 26486 6776H 26487 6777H 26488 6778H MELSEC TA cries Table7 38 Response Format When Failed Continued Alarm data No 1 1 2 Result When E506h is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 1 is stored lt 57 Section 9 5 4 When a value other than E506u is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 When E506h is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 2 is stored 5 Section 9 5 4 When a value other than E506u is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 2 When E506h is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446
287. mine the applicability of the program and confirm that it will not cause system control problems The following lists the installation positions of the QU71PB92V and corresponding program examples shown in this chapter lt Single CPU system configuration gt Power 4 J71 supply QCPU nee module lt Redundant system configuration gt Ai Redundant QJ71 module CPU PB92V lt MELSECNET H remote I O network configuration gt Remote master station fae 1 quz1 Q71 supply QCPU modul LP21 PB92V MELSECNET H remote I O network Remote I O station Power Qj70LP25 Qu71 supply 25 PB92V module Be Redundant QJ71 module CPU PB92V Tracking cable Figure 7 1 Installation Positions of the QJ71PB92V and Corresponding Program Examples in This Chapter Table7 1 Installation Positions of the QJ71PB92V and Corresponding Program Examples in This Chapter Installation W Reference position Section 7 1 to 7 7 Section 7 8 Section 7 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC IA series 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples This section explains the examples of I O data exchange programs 3 The following system configuration is used as an example for explanations in Sections z 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 1 System configuration example 6 Q25HCPU a z QJ71PB92V DP Master Cla
288. mode 3 is registered to the flash ROM at the same time as the operation mode change FFFFH The mode is changed to Parameter setting mode The mode registered to the flash ROM is deleted at the same time as the operation mode change POINT If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 lt gt Section 9 5 2 The operation mode of the QU71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode lt gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 2 Operation mode change result area Un G2256 This area stores the execution result of the operation mode change request Stored Value A300H Table3 14 Operation Mode Change Result Area Un G2256 Description Normally completed Other than A300H 3 23 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 3 Operation mode change area Failed Error code 5 Section 9 5 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series 3 4 4 I O data exchange area This area is used for the I O data exchange function POINT 1 Data are assigned to the I O data exchange area in the order of parameters set in GX Configurator DP in the order of FDL addresses The actual assignment order can be confirmed in the Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Slave List of GX Configurator DP OVERVIEW CONFIG
289. mory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 2 is stored 37 Section 9 5 4 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 3 is stored lt gt Section 9 5 4 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 26489 6779h to 26528 67A0h Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26529 67A1h to Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8H 26569 67C9H to 26608 67F0H Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26609 67F1H to Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 26649 6819H to 26688 6840H Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26729 6869h to 26648 6818H 26768 6890H 7 39 Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Failed the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 6750H is OFF 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request PROGRAMMING MELSEC A eres 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK This section explains the
290. mote I O stations 1 2 3 4 Automatic refresh Automatic refresh is not available when the QJU71PB92V is mounted ona MELSECNET H remote I O station To use the automatic refresh mount the QU71PB92V on a remote master station QCPU Dedicated instructions BBLKWR BBLKRD Dedicated instructions BBLKWR BBLKRD cannot be used when the QJU71PB92V is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote O station To use dedicated instructions mount the QJU71PB92V on a remote master station QCPU QJ71PB92V parameter setup To set QU71PB92V parameters connect GX Configurator DP to a remote I O station QJ71PB92V parameters cannot be set via a remote master station FDT DTM technology To use the FDT DTM technology first connect the FDT CommDTM to a remote I O station The FDT DTM technology cannot be used via a remote master station 2 1 Applicable System 2 1 1 Precautions for use on MELSECNET H remote I O stations 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A series 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration OVERVIEW 2 2 1 Basic configuration of the PROFIBUS DP network N This section explains the basic PROFIBUS DP configuration for using the QJ71PB92V as a DP Master Class 1 1 System equipment The following table shows the equipment required for the PROFIBUS DP system z O z 5 0 us Z 0 Oo SYSTEM Table2 4 System Equipment DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB92V N Configuratio
291. n the diagnostic information is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 of the QU71PB92V Not checked No function check Checked Function check performed Ignore AutoClear Check this box to disable the clear request transmission when a diagnostic error is detected on this DP Slave even though the master parameter Error action flag is enabled Check this checkbox to disable the Error action flag setting in the master parameters This setting is available when the Error action flag setting in the master parameters is enabled Not checked Enables Error action flag setting Checked Disables Error action flag setting Initialize slave when failing to respond Check this checkbox so that the DP Master resends parameters to DP Slaves when the DP Master is restored from the status of a communication error Not checked Not resend parameters to DP Slaves Checked Resends parameters to DP Slaves Swap O Bytes in Master Check this box to swap the I O data of the DP Slave on the QU71PB92V buffer memory Not checked No swapping Checked Enables data swapping DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Displays the DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters screen 37 2 b in this section button This can be selected when DP V1 Support enable is checked buHon Used when setting parameters specific to the DP Slave User Param For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave
292. n redundant system 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LAY series Table3 30 Items in Tics and Tisc Calculation Formulas a ee The time taken until the redundant CPU in system A receives a system switching request from the Tool tes QJ71PB92V in system A and then sends a system switching request to the other redundant CPU in cpuA ms 5 system B TcpuA ms Scan time 3 System switching time of redundant CPU Tsw ms a Tam Tre a ms System switching processing time lt gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Tsw ms e Tam ms Automatic refresh time of QU71PB92V lt 53 gt QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals e Trc ms Tracking data loading time by standby system CPU lt gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Internal processing time of the QU71PB92V Tp ms Tp ms Total number of bytes for I O data lengths of all DP Slaves x Time Corresponding to ms P p Transmission Speed 1 No of connected DP Slaves X Time Corresponding to Transmission Speed 2 2 Common processing time 2 Scan ms Scan time of the redundant CPU 37 QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Number of switching target DP Slaves that are specified in the system switching DP Slave Nand specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 when AND is set in the System switching condition area Un G23648 1 The I O data length of each DP Slave can be confirmed on the Slave Modules s
293. n speed To the next page 6 10 6 4 Bus Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING SLSEC LEY series Table6 4 Bus Parameter Setting Items Continued Item Description Setup Time T_set Set t Sett he setup time ing range 1 to 255 Unit x Tpit Default Depends on the transmission speed Target Rot Time T_tr Set t Sett he target token rotation time ing range 256 to 16777215 Unit x TBit Default 50000 x TBit GAP factor HSA Sett Set t Sett Set a constant for controlling the GAP update time T_gud ing range 1 to 100 Default 10 he highest FDL address of DP Slaves that exist on the network ing range 2 to 126 Default 126 Max retry limit Set t Sett he maximum number of retries for individual data transmission ing range 1 to 7 Default Depends on the transmission speed eeeeeseeveeevoeeaeecoeoeeeeeseeeeoeeeeeeesee ees eeseeeseeaeeoeaoeeee 8 Tei Bit Time is a unit that expresses the time required for 1 bit data transmission as 1 The actual processing time differs as shown below depending on the transmission S peed In the case of 1 5 Mbps 1 Ts 1 1 5 x 10 0 667 x 10s In the case of 12 Mbps 1 TsiJ 1 12 x 10 0 083 x 10 s Tait is converted into ms automatically on GX Configurator DP The results of the conversion ms are displayed on the right side of the screen eeee eeseoeeeeveveeeoeseeeeseeeesesneeeeeeeeeeeoesee
294. n time setting area Uo iti Hov Ko 3648 J e for system UO Sets a system switching Moy Hi G23649 J pea st we o an 1 Specifies the 2nd temporary slave reservation a SS SS o 7 I 1 Initializes Diagnostic info I HF pnoy eps mer a invalid eons ea I HOY Ko SLR i Initializes Diagnostic info non notification time setting area UO ii HOV Ko 623648 et asa for system uo achi I r Sets a system switchin Hoy HT easeq9 J P Slave ts g I Moy W R J Specifies the 2nd temporary J slave reservation In the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching the system from standby to control SM1518 the initial setting similar to the one for QJ71PB92V startup is Figure 7 28 Initial Setting EIPOINT To enable the system switching due to a DP Slave error immediately after system switching store 0 in the Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 lt gt Figure 7 28 7 67 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres 2 Keeping output data To keep output data after system switching perform the following e Processing of the QU71PB92V in the control system Before system S oc switching z Write the output data to the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 using devices Tracking transfer the output data stored in
295. n timeout has occurred after execution of i 3 Retry after execution of the INITIATE service the INITIATE service eae 5 A system switching odelired during service execution 4 Increase the set transmission timeout value of the WI I VI xecutl l as eae nine ne INITIATE service in the redunda 2 7 5 After leaving it for a while retry the execution from the INITIATE service in the new control system Depending on the DP Slave the time allowed for re execution varies Continue retrying until it is normally executed E4E0H No response was received from the DP Slave Check the DP Slave status and retry Any of the following functions are being executed from the Verify that the processing of the following functions is same DP Master to the same DP Slave completed and retry E4E1H Acyclic communication e Acyclic communication Alarm acquisition e Alarm acquisition FDT DTM technology e FDT DTM technology E4E2H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure a O E4E3H explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 19 9 5 Error Codes 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication Q TROUBLESHOOTING alarms M aLS AG Le ries 9 5 4 Error codes E5004 to ES5FFu Error codes generated when reading Table9 7 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error Code E
296. n tool GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later 6 DP Slave QJ71PB93D ST1H PB etc S Repeater Required when 32 or more DP Slaves are connected g N PROFIBUS cable Bus terminator L Section 5 5 1 2 Network configuration In the PROFIBUS DP system configuration the following conditions must be satisfied FUNCTIONS a Number of connectable modules in an entire network When repeaters are used DP Master DP Slaves lt 126 1 Including the QJ71PB92V b Number of connectable modules per segment DP Master DP Slaves repeaters lt 32 14 Including the QJ71PB92V 2 A repeater is counted for both segments PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION c Max no of repeaters Up to 3 repeaters can be used for communication between the QJU71PB92V and any DP Slave d Number of connectable DP Slaves per QU71PB92V Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QU71PB92V PARAMETER SETTING e Multi master system When a communication chip of ASPC2 STEP C mode or equivalent is used the DP Master cannot be connected to the PROFIBUS DP in which the QJ71PB92V is included To use a DP Master with such a communication chip configure another network For the communication chip currently used consult its manufacturer PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration 2 5 2 2 1 Basic configuration of the PROFIBUS DP network 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC lA orie 2
297. nd mountable base unit z O z 5 0 u Z 0 oO SYSTEM a When mounting to CPU module The following shows the mountable CPU modules No of mountable modules and mountable base unit of the QU71PB92V module Power shortage may occur depending on the combination with other mounted modules or the number of mounted modules When mounting modules pay attention to the power supply capacity When the power shortage occurs review the combination of modules to be mounted SPECIFICATIONS Table2 1 When mounting to CPU module n Mountable CPU module No of mountable Mountable base unit 2 a CPU type CPU model name modules 2 QO0JCPU Up to 8 Basic model QCPU Q00CPU Ub to 24 O O Q01CPU i re W Q02CPU zee no Le 2HCP wes a High Performance OVAHE PU 520 QO6HCPU Up to 64 O O Gos model QCPU SEb Q12HCPU ToD Programmable Q25HCPU controller CPU Q12PHCPU P CPU Up to 64 ae Q25PHCPU dae a i g a vg Q12PRHCPU PENE p bi Redundant CPU Q25PRHGPU p fi Q02UCPU Not mountable x x 3 Universal model QO03UDCPU QCPU Q04UDHCPU Up to 64 o o QO6UDHCPU O Mountable x Not mountable 1 Limited to the range of the number of I O points in the CPU module 2 Mountable on any I O slot of the mountable base unit 3 Use the QU71PB92V of function version D or later PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 1 Applicable System 2 4 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSE
298. ng to respond Swap 1 0 Bytes in Master DP V14 2 Slave Parameters Cancel Default User Param Select Modules Figure 6 5 Slave Parameter Settings Screen Table6 6 Slave Parameter Setting Items Item Description Set the name of the DP Slave Setting range max 17 alphanumeric characters Set the FDL address Setting range 0 to 125 Name FDL Address Check this checkbox to use a watchdog timer When this setting is enabled a communication error is detected if no data are received from the QJ71PB92V within the time specified in Slave Watchdog time When disabled a communication error is not detected even if data are no longer received from the QJ71PB92V Once the Watchdog checkbox has been checked in the master parameter setting Watchdog in the Watchdog slave parameters cannot be set Not checked Watchdog timer disabled Default Checked Watchdog timer enabled Whether or not output data at the time of error communication are output from each DP Slave to external devices differs depending on the DP Slave setting For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave To the next page 6 12 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING Item Description Slave Watchdog time MELSEC A eres Table6 6 Slave Parameter Setting Items Continued Set the time of the watchdog timer This setting is available when Watchdog is checked The set value must satisfy the following condition e
299. nge with DP Slaves when a CPU stop error occurs on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QU71PB92V is mounted POINT 1 When the QJ71PB92V is installed in a redundant system the setting described in this section is not required The QJ71PB92V continues I O data exchange with DP Slaves until systems A and B go down regardless of the setting shown in this section 2 When the QJ71PB92D compatible function is enabled the setting described in this section is invalid When the QJ71PB92D compatible function is used set the output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error by the intelligent function module switch setting gt Section 6 7 1 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error On GX Developer set the output status for the case where a CPU stop error occurs Set desired output status in the intelligent function module detailed settings after setting the I O assignments of the QU71PB92V 4 24 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEG LAY series a I O assignment setting 1 Startup procedure Ww Parameters PLC parameter lt lt I O assignment gt gt gt Q parameter setting PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment z r 120 Assignment 2 J sa Modelname Points starxy Coh ao oe Switch setting a foro intet CUTIES i S
300. nitoring the DP Slave status are executable via the QU71PB92V For details of the FDT DTM technology refer to the GX Configurator DP Operating Manual CommDTM Personal computer FDT Ethernet i Power supply module L QJ71 QCPU E71 100 QJ71 PB92V DP Slave status monitoring and parameter setting are available via the QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP 1 _ E DP Slave supporting DP Slave DP Slave FDT DTM Figure 4 13 FDT DTM Technology POINT Once system switching has occurred the function of the FDT DTM technology is disabled and cannot be continued When using the function of the FDT DTM technology in the redundant system pay attention to the following and fully examine possible operations in advance 1 A commercially available FDT must be connected to the control system The FDT DTM technology cannot be used in the standby system 2 The FDT DTM technology must be utilized for temporary applications If it is used for a constant application when system switching occurs execution of the FDT DTM technology may be disabled even after reconnection to the new control system If this occurs wait for several minutes and then retry the execution 1 Parameter settings of DP Slaves temporary status monitoring etc 2 Constant status monitoring etc
301. nostic information stored in the DP Slave Checking method This section 4 a No Yes The extended diagnostic information is read from the DP Slave 3 This section 4 Check the cause of the error from the diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information and take corrective actions Figure 4 4 Acquisition of Diagnostic and or Extended Diagnostic Information 4 4 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC IA series 2 Checking the station generating diagnostic information The data showing where diagnostic information of each DP Slave is occurring are z stored in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to g Un G23064 5 The bit corresponding to the station that sent the diagnostic information turns ON in the Each station s diagnostic status area Un G23057 to Un G23064 3 Acquiring diagnostic information The diagnostic information of DP Slaves is stored in the buffer memory of the Z0 QJ71PB92V 26 Read the diagnostic information from the following buffer memory e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 2 Z O 2 Z O 1S Z Le PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 5 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extende
302. nother communication failure occurs while the Communication trouble area clear request signal Y02 is ON the QU71PB92D detects it again The QU71PB92V does not detect the failure Communication failure 1 Communication failure 2 In the QJ71PB92D Communication trouble area clear request signal Y02 Communication trouble area Un G2040 to Un G2079 1 Expansion Communication trouble area Un G2096 to Un G2110 1 In the QU71PB92V Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 Local station error information area Un G23071 Information on failure 2 Even while Y02 is ON another failure is detected Information on failure 1 Information on failure 1 N While Y02 is ON another failure is not detected 1 For details refer to the following manual PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual Figure App 5 When Another Communication Failure Occurs While Y01 is ON When the diagnostic information of the currently existing failure is cleared by the Communication trouble area clear request signal Y02 even if the clear request signal YO2 is turned OFF the QJ71PB92D does not store the diagnostic information again The QJ71PB92V stores the diagnostic information Communication failure
303. ns 4 3 4 1 1 I O data exchange 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TA cries 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information Diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on DP Slaves during I O data exchange can be easily acquired using buffer memory and I O signals The cause of errors occurring on DP Slaves can be checked on the QU71PB92V from the diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information DP Master Class 1 The DP Slave notifies the QU71PB92V of the diagnostic information and extended diagnostic information Power QU71 supply CPU pBg2v module DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Diagnostic error occurred Extended diagnostic error occurred Figure 4 3 Acquisition of Diagnostic and or Extended Diagnostic Information 1 Procedure for acquiring diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information The following shows the procedure for acquiring diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information Generation of diagnostic information The RSP ERR LED turns ON The diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns ON Check the station that sent the diagnostic Thi ion 2 information for Pois section The diagnostic information sent from the DP Slave is read from the QJ71PB92V buffer gt This section 3 memory Is extended diag
304. nsistency start request signal X1B Communication READY signal 2 X1D Module READY signal X1F Watchdog timer error signal g n b Devices used by the user Table7 69 List of User Devices ove en ove e zZ I O data exchange start command SM402 ON for 1 scan only after RUN E T T X21 Communication error detection reset command SM1518 nea apse alter switching system ftom X22 Communication error area clear command MO Refresh start request gu X30 Conditions for write to output data 1st word M400 Initial setting execution command TE 5 7 mE X31 Conditions for write to output data 2nd word pEr Too c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 70 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target z z Lu Device seeds Device ores g T D208 to F 2 DO to D95 Input data D215 Slave status area Reserved station setting status lt a D100 to D216 to ooa f f D195 Output data D224 Slave status area Diagnostic information detection 7 D200 to re ME f0 D207 Slave status area Normal communication detection D1000 Diagnostic information read target z jam 0 fe a E nO Zz aQ Ww be at gt ue 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 74 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSEG ores 4 Tracking devices for continuously using the functions in the case of system switching In
305. o is stored Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 1 When E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H 2 2H Detailed error code 1 is stored 37 Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E482 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 3 3H 1 When E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 2 is stored gt Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 4 4H 1 When E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 2 is stored gt Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E482h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 5 5H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value 0000H 7 25 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC A eres 7 4 4 ABORT service Class2_ SERVICE This section explains the request and response formats of the ABORT service Class2_SERVICE 1 Request format Table7 24 Request Format Offset Address Description Set Value Set a request code HOO Set value 1413H b15 b8 b7 bO 1 1H 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave to be connected to network is stored Set value OOH to 7DH 0 to 1
306. o 5 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed a 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed b6 0 Failed or not executed 2 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 2 O Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 5 b3 0 Failed or not executed b7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 26448 6750H 2 The ACK response completion status is stored nS 255 nw Bit Description Bit Description rae 5 DN Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm fn g a data No 1 49 data No 5 SE amp b8 0 Failed or not executed b 0 Failed or not executed LNN 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm o data No 2 b13 data No 6 zZ b9 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed ea Lu Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm 7 data No 3 data No 7 Fs 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 7 Completion stat
307. ode 1 Section 6 2 gu PRM SET Flashing The written parameters are invalid Section 9 1 ae lt Wu OFF Operating in operation mode other than Parameter setting mode mode 1 Section 6 2 zo 5 ON An error has occurred Section 9 1 mZ ii FAULT OEb OFF Normally operating cus 1 The LED flashes at intervals based on the value set in Data control time in Master Parameters 2 The LED flashes at the time of request or response in acyclic communication 3 The LED status during token passing varies depending on the number of DP Masters within the g same network and the transmission speed setting as shown the Table 5 4 n ae Table5 4 TOKEN LED Status No of DP Masters within the Transmission Speed Same Network 19 2kbps or less 93 75kbps or more 1 ON More than 1 Flashing ON or OFF o Z lt x ae o PE a nO Zz aQ Ww be miz 5 3 Part Names and Settings 5 6 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC TA eries 5 4 Self diagnostics The self diagnostics of the QU71PB92V performs a unit test on the QU71PB92V It takes about 15 seconds to complete the self diagnostics 1 Self diagnostics execution procedure The following shows how to execute the self diagnostics a When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system set the operation mode of the redundant CPU to the Separate or Debug mode lt gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System b Se
308. ode of the QJ71PB92V set the redundant CPU in Separate or Debug mode and refer to the program example in Section 7 1 1 2 c For precautions for changing the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V refer to Section 6 2 Timing for turning ON an output signal of the QJ71PB92V Do not turn ON any output signal of the QJ71PB92V in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 No processing is performed c When using ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 Use of a rise execution instruction is not allowed Example MOVP PLS etc 7 69 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System PROGRAMMING MELSEC IA series 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples I O data exchange can be continued after system switching ai This section explains program examples for continuing I O data exchange in the case of i Fi O system switching The following system configuration is used as an example for explanations in Sections 7 9 1 to 7 9 7 z z 5 1 System configuration example Tg 2S no Q25PRHCPU QJ71PB92V i QX41 2 amp i oH O g Z D D Tracking cable Bus terminator Bus terminator 2 fe E O Z r DP Slave DP Slave Figure 7 31 System Configur
309. oee eae eee ea eee eaeeee eee eae eee 2 2 2 1 Applicable System 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A eres 2 Compatible software packages The following shows the compatibility between software packages and the system using the QJ71PB92V GX Developer For setting QCPU parameters and creating sequence programs Required GX Configurator DP Configuration software for the QJ71PB92V Required OVERVIEW 2 Zz O Table2 3 Compatible Software Packages qo Software Package Pu System Se a Single CPU system Version 7 or later 00J Q00 Q01CPU e 20e Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later Q02 Q02H Q06H Single CPU system Version 4 or later y Q12H Q25HCPU Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later Version 7 or later 6 Single CPU system S Q12PH Q25PHCPU EEAO E Version 7 10L or later m Multiple CPU system g Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system Version 8 17T or later 2 Q03UD Q04UDH Single CPU system Version ASA orlat Version 7 02C or ersion 8 or later QO6UDHCPU Multiple CPU system later When mounted on MELSECNET H remote I O station Version 6 or later Version 7 or later g O o Z z AS 208 eo a TE uz anan PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 1 Applicable System 2 3 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TA cries 2 1 1 Precautions for use on MELSECNET H remote I O stations The following are the precautions when using the QU71PB92V on MELSECNET H re
310. oeoeeeevoeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaseseeeeeeeeeeeneeed For details on time control over DP Slaves refer to Section 4 3 1 eeeeoeeeveveeseeeeseeveeevseevoeeeeseeseeeeeeneseeeeeeeeeseeeeeee ee FUNCTIONS 13 Communication READY signal X1B a The Communication READY signal X1B turns ON when the Module READY signal X1D turns ON and I O data exchange is ready to be started The signal turns ON only in the Communication mode mode 3 b The signal turns OFF when an error disabling I O data exchange occurs on the QJ71PB92V PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION c Use the signal as an interlock signal for when turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO 14 Module READY signal X1D a This signal turns ON when the QU71PB92V is started up This signal turns ON regardless of the operation mode PARAMETER SETTING b While the QU71PB92V is not ready this signal is OFF 15 Watchdog timer error signal X1F a This signal turns ON when a watchdog timer error occurs on the QU71PB92V PROGRAMMING b The Watchdog timer error signal X1F does not turn OFF until e The programmable controller is turned OFF and back ON again or e The QCPU is reset DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 16 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory This section explains the buffer memories of the QU71PB92V 3 4 1 Buffer
311. of the writing lt After the data consistency function is used QJ 71PB92V 3 ecru Buffer memory Biralave 1 0 io lo o o 2 E re l Updated area for data i S 2i 1 transferred from DP 7 6 A LS S yi 6 Slave Read after completion Data transfer Not updated area for data of data transfer completed transferred from DP Slave Figure 4 21 Example of Input Data Consistency 4 5 Data Consistency Function 4 241 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o Z Q e Z U PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LY series 2 How to prevent data inconsistency The data consistency function can be used by either of the following methods a Data consistency function by automatic refresh In GX Configurator DP select Setup PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings and enable the automatic refresh setting PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings CPU Device Access GX IEC Developer GID Settings Buffer Devices C Slave Specific Transfer Input bo to D41 Output D1000 to D1035 Block Transfer I Comm Trouble Area I Extd Comm Trouble Area I Slave Status Area Data Transfer using
312. ommRef No contained in the response format of the INITIATE service Set value 00x to 7En 0 to 126 0 to 126 Zz Set the length of the data to read Unit byte Quo 2 2H 9 Unit byte Zoe Set value 1 to 240 ot 3 4 3H Set the slot No to read 520 P Set value 0 to 254 8 m wn Set the index to read Oo 4 4H Set value 0 to 255 5 5H to 127 47FH Empty area Write 0000H i Set value Fixed to 0000H g ae Lu i PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 16 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 16 Response Format When Normally Completed Offset Address Result 0 OH A response code is stored 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE Stored value A400H 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE Stored value A410H 1 1H 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7D 0 to 125 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value 00x to 7Ex 0 to 126 2 2H The length of the read data is stored Unit byte Stored value 1 to 240
313. ompletion status Read the response code and error code Un G25121 I O data exchange normal Normally completed R h i It Un G25121Response code 9a0S Me eee Un G25122 to Un G25248 Writes the execution instruction Set the value to 0 Un G23808 Failed lt gt Un G25121Response code Reads the detailed error code Un G251 22 to Un G25248 Processing for failed completion Writes the execution instruction Set the value to 0 Un G23808 Figure 7 14 Sequence Program Acyclic Communication 7 15 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves PROGRAMMING MELSEC A eres 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE This section explains the request and response formats of the READ services ai Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE i 6 1 Request format Table7 15 Request Format z Offset Address Description Set Value E ec Set a request code a ai 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE bz 0 OH Set value 1400H oS 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE Set value 1410H 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE n b15 b8 b7 bO amp 0 1 S 9 1 Set the FDL address of the target DP Slave 5 Set value 00x to 7Du 0 to 125 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE 1 1H b15 b8 b7 bo 2 1 M zZz O 1 Set the FDL address of the target DP Slave 5 Set value 00H to 7Du 0 to 125 5 2 Set C
314. on 0001H Parameter setting mode 0002H Self diagnostic mode 0003H Communication mode mode 3 0009H Flash ROM clear mode 0101H Parameter setting mode 0103H Communication mode mode 3 1 Operation mode currently registered to flash ROM 3 Flash ROM storage mode Un G2259 This area stores the operation mode currently stored to flash ROM Table3 11 Flash ROM Storage Mode Un G2259 Stored Value Description 0101H Parameter setting mode 0103H Communication mode mode 3 FFFFH Not registered No operation mode has been registered to the flash ROM 3 21 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 2 Local station information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A eres 4 Local FDL address display area Un G2257 The FDL address of the local station is stored Table3 12 Local FDL Address Display Area Un G2257 OVERVIEW Stored Value Description 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 FFFFH Parameter not set 1 When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system the following address is stored When it is in the control system Control master FDL address When it is in the standby system Standby master FDL address The FDL address of the local station CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 5 Offline test status area Un G2258 The self diagnostics test details or test result is stored in this area For details on the self diagnostics test refer to Section 5 4 o Z O z o i O Mr o 7
315. on Redundant CPUs Only 2 11 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC lA orie 2 When using only redundant DP Slaves DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 DP Slave 30 Connection points counted as number of modules DP Master Class 1 Standby system DP Master Class 1 Control system FDL address 0 Standby system FDL address 1 Power supply module Tracking cable J e Segmenti ed DP Slave FDL address 31 Power supply module Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave PEPA FDL address 3 DP Slave FDL address 2 Ne V DP Slave 30 modules Figure 2 7 Maximum Configuration with No Repeater Connected Redundant DP Slaves Only 2 12 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M als 2G Kel series 3 When using redundant and non redundant DP Slaves DP Master QU71PB92V 2 Redundant DP Slave 29 Non redundant DP Slave 30 OVERVIEW Repeater 2 2 Connection points counted as number of modules Redundant DP Slave Non redundant DP Slave lt ao DP Master Class 1 Standby system DP Master Class 1 KE Control system FDL address 0 Standby system FDL address 1 ae Reales Redundant QJ71 Redundant QU71 SUPP Y CPU PB92V SUPP Y CPU PB92V module module
316. on overview When the CPU or QJ71PB92V in the control system detects an error system switching is performed to continue communications 6 lt x QJ 71PB92V QJ 71P B92V irs FDL address 0 FDL address 1 QS Control system Standby system we Error 1 detected z Tracking cable F n Bus terminator Bus terminator id 7 Z e e Z U DP Slave QJ 71PB93D DP Slave QJ 71PB92V FDL address 0 FDL address 1 QJ 71P B92V FDL address 1 FDL address 0 Control system 4 New standby system Standby system 4 New control system PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Executes system x switching Continues communication Tracking cable PARAMETER SETTING Bus terminator Bus terminator il amp DP Slave QJ 71P B93D DP Slave ST1H PB Figure 4 29 Redundant System Operation Overview 1 For conditions for making a system switching request system switching methods refer to 2 in this section PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 29 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEG LAY series a Operation of the QU71PB92V in system switching 1 The control system CPU or QJ71PB92V performs system switching when it detects a system switching error For errors that cause system switching system switching methods refer
317. on the one in the standby system Yes Perform maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system lt Section 9 4 3 No Completed Figure 9 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart 9 1 Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC A eres 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions This section explains how to check errors by the LEDs or by checking the LED status on GX Developer 1 Causes and actions The following table summarizes causes that can be thought from the LED status of the QJ71PB92V and corrective actions to be taken LED Status RUN OFF Table9 1 Causes and Actions Cause The watchdog monitoring time has been exceeded Action Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem RSP ERR ON A communication error has occurred Read the diagnostic information from the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 TOKEN OFF The token is not being rotated e Check the PROFIBUS cable connections gt Section 5 5 1 e Check if the bus terminator is connected gt Section 5 5 1 e Check if the FDL address of each station is unique gt Section 6 3 and 6 5 e Check if the FDL address does not exceed the HSA lt gt Section 6 4 PRM SET Flashing Parameters in the flash ROM are corrupted Initialize the QU71PB92V initialization of the flash ROM and write parameters again
318. oo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 40 CHAPTER5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATIONS 1 to 5 11 5 1 Implementation and Installation cooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 D 1 5 1 1 Handling precautions cocooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 D 1 5 2 Procedures and Settings before System Operation sesseececcccccccccccccccccccccvccvcscccccsocooscosecsocoee 2 5 2 1 In the case of the single CPU system ccoooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 D 2 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system ccoooooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 H 3 5 3 Part Names and Settings eeeeecceeeeesccceeccoceccccoocccccccecoccoccoccooceoccooccoccocoeoscoecoscooososseooooe D 5 5 4 Self diagnostics cooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 F b 7 5 5 Wiring 0oooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 F 9 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring cooooooooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 D 9 5 5 2 Wiring precautions 00000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 5 1 1 A 8 CHAPTER6 PARAMETER SETTING 6 1to6 25 6 1 Parameter Setting ProcedurEe ececcccccccocooo
319. oooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 6 2 Operation Mode Setting cooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 6 3 Master Parameters coooooooooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 fy 7 6 4 Bus Parameters SOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOH OOS OOOH OOO OL OOOOH OO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OO OOO OOOOOS 6 10 6 5 Slave Parameters COCO OO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOOO LOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOOH OOOOH OOS OOOH OOO OOOO OO SOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOOH OOOO OO OOOOOOS 6 12 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters COCO COOOL OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOOOO 6 16 6 6 1 6 6 2 6 6 3 6 6 4 Automatic refresh parameter Setup procedure eeeeeseeseseseseecececececececoocossososososososeoeooe G 16 Automatic Refresh Settings eeeeeeeeeeeesesesesesesosososesocecececccesosccecececceococoososososssssososoe G 17 Writing Automatic Refresh Parameters e eeeesesseeseseeecececececececccccececececeoccseesesesesssssse G 21 Number of set automatic refresh parameters eseeeeeeeeeseeeeseesesesscsoscoosososococecososeseseceoee G 22 6 7 Parameter Setting by GX Developer eeeeeeceeeececcccoccococoocoococcccocccccococcococoococcccocoscosoocooo 6 24 CHAPTER7 PROGRAMMING 7 1to 7 85 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples cocoocooooooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000
320. or occurs on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QU71PB92V is Output status setting for the mounted Section 4 6 case of a CPU stop error When the QJ71PB92V is mounted to a redundant system I O data exchange with DP Slaves is continued regardless of the setting until systems A and B go down Temporary slave Without modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP this function allows the Section 4 7 I reservation function DP Slave station type to be changed to Reserved station temporarily Redundant system support When the control system CPU or the QJ71PB92V detects an error the control and Section 4 8 l Fi function standby systems are switched each other to continue communications This function is used to replace the QU71PB92D with the QU71PB92V QJ71PB92D compatible P ne A When the QJ71PB92D has failed replace it with the QJ71PB92V using the Section 4 9 fun 3 3 ction QJ71PB92D compatible function 3 2 Function List 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aeres 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU This section explains the input output signals of the QU71PB92V 3 3 1 List of I O signals The following I O signal assignment is based on the case where the start I O No of the QJ71PB92V is 0000 installed to slot 0 of the main base unit Device X represents input signals from the QU71PB92V to the QCPU Device Y represents output signals from the QCPU to the QU71P
321. ork configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE cries 3 When 125 DP Slaves are connected DP Master QU71PB92V 1 DP Slaves 125 Repeaters 4 OVERVIEW 2 DP Slave 30 modules DP Master Class 1 FDL address 0 Connection points counted as 2 number of modules 2 Power 1lQJ71 supply QCPU pgg2v Be module pZ gt O no Segment 1 Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave EAN DP Slave D FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 30 5 Ne J Repeater 1 S vY u O a N Segment 2 DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 60 Repeater 2 g j DP Slave 30 modules FUNCTIONS Segment 3 DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 61 FDL address 62 FDL address 89 O Repeater 3 1 Wr J Repeater 3 2 DP Slave 29 modules PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Segment 4 Segment 5 g O z lu N rm DP Slave TENA DP Slave DP Slave ETTA DP Slave hi FDL address 90 FDL address 120 FDL address 121 FDL address 125 DP Slave 31 modules DP Slave 5 modules Figure 2 3 When 125 DP Slaves are connected 4 When using redundant CPUs configure the network as shown in Section 2 3 Z z 4 When multiple DP Masters are connected Mu
322. orts the alarm function or not E530H Use of the alarm function is not allowed and retry F Check if the DP Slave is properly exchanging 1 O data or E531H Invalid DP Slave status not and retry E540H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range E541H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a non configured station E542 The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry H to the local station QU71PB92V E543H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a reserved or temporarily reserved station E544 The al pa canal Check if the alarm data returning ACK is stored in the H e alarm is i oS Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un 26768 and retry Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E545H Alarm ACK request error response actions E546H The slot number is incorrect Check if the alarm data returning ACK is stored in the E547H The sequence number is incorrect Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un 26768 and retry E550H Physical execution error was detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E551H Execution error on the protocol was detected TE corrective actions E552H Execution error on the application was detected E560H Read error was detected on the DP Slave side Cei d i ET A eck if the request data supporte e DP Slave is E561H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side
323. ory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 2 is stored gt Section 9 5 4 26450 6752H 2 When a value other than E506h is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Response result Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 When E506 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 3 is stored lt gt Section 9 5 4 26451 6753H 2 When a value other than E506u is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 26452 6754h to Empty area 26484 6774h Stored value 0000H 26485 6775h to Empty area 26488 6778h Stored value 0000H 26489 6779h to Empty area 26768 6890H Stored value 0000H 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 34 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEG ores 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request This section explains the request and response formats of the alarm ACK request The alarm ACK request is used for returning ACK to the DP Slave after execution of the alarm read request without ACK and deleting alarms in the DP Slave ACK can be returned for each alarm that was read 1 Request format Table7 33 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value
324. osesoscscscscocesesecesees 3 4 3 3 2 Details of I O signals eeseseeeseeesesesecececcecececeoccooooosococooooooosososoososssocscococesosesecesesee3 G 3 4 Buffer Memory eeeeeeeseeeseesesesesesoscesocecesesecoccocccccccccececosococosoossososssosscososososcoceccoscocosoe 3 17 3 4 1 Buffer memory listeeeeeeseeeseseseseseceeesecececececececococcecooocooososososososocosesesososcscesesesesesee 3 17 3 4 2 Local station information area seeseesessessesseseeseeceesoescesoccoccoccocooscoesceecoesoosoescecoesoosoese 3 21 3 4 3 Operation mode change arca seeeeeeeeeeseseseseseeeeeeoeososososososocooocosocososososesecececeesesese 3 23 3 4 4 I O data exchange area s eseesseseseseseseseseceecocececececoocoooososooososososooososcscococososososesee 3 24 A 7 3 4 5 Slave Status area cocccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccc ccc ccccccccccccccccccccccccccooccocccooess 3 29 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area eeeeeeeeeeeeseeecceecccecooeccooccocccceccooccoeocooccooecceccooccoooccooooo0 3 36 3 4 7 Extended diagnostic information read arca ceececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccsscccoscecs 3 42 3 4 8 Bus cycle time arca eeeeeeeceeeceecceccceecccecooeocooccoccccecccoccoocccooccceccceccooccooecoosocoesoeo00 3 43 3 4 9 Global control ar amp ae e ssesssscscsecccocococooocooocooooooooococoocooooocooocooococooooocooooooooosoocooooooe 3 44 3 4 10 Acyclic communication Area eeeeeeeeeseeesccecceccocccoooccoccccecoocccoocccocccee
325. ostic information detection detection reset reset request signal Y01 Diagnostic information Error detection detection signal X01 Reads diagnostic extended diagnostic or local station error MOV FROM information from buffer memory instruction 1 Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 Local station error information area Un G23071 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM io Figure 3 2 Diagnostic Information Detection Reset Request Signal Y01 Diagnostic Information Detection Signal X01 Remark Sooo ooo ooo oor Turning ON the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 does not clear the information shown below To clear the following information turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 e Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e Local station error information area Un G23071 eeeeeeseeeeeeooaoeoeeaceoeeceoeeeceeoeeeeaeeea eee eee eeeseeaseeoaceae eee eee 8 o Z O Q 3 O w a 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 8 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEG LY series 3 Diagnostic in
326. ot is stored 0 No ACK return from the user is required 1 ACK return from the user is required 3 Sequence No is stored Stored value 0 to 31 The slot No is stored Stored value 0 to 254 26489 6779h to 26528 67A0h Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26529 67A1h to Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8H 26569 67C9H to 26608 67F0H Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26609 67F1H to Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 26649 6819H to 26688 6840H Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26729 6869h to 26648 6818H 26768 6890H 7 37 Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Normally completed the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 6750 is ON 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request PROGRAMMING b When failed Table7 35 Response Format When Failed MELSEC A series Buffer memory address Result 26446 674En An error code is stored lt 13 gt Section 9 5 4 The FDL address of the DP Slave that returned ACK is stored 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The alarm data read completion status and the A
327. pleted Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed b6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 b3 0 Failed or not executed b7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 26448 6750H 2 The ACK response completion status is stored Bit Description Bit Description Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm data No 1 data No 5 b8 0 Failed or not executed 612 9 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm b9 data No 2 b13 data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed b11 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 3 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed b15 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 8
328. q PP y E562 Modul detected on the DP SI id correctly set or not and retry a oan an AGa al 2 avo SWO For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E563H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available To the next page 9 5 Error Codes 9 20 9 5 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms io Z E Q O I ol W l faa 0 fad APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING M LSet Q series Table9 7 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action E564H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side E565H Request not supported error was detected on the DP Slave side E566H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E567H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side E568H Incorrect slot number was detected on the DP Slave side E569H Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side E56AH Access to an access disabled area was attempted from the DP Slave side E56BH Access is not available on the DP Slave side E56CH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E56DH Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave side correctly set or not and retry E56EH Incorrect request was detected on the DP Slave side For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E56FH Incorrect data type
329. quest to the control system CPU Perform maintenance of the other system control system Is the operation mode different between the QJ71PB92Vs in the control and standby systems Perform maintenance of the other system control system and place the QU71PB92Vs in the control and standby systems in the same operation mode Yes On the Redundant operation screen of GX Developer select Backup mode for Operation mode of the redundant CPU 2 Completed Figure 9 7 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the Standby System Continued 1 For how to change the operation mode of the redundant CPU and how to switch the systems refer to the QnNPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 2 When changing the mode from Separate to Backup use the same communication pathway as the one used when Backup mode was changed to Separate mode 3 gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System lt POINT The following maintenance must be performed on both QU71PB92Vs in the control and standby systems Sequence program modification e Parameter modification in GX Configurator DP or GX Developer e Operation mode change of the QU71PB92V 9 11 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 4 3 Maintenance of the QU71PB92V in the standby system Q TROUBLESHOOTING 9 5 Error Codes Error Codes 26 el series This section explains the error codes that are o
330. quest without ACK CO COOL OOOO OOOOH 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 31 Alarm ACK request COCO OOOOH OOOOH LOLOL OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO SOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOS OOOO OOS OOOO OO OOOOOOS 7 35 Alarm read request with ACK 0000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 40 Program example 000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 7 46 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves eecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccocccce 7 48 7 6 1 7 6 2 7 6 3 7 6 4 Time data read request COCO OL OOOO OOOO OOS OS OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOOO LOL OO OOS OO OOS OOOH OOO OO OOOOH OS OOOO OO OOOOSOOOOO 7 49 Time data write request UTC FOrMAat erccecccccccccccccccccccccocccccscoccocevocsocscocsocscccsocccocees 7 51 Time data write request COOOL OOOO COOOL OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOS OOOOH OOOO SOO OS OOOOH OOOOH OS OHOOSOOOO OOOO OOOD 7 53 Program example CO COO LOLOL OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOH OO OOS OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOH OS OO OOOOH OOOO OO OOOOOOS 7 55 7 7 Program Example for Temporary Slave Reservation SOOOCOOOL OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOOOOOO 7 57 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 58 7 8 1 7 8 2 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station 7 58 Other pre
331. quest When executing me operation mode change Section request a desired operation mode is setin this FFFEu R W 8CFu area 3 4 3 area 2256 Operation mode change result This area stores the execution result of the 0 R Section 8D0n area operation mode change request 3 4 3 2257 i Local FDL address display area Th s area stores the FDL address of the local EFEFu R Section 8D1H station 3 4 2 2258 i This area stores the details or result of the self Section Offline test status area 0 R 8D2n diagnostic test 3 4 2 2259 This area stores the operation mode currently Section R 8D3x Flash ROM Storage mode stored in the flash ROM roe 3 4 2 2260 to 2262 System area Use prohibited aag 8D4n to 8D6x usep 2263 Control master FDL address Thisarea stores the FDE aadress oring f 2 Section D7 di bl v area control system QJ71PB92V when it is used in 2 R 3 414 D7 p ay a redundant system S 2264 Standby master FDL address This area stores the FDL address of the Section D displav rea standby system QJ71PB92V when it is used in 2 R 3 4 14 8D8n play a redundant system ae 1 This indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequence program R Read only R W Read write executable 2 The initial value varies depending on the QCPU installed with the QU71PB92V or the parameter Section 3 4 14 To the next page 3 17 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS
332. r writing lt Auto refresh parameters gt PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings GX IEC Developer GID Settings ulfer Devices C Slave Specific Transfer Input Block Transfer Output M Comm Trouble Area Extd Comm Trouble Area V Slave Status Area Data Transfer using C Copy Instructions AutoRefresh Update of CPU AutoRefresh Update of GID Project Cancel lt Master parameters gt Master Settings Module QJ71PB92 Revision Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Name PROFIBUS Master Baudrate 1 5Mbps v FDL address 0 0 125 Starting 1 0 number 000 0x0 OxFE0 M Goto Clear State 1 65535 1 65535 T_wd 6 65535 Error action flag Min slave interval 80 Polling timeout 50 Data control time M Watchdog Enable the data consistency function Estimated bus Se A M Consistency Watchdog for time sync 0 65535 Cancel Default Bus Param Figure 7 5 Automatic Refresh Parameter Setting Example 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh 100 ps 1 ms 10 ms 10 ms OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING N PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING 2 Program example MELSEC TA cries
333. r error signal X1F ON Watchdog timer error occurred Use prohibited A OFF Watchdog timer error not occurred Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible 4 The watchdog timer error signal code has been changed to X1F Change the corresponding section in the sequence program Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models App 8 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs TROUBLESHOOTING 7 W Q fa Z W a a lt INDEX APPENDICES MELSEG TA eres b Output signals Some output signals have been changed Change programs referring to the following table TableApp 6 Output Signal Comparisons Signal name Compa Replacement B92D AJT1P39 QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V tibility precautions A1SJ71PB92D Data exchange start request signal YOO ON I O data exchange start O OFF I O data exchange stop Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Aes ON Diagnostic Communication trouble detection signal roset Ea l YO fdteranation ON Communication trouble detection signal reset A 2 a in this section detection signal eS reset OFF Diagnostic information area clear request signal ON Diagnostic and Communication trouble area clear request signal Yo2 extended ON Communication and extended communication K EZF 2 b in this section diagnostic trouble area clear request information area OFF clear req
334. rate 1 5 Mbps v Profibus FDL Parameters Slot Time T_sl 37 16383 0 200000 min T_sdr 11 1023 0 007333 max T_sdr 37 1023 0 100000 Quiet Time T_qui 0 127 0 000000 Setup Time T_set 1 255 0 000667 Target Rot Time T_tr 256 16777215 33 333332 GAP factor 1 100 HSA 2 126 Max retry limit 0 7 Cancel Default Figure 6 4 Bus Parameter Screen Table6 4 Bus Parameter Setting Items Item Description Select Baudrate Sets the transmission speed of the PROFIBUS DP When the set value is changed on this screen the Baudrate value in the master parameter settings is also changed automatically Setting range 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps Default 1 5 Mbps Slot Time T_sl Set the slot time maximum time for waiting for a response If this set time is exceeded an error will be detected Setting range 37 to 16383 Unit x Tit Default Depends on the transmission speed min T_sdr Set the minimum response time of responders Setting range 11 to 1023 Unit x Tit Default 11 x Tit max T_sdr Set the maximum response time of responders Setting range 37 to 1023 Unit x Tsit Default Depends on the transmission speed Quiet Time T_qui Set the repeater switching time the time required for switching the transmission direction of the repeater Set 0 when the network does not contain a repeater Setting range 0 to 127 Unit x Tit Default Depends on the transmissio
335. ration mode change request signal Y11 d Write Fu to the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 of the QJ71PB92V e Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 f When the Operation mode change completed signal X11 has turned ON turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 g Write Ax to the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 of the QJ71PB92V h Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 i When the Operation mode change completed signal X11 has turned ON turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 j The TEST LED turns ON and the processing for returning the QU71PB92V to its factory set conditions is started k When the processing is completed the following status will be identified e When normally completed The TEST LED turns OFF e When failed The TEST and FAULT LEDs are ON When the processing has failed please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem POINT If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 lt gt Section 9 5 2 The operation mode of the QU71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode C gt QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 9 27 9 6 How to Return the QU71PB92V to Its Factory set Cond
336. re cables including RS 232 cable or USB cable are connected a POINT When a tracking cable is not connected to the redundant CPU regardless of operation mode of the redundant CPU parameters are written to the system of the redundant CPU where cables including RS 232 cable or USB cable are 2 connected 5 2 b Target for parameter writing When using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system write the same parametersto 4 3 ae Fe systems A and B ae eon c When some parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s ages The buffer memory is reassigned SE amp After modifying parameters review the sequence program A If some DP Slaves are expected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program lt _ gt Section 6 5 leg Z E m W no vm W E W lt rs lt a PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure 6 3 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEG TA eres 6 2 Operation Mode Setting This section describes QU71PB92V operation modes and the procedure for setting the operation mode The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V can be changed by using the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 or on the GX Configurator DP 1 Types of operation modes The following lists the operation modes of the QU71PB92V Table6 2 List of Operation Modes Operation mode change
337. receives the SYNC service If no SYNC service is received the output status is held 2 UNSYNC This service ends the SYNC output synchronization mode DP Master Class 1 Power QJ71 supply QCPU pBg2v module 4 UETA Uis sent to group 1 Bus terminator Bus terminator Group 1 Group 1 DP Slave 1 DSA lt 0O Output image memory Data are refreshed at all times by polling lt During UNSYNC execution Default gt The output image memory values are output without being changed Normal status lt During SYNC execution gt The output image memory values are output only once at the timing of the SYNC service SYNC service Issued within the same group Output to external device Figure 4 6 SYNC UNSYNC vege 4 8 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS M aL EC Aeres b FREEZE UNFREEZE 1 FREEZE z This service starts the FREEZE input synchronization mode In the FREEZE mode the input status is refreshed every time a DP Slave 3 receives the FREEZE service If no FREEZE service is received the input status is held 2 UNFREEZE gt This service ends the FREEZE input synchronization mode E ge DP Master Class 1 a g nz as Power QJ71 supply QCPU pBg2v FREEZE service is sent to group 3 b Bus terminator Bus terminator 3 l l g Group 8 Gro
338. request signal Y06 turns OFF the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 Extended diagnostic Extended diagnostic information read request information read request signal Y06 Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 Extended diagnostic information read completed FUNCTIONS Figure 3 6 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Request Signal Y06 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Response Signal X06 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION eeeeeseeeveeeveeeoeeoceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeaseeeaeea eens For details on acquisition of extended diagnostics information refer to Section 4 1 2 eeseeeeeeoeeaeaoaeoeaceaseeeoeseeeeeeeeaeeaeea eee eeceeeeceeaseeoeaceao eae eeaea eee 8 PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 12 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC LY series 7 Data consistency start request signal YOC Data consistency requesting signal X0C a The Data consistency start request signal YOC is used to enable the data consistency function for dedicated instructions Table3 5 Data Consistency Start Request Signal YOC ON OFF Status Description Enables read write executed by dedicated instructions Turning ON the Data consistency start request signal oN YOC turns ON the Data consistency requesting signal X0C Disables read wri
339. reservation s a HO K4Y0 K2 Turns OFF YOO to Y1F UO Writes tracking transferred BuOV D100 614336 k95 J data to Output data area x15 MD iv ne x uo Writes the initial output m oaas s J data value Yo Y m i ii UE I O data exchange i start processin Lj Ho y p g HO UO BMOV G6144 DO K96 Reading input data UO BOY G23040 D200 ks ee Slave status Program for DP Slave control lt gt gt Section 7 1 1 2 a ee MO UO fBmov D100 G14336 K936 J Writing output data Program for reading diagnostic information lt 3 gt Section 7 1 1 2 b l I a a ah ee TEND Figure 7 37 I O Data Exchange Program Example MOV Instruction 7 79 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELS 26 el series 7 9 2 Program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic error information If a system switching occurs acquisition of the extended diagnostic error information is disabled After the system switching only the extended diagnostic error information that generated after the switching can be obtained is newly For a program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic information refer to section 1 25 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 2 Program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic error information 7 80 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCE
340. riting Automatic Refresh Parameters 1 Start procedure 1 Online Transfer Download to Module 2 When AutoRefresh Update of GID Project is selected from the PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings screen parameters are written from GX IEC Developer FUNCTIONS E POINT When automatic refresh parameters were written from GX Configurator DP while GX Developer was running they are not displayed in file lists such as Read from PLC Delete PLC data on GX Developer Update the file lists by the button of the Read from PLC or Delete PLC data on GX Developer PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION leg zZ E m W no vm W E W z z a PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 241 6 6 3 Writing Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING 6 6 4 Number of set automatic refresh parameters MELSEC TA eries There are restrictions on the number of automatic refresh parameters that can be set for QCPUs This section describes the number of automatic refresh parameters that can be set for QCPUs and the QU71PB92V 1 Number of automatic refresh parameter settings for QCPUs When multiple intelligent function modules are mounted the number of automatic refresh parameter settings must not exceed the following limit Table6 10 Max No of Auto refresh Parameter Settings CPU Type Max No of Auto refresh Parameter Settings
341. rm for Eg which processing is complete AS Take corrective actions for the error that occurred on the DP Slave o zZ O E r S Completed z a N Figure 4 12 Procedure Using Alarm Read Request with ACK 2 Executing alarm acquisition Execute alarm acquisition by the following procedure a In the Slave status area Alarm detection Un G26416 to Un G26424 identify the DP Slave where an alarm is occurring o Z Q e Z U b Write the request data to the DP Slave into the Alarm request area Un G26432 to Un G26434 awo c Turn ON the Alarm read request signal Y18 265 Ww ta aE d When alarm reading is completed the read result is stored in the Alarm response age area Un G26446 to Un G26768 and the Alarm read response signal X18 turns SE amp ON ann e Check the alarm stored in the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 5 and turn OFF the Alarm read request signal Y18 D E POINT In redundant systems do not use the Alarm acquisition gt Section 7 9 5 For program examples on the alarm acquisition refer to the following S e Single CPU system lt gt gt Section 7 5 Z 0 e Redundant system gt Section 7 9 5 g 2 O zE i 2 az 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 15 4 2 2 Alarm acquisition 4 FUNCTIONS 4 16 4 2 3 FDT DTM technology MELSEC LA eries Using a commercially available FDT reading writing the DP Slave parameters and mo
342. rmal DP Slave or not configured station 1 Reserved station b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7l6 5 4 3 l2 14 Each bit represents the n th DP Slave 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 1 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23599 5C2Fu are fixed to 0 Figure 3 21 Parameter setting status area Reserved station Un G23592 to Un G23599 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 6 Temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are set to temporary slave reservation by the temporary slave reservation function Initial value O000H The setting is stored when the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON CF Section 3 4 13 OVERVIEW 0 Normal DP Slave reserved or not configured station 1 Temporary slave reservation Ad
343. rol sssesse 9 23 9 5 6 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Local diagnostic information of the QU71PB92V eesseesesseeee 9 24 9 6 Howto Return the QU71PB92V to Its Factory set Conditionsesserccscssceccecccceccvccccccccecccceeseees Q 27 aT em APPENDICES App 1 to App 21 Appendix 1 Functional Upgrade of the QU71PBO2V eeeeeeeeeeceeccecceccecoceecocccoccocceeceeccoocooceoeeseeee App 1 Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models eeeeeeeeeeseeesceecceecooecooeseeee App 1 Appendix 2 1 Specification COMparisons eeeeeeeseeceeeceececceeceececoceoceeceeccoccooceeceeccoocooceoceoseee ADK 2 Appendix 2 2 Precautions for replacing the systemMe eeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeccecceoceeceeccoocoseeeceeccoseoseese ADD 4 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeceoceoceeceoeccoceoceeceeceoocooseeceeseo ADK G Appendix 3 External Dimensions eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeccoccoceoceeccoccooceoceoceeceeccooceoceeceeccoocooceoceosee AD 20 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 ABOUT MANUALS The following manuals are related to this product Please purchase them if necessary Related Manuals Manual Name GX Configurator DP Version 7 Operating Manual Explains the overview installation method screen operations etc of GX Configurator DP Version 7 Sold separately GX Configurator DP Operating Manual CommDTM Explains the overview installation and operating methods etc of MELSOFT PROFIBUS CommDTM Sold sep
344. ror codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions E451H Execution error on the protocol was detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E452H Execution error on the application was detected corrective actions E460H Read error was detected on the DP Slave side E461H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side E462H Module error was detected on the DP Slave side E463H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available f Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E464H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side R Enoi ied detected on the DESI correctly set or not and retry E465H via GE S EPR RE S NaS ge nee e a For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave side E466H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E467H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side E468H Incorrect slot number was detected on the DP Slave side To the next page 9 5 Error Codes 9 16 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication io Z E Q O I ol W faa 0 fad APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING M LSet Q series Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Continued Error Description Action E469H Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Access to an access disabled area was attempted from
345. rror Description Action E500H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range E501H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a non configured station E502 The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry H to the local station QJ71PB92V E503H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a reserved or temporarily reserved station E504H The alarm read request code is incorrect Check if the specified request code is correct and retry E505 The ACK request bitis incorrect Check if the bit specified in the buffer memory address H e it is i qu 26434 6742H is correct and retry Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E506H Alarm read error response actions Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 E507H Currently not exchanging I O data and retry Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E508H There is an error response to the ACK request i actions F Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E510H Physical execution error was detected corrective actions E520H Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the DP Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is Slave side correctly set or not and retry E521H There is no alarm that can be used on the DP Slave side For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave POSA Check if the DP Slave supp
346. s MODE 4 Operation mode Online c Parameter settings on GX Developer remote master station E Network parameters Setting the number of MELSECNET Ether Network type Network No Total stations Group No Starting 1 0 No Station No Mode Module 1 MNET H Remote master x oono 1 1 E Network parameters Assignment the MNET 10 H remote station network range Module No 1 Setup common parameters and 1 0 assignments Assignment method Points Start Start End Monitoring time 200 Total slave stations X 10ms M station gt A station Parameter name Switch screens xv seting z M station lt A station Fy StationNo x ve Points Start End Points Start End Points Stat End x Points Stat End On line Network range assignment Refresh parameters Interrupt settings 3 PROFIBUS DP settings 32 1000 101F 32 0000 oF 32 1000 101F 32 000 E ov gt E Network parameters MNET 10H refresh parameters Module No 1 Assignment method C Points Start Start End Transfer SB Transfer SW Random cyclic Random cyclic Transfert Dev name Link side Overwrite Transient transmission error history status C Hold PLC side Dev name Points Stat SB 5 LW SB 512
347. s 7 54 7 6 3 Time data write request PROGRAMMING MELSEG ores 7 6 4 Program example 1 Settings The example program in this section uses the following example requests Table7 52 Details of Program Example Item Description Service name Time data write request 2 Assignment of devices in program example The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a Devices used by the QU71PB92V Table7 53 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Description Device Description Time control start response signal Time control start request signal b Devices used by the user Table7 54 List of Devices for the User Description Device Time control execution command c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Device X27 Description Refresh start request K gt Section 7 1 1 Table7 55 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device Device D5000 Description Description Time data write request response area 7 55 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 4 Program example 1 PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres 3 Program example HO X27 Y19 X19 UO Request code is set S Y S pp Y H1602 s G 26784 1602H UO s ov K2005 G26785 Year is set 2005 UO m M A KT 626786 J Month is set July U0 mov K1 G26787 Day is set 1st UO MoV K1
348. s Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Status Alarm a B m Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Manufacturer Specific Alarm 26 Manufacturer Specific This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Alarm Not checked Disables transmission of the Manufacturer Specific Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Manufacturer Specific Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Diagnostic Alarm D This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Diagnostic Alarm ie f Z Not checked Disables transmission of the Diagnostic Alarm S Checked Enables transmission of the Diagnostic Alarm G Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Process Alarm 5 This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Process Alarm eat Not checked Disables transmission of the Process Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Process Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Pull Plug Alarm Thi eee i i it Pull Plug Alarm is setting is avallabie when ihe EP Slave supports this function Q Not checked Disables transmission of the Pull Plug Alarm 2 Checked Enables transmission of the Pull Plug Alarm z Check this checkbox to acquire alarms one by one for each type when the DP Slave detects multiple Allow max one alarm of types of alarms each type Not checked Acquires alarms in order of occurrence Max 8 alarms Checked Acquires generated alarms one by
349. s again replace the QJ71PB92V Initialize the flash ROM he flash ROM F108H FAULT LED ON pte ated oar aes If the same error occurs again replace the i QJ71PB92V Change the module selected in the GX PRMISET LED Parameters of the QJ71PB92D were Configurator DP project to QJ71PB92V and F109H fe written with the QU71PB92D compatible write the parameters cal function disabled e Check Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches lt 3 Section 6 7 e Change the module selected in the GX PAMSETLED Parameters of the QJ71PB92V were Configurator DP project to QJ71PB92D and F10AH fae written with the QU71PB92D compatible write the parameters enn function enabled e Check Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches lt 3 Section 6 7 Unable to read the operation mode Initalize the flash ROM F10BH FAULT LED ON vedisteredito the aa ROM If the same error occurs again replace the l QJ71PB92V PRM SET LED In the parameter settings there is a DP Check the slave parameters and make the setting F10CH flashi Slave whose lO d ta size is set to Obyte again to ensure that the I O data size of each DP asang yte Slave is 1byte or more Initialize the flash ROM PRM SET LED i F10DH Parameteteiror If the same error occurs again please consult your flashing local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem F10EH i ishi i FAULT LED ON Hardware teiliKe Please consult your local Mitsubishi repr
350. s area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 is cleared OVERVIEW 0 I O data communication error or no communication including reserved temporary slave reservation and or not configured stations 1 Exchanging I O data CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 3 Address b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 23046 5A06xH 23047 5A07H 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 1 1 11125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 DEC HEX a 23040 5A00x 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1m Each bit indicates the n th DP Slave Z 23041 5A011 32 31 30 29 28 19 18 17 g 23042 5A02h 48 47 46 45 44 35 34 33 6 23043 5A03x 64 63 62 61 60 51 50 49 E 23044 5A04n 80 79 78 77 76 67 66 65 23045 5A05x 96 95 94 93 92 83 82 81 1 Bits b15 to b13 of address 23047 5A07u are fixed to 0 Figure 3 14 Slave Status Area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 FUNCTIONS Turning ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 updates the information in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 turning ON 1 the bits of the DP Slave currently exchanging I O data PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION
351. s as shown below depending on the transmission speed Transmission speed is 1 5 Mbps 1 TBi 1 1 5x 10 0 667x 10 s 0 667x 10 ms Transmission speed is 12 Mbps 1 TBit 1 12x 10 0 083x 10 s 0 083x 10 ms 4 The Tsdi value described in the GSD DDB file of the QU71PB92V The Tsdi value varies as shown below depending on the transmission speed Refer to 3 for the unit TBit Table3 24 Request Response Processing Time of DP Master Request Response Processing Time of DP Master 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 93 75kbps 187 5kbps 70TBit 500kbps 150Tsit 1 5Mbps 200TBit 3Mbps 250Tesit 6Mbps 450Tesit 12Mbps 800TBit 3 59 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time 3 SPECIFICATIONS M aLS AG A i b Bus cycle time calculation example The following shows a calculation example of the bus cycle time Transmission speed 1 5Mbps DP Master FDL address 0 No of DP Slave 3 modules QJ71PB92V Bus terminator PROFIBUS DP Bus terminator g 0 DP Slave FDL address 1 AJ95TB2 16T Input 0 points Output 16 points DP Slave FDL address 2 AJ95TB3 16D Input 16 points Output 0 points DP Slave FDL address 3 QJ71PB93D Input 1 word Output 2 words AJ95TB2 16T AJ95TB3 16D QU71PB93D Output data size byte 2 0 4 Input data size byte 0 2 2 Figure 3 39 System Configuration Example 1 MSI ms value MSl ms 80 x 100 us 8 0 ms
352. s ditions f g cio Ko casee J at gon itions for system switching UO ae uov HI G23649 1 Sets a system switching DP Slave 1st UO ee wov H2 G23608 1 Specifies the 2nd temporary l slave reservation a zZz RST M400 Turn OFF the initial 2 setting execution command 2 SW1518 XIB XID XIF e initializes Diagnostic inf r a MOV HBS G2080 gro Sue Ne J 1 invalid setting area MOY Ko SA 1 Sets 0 in Diagnostic info non I notification time setting area A UO a Bier uov KO 623648 a ee for system 3 2 uo y Sae Sets a system switchin ag ee inl Bee AG DP Slave 1st get fe E eee rae Thov H2 623608 Specifies the 2nd temporary I a ee el a i a a a ee A SVE FESErVation FD i Ke J Turn OFF Y00 to Y1F 9 XIB X1D XIF X20 x0 UO i T E H f FMOVP KO 614336 K96 Writes the initial m output data value x W Yo m co X i ie sai me I O data exchange i oa 1 1 if o 5 start processing Program for DP Slave control lt gt gt Section 7 1 1 2 a ee ee 0 a ee ee ee Fay ey me ees Sa ce ee eh yee ee Zz Program for reading diagnostic information lt gt Section 7 1 1 2 b Z Ss es ee ee fe ee eee fe ee ee ee eee ee a ee ee Pe ee S END T Figure 7 35 I O Data Exchange Program Example Automatic Refresh DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 76 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples ie PROGRAMMING
353. s for reading diagnostic information Data in the following devices are tracking transferred e Start command device by which the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 is turned ON Start command device by which the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 is turned ON Table7 73 Devices Tracked in the Program Example for Reading Diagnostic Information Device Description Device Description X21 Communication error detection reset command X22 Communication error area clear command 7 75 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples eee eee eee eee ie i i a PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA cries 5 Program examples a When using automatic refresh This section explains a program for the case where the QJ71PB92V z communicates with DP Slaves using automatic refresh 1 Setting automatic refresh parameters The setting is the same as in Section 7 1 1 1 t fc 2 I O data exchange program example Automatic refresh 7 Not needed when the initial setting is not changed g as ih FSET W400 J Turn ON the initial E setting execution command W400 rin XID KIF Ko 10 Lo Initializes Diagnostic info 2 l ot F af Hov pan G20 invalid in 6 xt Thov K20 ene 1 Initializes Diagnostic info non I notification time setting area T ai I
354. s or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi programmable controller MELSEC Q series Please read this manual carefully before use to develop familiarity with the functions and performance and use it correctly CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS eeeeesceosecececececececeocococoeccocecocococececececececeococococccocecosococecososocececesoseoeoe ABOUT MANUALS seeeecesesocesecececeocceococococococececocosocecececcocceocococososocececosocececececcoeceococosososococee A COMFORMANCE TO THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES eeeccseseccccccccccccsccccscccccccccscccccces A 11 ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ecseseeseccccccccccccccccccccccccscccscccccccccsscsccsscccees 12 GLOSSARY A Oe oe eee oe A 13 PACKING LIS T cecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccc ccc ccccc ccc cc ccc cc ccc cc cece cecco ccc cc ccc cc ccc coccecccooccoccccoccococcce 14 CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 6 1 1 Features cococoooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 15 2 1 Applicable System ccoocooooooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000
355. s set by Slave Specific Transfer i e a when changing the refresh target device on a per DP Slave basis the following i jac number of automatic refresh parameters can be set per QU71PB92V z Max number of settings Number of connected DP Slaves x 2 3 Ki vo Mapping 3 2 Set auto refresh Buffer MIT Ackh p osreezy l a parameters for No of DP o Gea 1 Slave_Nr_ool Q771PBseD D5000 Slaves connected to T 2 QU71PB92V x 2 ous f 16 Word In 16 Word Out c n Zz G amp f O rm N Cancel 2 PLC and GX IEC Developer GID Settings o Set the total 9 GX IEC Developer GID Settings number of the 2 Buffer Devices Ai Slave Specific Transfer Please assign addresses in 1 0 Mapping P Fa awo 265 C Block Transfer th coo 5300 nOs gan Comm Trouble Area D10000 to D10249 8Eb Up to 3 auto refresh SAOR V Egtd Comm Trouble Area D10300 to D10426 IV Slave Status Area D10500 to D10524 Data Transfer using parameters can be set C Copy Instructions AutoRefresh Update of CPU C AutoRefresh Update of GID Project eg zZ E m W no vm W E W lt rs lt a Cancel Figure 6 13 Number of Automatic Refresh Parameter Settings When Set by Slave Specific Transfer PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 23 6 6 4 Number of set automatic refresh parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEG TA ores 6 7 Parameter Setting by
356. ss 1 26 4 no Zz O amp 9 W D D Bus terminator Bus terminator Figure 7 2 System Configuration Example for I O Data Exchange 1 Modules are installed in order from slot 0 as shown in the figure and the following start I O Nos T are to be set 5 8 Zz 140 Assignment T ous Figure 7 3 I O Assignment in Program Example z g Z eon Table7 2 Assignment of Input and Output Signals a S 2 SFE i QJ71PB92V X00 to X1F YOO to Y1F QX41 X20 to X3F PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 2 PROGRAMMING 2 Settings a QJ71PB92V settings Table7 3 QJ71PB92V Settings Item FDL address MELSEC TA cries Description FDL address 0 Transmission speed 1 5 Mbps Operation mode Communication mode mode 3 O data area for FDL address 1 Buffer memory Input data area for mode 3 6144 1800H to 6239 185FH Output data area for mode 3 14336 3800H to 14431 385FH V O data area for FDL address 2 Buffer memory b DP Slave Settings Input data area for mode 3 6240 18604 Output data area for mode 3 14332 3860H Table7 4 DP Slave Settings 1st module Item FDL address Description FDL address 1 Input data size 96 words 192 bytes O data size Output data size 96 words 192 bytes Table7 5 DP Slave Settings 2nd module Item D
357. stant Item Set Value Baton pass status TO T2 Cyclic transmission status Parameter communication status T1 T3 T4 Sequence scan time x 4 or more PARAMETER SETTING Sequence scan time x 3 or more 1 To prevent control from stopping even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a cable problem noise etc Note that 4 and 3 represent standard values POINT For details of the interlock program for the MELSECNET H remote master station and remote I O station refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 62 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres b I O data exchange program example E POINT After execution of the REMFR REMTO instruction it requires several scans until read write of actual data is completed Not required when initial settings are not changed w3o0 X101B X101D XidiF xT000 Y1000 1 1 aa t MOVP H2B9 D6000 e gt KO gt 7P RENTO H KI K1 HO K2080 D6000 K1 M1000 x Initializing Diagnostic information invalid setting area Initializing Diagnostic information non notification time setting area l M100
358. stic information detection eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 32 Index 2 Slave status area Normal communication detection eeeeeeeesseeeee 3 30 Slave status area Reserved station setting Status esecsscseccseeeeeeee 3 31 Standby master FDL address display area eeeeeee 3 54 System switching evcccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccocece 4 3 System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection seserscceecseceeeeee 3 55 System switching condition setting result area Disconnected station detection eeerseeeecceeceseeeee 3 57 System switching Error ceccccccccccccccccccccccccccccee 3 System switching methods ceccccccccccccccccccccccsee 4 3 System switching LIME eoccccccccccccccccccccccccccccees 3 54 System switching time in redundant system 3 64 T Temporary slave reservation function sseeseeeeseeee 4 27 Temporary slave reservation request area eee 3 51 Temporary slave reservation status area eerseeeeee 3 34 Time control area eeccccccccccccccccccccccccscvece 3 50 3 51 Time control over DP Slaves s seeeeesseeeeesceee0000 4 17 Time control setting request area eseeeeeeeeeeeee 3 50 Time control setting response area eeeeeeeeseesee 3 50 Time control start request signal Y19 sesseeeeeeeee3 16 Time control start response signal X19 esesseeeee 3 16 Time data read FEQUESTereceecccccccccccccccccocccccees 7 49 Time data write request evccccccccccccccccvcscsoccococs 53 Time data write request UTC format
359. structions This program example is based on the system configuration example shown in Section 7 1 Not needed when the initial setting is not changed ais N Turn ON the initial setting execution command 1 Initializes Diagnostic info invalid setting area Initializes Diagnostic info non notification time setting area 1 Specifies the 2nd temporary slave reservation Turn OFF the initial setting I SET M400 M400 X1B XID XIF XO yO UO 1 j t t t Mov H2B9 42080 UO I HOV K20 G2084 U0 MOV H2 G23608 1 RST M400 1 ce heme mm jm mm pm mek nels a s s ses EXECUTION Command XIB X1D XIF X20 Xo UO G14336 Writes the initial output data value I O data exchange xO X1B x1D XIF start processing 1 H r s CMO HO voc X0C BBLKRD execution l TG BBLKRD uo K6144 DO K96 Reading input data HO UO j Femov 623040 D200 k25 Reads Slave status area Program for DP Slave control 5 Section 7 1 1 2 a x0 BBLKWR ion G BBLKAR uo K14336 D100 K96 executo Writing output data Figure 7 10 I O Data Exchange Program Example Dedicated instructions 7 9 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 1 2 Program example using dedicated instructions PROGRAMMING EJPOINT MELS ECLA series Confirm that Consistency is disabled with Autom Refresh enabled Section 6 3 When the automatic refresh and da
360. switching To prevent reexecution perform the following before Global control request signal Y04 turns ON in the new control system M1518 s TT a M Reexecution is prevented RST X25 1 when system switching 4 De E a ml ms ml Sem em mis J occurred ee ee ee ee ee U U M N Figure 7 38 Program Example for Global Control Function 7 81 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 3 Program example for global control function PROGRAMMING M als 26 lA orcs 7 9 4 Program example for acyclic communication with DP Slaves If a system switching occurs the function of the acyclic communication with DP Slaves cannot be continued In redundant systems do not use the acyclic communication with DP Slaves To use the function pay attention to the descriptions given below and fully examine the possible operations in advance 1 Application types and precautions The Acyclic communication with DP Slaves must be utilized for temporary applications If it is used for a constant application system switching causes the new control system to operate in the manner shown in a and b Therefore fully examine the system for any problem 1 Parameter settings of DP Slaves temporary status monitoring etc 2 Constant status monitoring etc a When using Class 1 service When system switching occurs during acyclic communication with DP Slaves and if an error occurs states of communication with D
361. t 0 OH An error code is stored gt Section 9 5 3 b15 b8 b7 bO 1 1H 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value 0000H 7 27 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 4 ABORT service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING M als AG lA orie 7 4 5 Program example 1 Settings The example program in this section uses the following example requests Table7 27 Details of Program Example Item Description Request instruction No Request instruction No 1 Service name READ service Class1_SERVICE DP Slave FDL address FDL address 2 Data length 16 bytes Slot No 0 Index 1 2 Assignment of devices in program example The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a Devices used by the user Table7 28 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X26 Acyclic communication execution command MO Refresh start request L gt Section 7 1 1 b Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 29 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device Description Device Description D200 to oo M100 to Pare Slave status area Normal communication detection Acyclic
362. t DP Slaves It may take several seconds until system switching is completed on the DP Slave side Before setting the watchdog timer of a DP Slave confirm the specifications of the DP Slave 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 37 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 2 Z O 1S Z Le PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TA eries 3 DP Slave output status when the CPUs in the control and standby systems are stopped Communication of the QU71PB92V is stopped Since the communication is stopped a watchdog timer error may occur in the DP Slaves for which a watchdog timer is set and their outputs may be turned OFF Examples for holding the DP Slave s output are shown below Table4 14 Setting Examples for Holding DP Slave s Output Item Description When DP Slave has no Hold Clear function for output data Disable the watchdog timer for the DP Slave Even if the Hold Clear selection for output data is not allowed for the DP Slave its output can be held Example Watchdog timer setting example for QU71PB93D Slave Parameter Settings Model QJ71PB93D Revision Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION AA Slave Properties Name Slave_N _001 FDL Address fi 0 125 T Watchdog Uncheck the box min T_sdr fir 1 255 Group identification number l Gp1 7 Gp2 l Gp3 l
363. t modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP the station type of DP Slaves can be changed to Reserved station temporarily lt _3 Section 4 7 Since there is no need to change slave parameters changing a DP Slave setting to a reserved station is easy 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC TE eries 8 Redundant system can be constructed a Redundancy is available for the QU71PB92V By mounting the QJ71PB92V together with a redundant CPU a redundant system can be constructed Even if the QU71PB92V detects an error the control and standby systems are OVERVIEW switched each other continuing communications lt 3 Section 4 8 Zz fe b System switching is available when an error occurs in the QJ71PB92V or in 7 communication with a DP Slave z0 i mI The systems can be switched when an error occurs in the QJ71PB92V or in 26 communication with a DP Slave e When the QJ71PB92V detects a critical error n 6 Control system Eroii a system Continues communication E QJ71PB92V Le T New standby system New system 9 a A Bus terminator Bus terminator 2 2 O a R E z ale Sge o lt DP Slave QU71PB93D DP Slave ST1H PB g W i 5300 Figure 1 2 When the QJ71PB92
364. t signal YOD ON Restart request O z OFF 3 YOE Use prohibited oO YOF Use prohibited O Y10 Use prohibited O Operation mode change request signal Y11 ON Operation mode change A 2 c in this section OFF Y12 Use prohibited O Y13 Use prohibited O Y14 Use prohibited O Y15 Use prohibited O Y16 Use prohibited O Mi Use prohibited O Alarm read request signal Y18 ON Alarm read request Use prohibited O OFF Time control start request signal Y19 ON Time control start Use prohibited O request OFF Y1A Use prohibited O Y1B Use prohibited O Y1C Use prohibited Oo Y1D Use prohibited O Y1E Use prohibited O a YIF Use prohibited O m O Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models App 10 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEG TA eres 2 Differences in I O signal operations a Communication trouble detection signal reset Y01 and Communication trouble detection signal X01 While the Communication trouble detection signal reset Y01 is ON another communication failure may occur In such cases the QU71PB92D detects the failure again The QU71PB92V does not detect the failure Communication failure 1 Communication failure 2 In the QJ71PB92D Communication trouble detection signal reset Y01 P Communicat
365. t the operation mode of the QU71PB92V to Self diagnostics mode mode 2 by either of the following methods e Set by Module Configuration in GX Configurator DP e Set O2Hin the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 and turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 c When the operation mode is set to Self diagnostics mode mode 2 the self diagnostics is automatically started During execution of self diagnostics the TEST LED is ON or flashing Upon completion of the self diagnostics the LEDs on the QU71PB92V change as shown below storing the test result to the Offline test status area Un G2258 e When normally completed The TEST LED turns OFF e When failed The TEST and FAULT LEDs are ON POINT When using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system and performing the self diagnostic test during system operation set it to Self diagnostic mode mode 2 according to the procedure shown in Section 9 4 3 5 4 Self diagnostics PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION M aL 26 Fel ceries 2 Execution result of self diagnostics a TEST LED OFF When normally completed When the TEST LED turns OFF after execution of self diagnostics this indicates a normal completion OVERVIEW b TEST and FAULT LEDs ON When failed If the TEST and FAULT LEDs are ON after execution of self diagnostics this indicates that the diagnostics failed Check the value stored in the Offline test status area
366. ta consistency functions are enabled dedicated instructions are not processed Mastor Sotim amp Modde GITIFESOY Make sure the box is unchecked OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 1 2 Program example using dedicated instructions FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 10 PROGRAMMING MELSEG TA eres 7 1 3 Program example using the MOV instruction This section explains a program in which the QJU71PB92V communicates with a DP Slave using the MOV instruction This program example is based on the system configuration example shown in Section 7 1 an Not needed when the initial setting is not changed f SH402 ser ii N Tum ON the initial setting execution command M400 X1B x1D XIF X0 YO UO Initializes Diagnostic info 1 at af at Mov Hee ney invalid setting area I UO Initializes Diagnostic info non uov K20 62084 notification time setting area U0 Specifies the 2nd temporar I 1 Specifies the emporary hov E sete slave reservation I RST 4400 I Turn OFF the initial setting J execution command XIB XID XIF X20 XO UO E Writes the initial c k FMOVP KO 614336 K96 E output data value cyo I O data exchange XO X1B X1D XIF start processing n A a A FS 44 gt 7YS S NO Uo 4 TO
367. ta exchange b When I O data exchange is started after turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON The Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns OFF in any of the following cases e When the Data exchange start request signal YOO is turned OFF e When an error causing stop of I O data exchange occurs e When parameters are currently being written to the QU71PB92V from GX Configurator DP e When the operation mode of the QU71PB92V has been changed e When a communication error has occurred on a DP Slave Only when the master parameter Error action flag is checked CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 2 Z O z o i O M a o Data exchange start request Data exchange start Data exchange start request signal YOO completed Data exchange start completed signal X00 l I 4 gt l Exchanging O data I O data exchange stopped FUNCTIONS I O data exchange stopped Figure 3 1 Data Exchange Start Request Signal Y00 Data Exchange Start Completed Signal X00 c Use these signals as interlock signals when reading writing I O data d Write the initial values of the output data to the buffer memory before turning ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION e Turning OFF the Data exchange start request signal YOO clears the information in the following areas
368. tch 1 in the intelligent function module FBOOH FAULT LED ON the range switch setting L gt Section 6 7 Reset the following items e FDL address in the master parameter setting of BEE FAULTLEDON he FDL address of the control masteris 5X configurator DP 3 Section 6 3 Cuplicated with tator the standby masta 5 Switch 1 in the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer lt _ Section 6 7 9 5 Error Codes 9 25 To the next page 9 5 6 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Local diagnostic information of the QU71PB92V Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS EC Q series Error codes FB02H to FB04H Table9 9 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Continued io Z E Q O I ol W faa 0 fad Error Code LED Status Error Description Action Reset the following items e Switch 1 in the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer 137 Section 6 7 e FDL Address in the slave parameter setting of The FDL address of the standby master is FBO2H FAULT LED ON i duplicated with that of a DP Slave GX Configurator DP lt _3 Section 6 5 9 An error has occurred during processing of i i oaee 3 ease consult your local Mitsubishi representative FBO3H FAULT LED ON system switching Control system gt os A ae p a explaining a detailed description of the problem E Standby system Check the wiring status of the bus terminator s and PROFIBUS cable s
369. tching operation mode o zZ e ie n im l fra 0 APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING communication MELSEC TA eries Error codes E400H to E430H 9 5 3 Error codes E4001 to E4FFu Error codes generated during acyclic Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error Code Error Description Action E400H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range E401 The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry H to the local station QU71PB92V E402H The read data length is incorrect Check if the specified read data length is correct and retry Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E403H Read error response actions E404H The slot number is incorrect Check if the specified slot number is correct and retry E405H The index is incorrect Check if the specified index is correct and retry A Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E406H The CommRef number is incorrect retry Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 to Class1 service of Acyclic communication was executed while Sata CAA oni VI unl n E407H A Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in I O data exchange is stopped eee F the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 and th
370. te REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Aug 2005 SH NA 080572ENG A First edition Jun 2006 SH NA 080572ENG B Modifications SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GLOSSARY Section 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 4 3 1 to 3 5 CHAPTER 4 Section 4 1 1 4 1 3 4 2 1 to 4 2 3 4 5 4 6 5 3 5 4 6 1 to 6 3 6 5 6 6 4 CHAPTER 7 to Section 7 1 3 9 4 Appendix 2 Additions 2 3 3 5 3 4 7 4 8 5 2 2 6 7 7 7 7 9 8 1 9 3 9 4 1 to 9 4 6 Appendix 1 Section number changes Section 5 2 gt 5 2 1 Section 7 7 gt 7 8 Section 8 1 to 8 2 gt Section 8 2 to Section 8 3 Appendix 1 to Appendix 2 Appendix 2 to Appendix 3 May 2007 SH NA 080572ENG C__ Rewritten to include the QJ71PB92D compatible function e Modified for descriptions of GX Configurator DP Version 7 02C Change of a term PLC was changed to programmable controller Modifications SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABOUT MANUALS GLOSSARY CHAPTER 1 Section 1 1 2 1 2 4 3 5 1 4 5 4 6 5 3 6 1 6 3 to 6 7 CHAPTER 7 Section 8 1 to 8 3 CHAPTER 9 to Section 9 1 9 3 9 5 1 to 9 5 6 Appendix 1 to 2 3 Additions Section 4 9 9 2 Section number changes Section 9 2 to 9 5 gt 9 3 to 9 6 Japanese Manual Version SH 080571 C This manual confers no industrial property right
371. te executed by dedicated instructions OFF Turning OFF the Data consistency start request signal YOC turns OFF the Data consistency requesting signal X0C and the BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions are not executed b Use the Data consistency start request signal YOC and Data consistency requesting signal XOC as interlock signals for dedicated instructions c When using the data consistency function automatic refresh by the GX Configurator DP turn OFF the Data consistency start request signal YOC Data consistency Data consistency start __ start request request signal YOC Data consistency requesting signal X0C Ie Data consistency function enabled Figure 3 7 Data Consistency Start Request Signal YOC Data Consistency Requesting Signal X0C 8 Restart request signal YOD a If the QJ71PB92V has gone down for some reason the FAULT LED ON the module READY signal X1D OFF turning the Restart request signal YOD OFF ON and OFF again restarts the QU71PB92V b After the QU71PB92V is restarted the status is the same as the one after e The programmable controller is turned OFF and back ON again e The QCPU is reset 9 Operation mode signal X10 This signal indicates whether or not the current operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 Table3 6 Operation Mode Signal X10 ON OFF Status Description ON Other than Communication mode mode 3 OFF Communication mode mode 3
372. ter parameter setting of GX Configurator DP gt 2 c in this section Set the standby master FDL address in the Intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer lt 3 2 d in this section b DP Slave settings Table7 66 DP Slave Settings 1st module FDL address Item FDL address 2 I O data size Input data size 96 words 192 bytes Output data size 96 words 192 bytes Table7 67 DP Slave Settings 2nd module FDL address FDL address 3 I O data size Input data size 1 words 2 bytes Output data size 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 1 words 2 bytes PROGRAMMING MELS c Parameter settings in GX Configurator DP Set the transmission speed Set the control master FDL address Set the I O No of the QJ71PB92V In 3 digits Set the FDL address of the DP Slave Set a Slave Watchdog timer value that meets the calculation formula shown in Section 4 8 5 Set it as a Normal DP Slave lt Master parameters gt UVES Cig Module Vendor Settings QJ71PB92V Revision Baudrate FDL address Starting 1 0 number for action tag Min slave interval Polling timeout Data control time Watchdog Estimated bus cycle time Watchdog for time sync MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 1 5 Mbps Zi 0 0 125 0x0 OxFE0 1 65535 100 ps
373. ter setting mode mode 1 A which this signal is ON is moge made s OFF Other than Parameter setting mode mode 1 diffi t OFF Communication i g erent mode mode 3 Operation mode change completed signal X11 ON Completed O OFF Not completed X12 Use prohibited O X13 Use prohibited O _ X14 Use prohibited O X15 Use prohibited O X16 Use prohibited Oo X17 Use prohibited O Alarm read response signal ie h X18 ON Completed Use prohibited Oo OFF Not completed Time control start response signal ee h X19 ON Completed Use prohibited O OFF Not completed X1A Use prohibited O Communication READY signal X1B ON I O data exchange ready O OFF I O data exchange not ready X1C Use prohibited O 2 App 7 O Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible 1 The watchdog timer error signal code has been changed to X1F Change the corresponding section in the sequence program Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs To the next page APPENDICES MELSEC A eres TableApp 5 Input Signal Comparisons Continued Compa Replacement A1SJ71PB92D tibility precautions 71PB92V 71PB92D s Module READY signal X1D ON Module start completed O OFF Module start not completed X1E Use prohibited O When replacing the A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D refer to 1 shown below Watchdog time
374. the DP Master type Is QJ71PB92D selected for Module on the Master Settings screen of GX Configurator DP 1 Check the settings in the Transfer Setup dialog box 2 Check Module Slot in the Transfer Setup List dialog box Has Transfer Setup been set up in GX Configurator DP 1 Set 92444 for Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches in GX Developer 2 Write the PLC parameters to the QCPU 3 Reset the QCPU or power it OFF and then ON Is 92444 set for Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches in GX Developer Completed Figure 9 4 When the QJ71PB92D Compatible Function id Enabled 9 5 9 2 When Parameters cannot be Written from GX Configurator DP Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG LAY series 9 3 When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible The following shows the troubleshooting procedures when communications between the QJ71PB92V and DP Slaves are not possible Communication with DP Slave is not possible o Z O I a w l a O ia E N lu 2 S Are PROFIBUS cables wired No Check the PROFIBUS cable connections a correctly lt gt Section 5 5 T Yes Is a bus terminator connected to the terminal station of No Check the bus terminator and connect it the network Section 5 5 1 Or is the specified bus terminator T used a zZ Yes Is the PROFIBU
375. the I O data exchange program example data in the following devices are tracking transferred a Devices whose data are tracking transferred by I O data exchange programs Data in the following devices are tracking transferred e Start command device by which the Data exchange start request signal Y00 is turned ON e Start command device by which the Data consistency start request signal YOC is turned ON e Devices that store output data a 1 The devices that store output data are Devices that are set as the automatic refresh target of output data in the automatic refresh setting Devices that are used to store data in the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 Devices whose data are specified as write data of the BBLKWR instruction Tracking transfer is performed only for the devices that store output data Tracking transfer of all areas is not needed Table7 71 Tracking Transfer Devices in the I O Data Exchange Program Example D100 to I O data exchange start command D195 Output data b Devices whose data are tracking transferred by DP Slave control programs Devices which are specified as conditions for writing output data are tracked Table7 72 Tracking Transfer Devices in the DP Slave Control Program Example Device Description Device Description Conditions for write to output data 1st word X31 Conditions for write to output data 2nd word c Devices whose data are tracking transferred by program
376. ther extended diagnostic information exists 23332 5B241 The latest ident No of the DP Slave is stored Initial value 0000x 23333 5B25n to The latest extended diagnostic information max 244 bytes is stored Initial value 00001 23454 5B9En Figure 3 26 Extended Diagnostic Information Area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 POINT 1 The information in Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 is not cleared even if corrective action is taken for the relevant error that has occurred on a DP Slave To clear the information in Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 2 When b11 of the Diagnostic information invalid setting area Un G2080 is set to ON 1 information is not stored in the Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 3 41 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA series 3 4 7 Extended diagnostic information read area This area is used to read the extended diagnostic information from DP Slaves OVERVIEW 1 Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 Set the FDL address of the DP Slave whose extended diagnostic information is to be read Initial value FFFFH Table3 18 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Request Area Un G23456 Set Va
377. tic information area type selection signal Y03 M400 WE X1D X1F x0 YO 1 HO K2080 HO K2084 SET H2B9 K20 RST M400 K1 KI M400 Figure App 8 Deleting the Diagnostic Information Area Type Selection Signal Y03 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC A series b Changing an input start address and an output start address Relevant sample program Section 7 3 X1B x1D XIF X20 x0 ae m gt __ FROMP H 1K2128 D100 KI Y Sit v 1 f Hov D100 z0 a c FROKP HO I K2188 1 D101 K1 N 1 g TROUBLESHOOTING e_o tot z1 Y APPENDICES s TOP HO aj K4Y100 Ki cvo J Change the buffer memory address of the input start address Change the buffer memory address of the output start address INDEX X1B X1D X1F X20 XO ae FROWP HO K22784 D100 KI XN MOV D100 Z0 J a FROMP HO 122912 1 D101 K1 N G Woy D101 z1 J k4Y100 Figure App 9 Changing Input and Output Start Addresses Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models App 16 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEG TA eres c Changing the input area and output area Relevant sample programs Section 7 1 7 2 and 7 4 In the following example the sample program in section 7 2 is replaced
378. tion allows the DP Slave station type to be changed to Reserved station temporarily z Since there is no need to change slave parameters changing a DP Slave setting to a reserved station is easy 1 DP Slaves that can be changed to Temporarily reserved stations 6 Normal DP Slaves can be changed to Temporarily reserved stations E 0 Changing Reserved stations DP Slaves set as reserved stations with slave Eg Q parameters to Normal DP Slave status is not allowed oo Normal DP Slave umuman lene crf z Can be changed 2 O EA Ti il i Normal DP Slave mannaa un EMR n z Can be changed x EEE Normal DP Slave SULT Reserved station Not changed Figure 4 28 DP Slaves That Can Be Changed to Temporarily Reserved Stations 1 In the slave parameter setting of GX Configurator DP Slave is active is unchecked for this DP Slave gt Section 6 5 o Z Q a O Z U PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 7 Temporary slave reservation function 4 27 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LY series 2 Temporary slave reservation specification and cancellation Use the temporary slave reservation function by the following procedures a Specification method 1 Set Normal DP Slaves which are to be changed to Temporary slave reservations in the temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 L gt
379. tion on the Module s Detailed Information screen use GX Developer Version 8 27D or later Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name QJ71PB92V 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot Module Information Module ace Status of External Power Supply Fuse Status Status of 1 0 Address Verify ess Possible 140 Clear Hold Settings Noise Filter Setting Input Type Agree Remote password sett No Em or Code DEC Be Display format Present Error F124 ae ig O HEX f The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under Error contents Disposal Contents Disposal Check Diagnostic information area for diagnostic information generated na HZW Information Diagnostic information was generated on a DP Slave DP Slave and take corrective actions Stop monitor Product information 070910000000000 B Displays the latest error code Displays the error history in the error history and the action against it Figure 9 8 Module s Detailed Information Screen GX Developer 9 5 Error Codes Displays the description of the error code selected 9 12 io Z E Q O ad ol W l faa 0 fad E APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING M LSet Q series 9 5 1 Error codes E200x to E2FFu Error codes generated when reading extended diagnost
380. tive Hardware failure A ane E4D6H explaining a detailed description of the problem E4D7H E4D8H E4D9H E4DAH E4DBH Another Acyclic communication or alarm request is bein E4DCH E 9 Verify that another Acyclic communication or alarm executed to the same DP Slave request has been completed and then retry E4DDH There is no executable resource E4DEH There is an invalid parameter setting Check the parameter settings and then retry To the next page 9 5 Error Codes 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication 9 18 io Z E Q O I ol W faa 0 fad APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING M LSet Q series Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action 1 Check the PROFIBUS cable wiring status and start completion status of the DP Slave and then retry For the start completion status of the DP Slave refer to the manual for the DP Slave i 2 When Acyclic communications have been 1 The DP Slave is not able to respond r continuously executed to the same DP Slave check 2 Because of current processing of a Class2 service ue the execution intervals and retry the DP Slave cannot handle the next service a F For the execution intervals of the Acyclic 3 The INITIATE service has not been executed Sis E4DFH a ae communication refer to the manual for the DP Slave 4 A transmissio
381. to 2 in this section 2 When system switching occurs the FDL address of the QJ71PB92V is changed as shown below Table4 7 FDL Address of the QU71PB92V in System Switching Item FDL address QJ71PB92V switched from control Control master FDL address gt Standby master FDL address system to new standby system QJ71PB92V switched from standby system to new control Standby master FDL address Control master FDL address system These changes can be confirmed in the Local FDL address display area Un G2257 3 System switching is performed and the QJ71PB92V in the new control system continues communication b Redundant system parameters In a redundant system including redundant CPUs write the same parameters to system A control system and B standby system System A System B Control system Standby system i ooo onoo0o ooo Foam Slog Tracking cable In the redundant system including redundant CPUs the same parameters are written to systems A control and B standby Parameters set in GX Configurator DP and GX Developer Figure 4 30 Redundant System Parameters 4 30 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 Functions M als 26 Fel series 2 System switching error System sw
382. to E6FFH Error Code Error Description Action E600H The request code is incorrect Check if the request code is correct and retry After writing clock data from another time master execute E601H No clock data have been written from another time master the time data read request again E602H E603H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure et B E604H explaining a detailed description of the problem E605H a Modify it so that the time master can read it out and then E606H A set value of the time master is invalid retry The UTC secondvalue setinithe Time coniro setting Check if the UTC second value is correct and retry E611H request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 is out of the i range Section 7 6 2 E612H E613H E614H E615H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure a Sot E622H explaining a detailed description of the problem E623H E624H E625H E626H Incorrect Year At the time of write request E627H Incorrect Month At the time of write request E628H Incorrect Day At the time of write request E629H Inconsistent Date At the time of write request E62AH Incorrect Hour At the time of write request Check if the request data is correct and retry E62BH Incorrect Minute At the time of write request E62CH Incorrect Second At the time of write request E62DH Clock data is out of the range At the time of write
383. tored lt Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E403 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 1 When E4034 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H 6 3 3H Detailed error code 2 is stored 37 Section 9 5 3 z 2 When a value other than E403 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 When E4034 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Zz i rf aw O A Detailed error code 3 is stored lt 37 Section 9 5 3 Z F 2 When a value other than E403 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H id p ui Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 a 32 Wz Empty area SED 5 5H to 127 7FH D toene GT Stored value 0000H LoD 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 18 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_ SERVICE This section explains the request and response formats of the WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE 1 Request format Table7 18 Request Format Offset Address Description Set Value 0 OH Set a request code 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE Set value 1401H 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE Set value 1411H 1 1H 1 In WRITE
384. tting in GX The FDL address set as a master parameter is assigned to the Section 6 1 to 6 6 is Configurator DP QJ71PB92V in the control system Standby master FDL address In the intelligent function module switch setting in GX Developer Section 6 7 setting set an FDL address for the QJ71PB92V in the standby system Specify the target DP Slaves for system switching in the System Setting of the target DP Slaves switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 Section 3 4 14 f for system switching ie ae Set if needed This setting is not required when no system switching is to be performed n the event of a communication error with a DP Slave 7 f Set the tracking devices to continuously use the QJ71PB92V Tracking settings stile Section 7 9 to 7 9 7 functions after system switching 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 35 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 2 Z is 1S Z 5 U PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LY series 5 Precautions for using the QJ71PB92V in the redundant system This section explains precautions for the case where the QU71PB92Vs are mounted to a redundant PROFIBUS DP system a Precautions on the QU71PB92V side 1 Function version of the QU71PB92V Use the QJ71PB92V of function version D or later L
385. twork lt 500 kbps 400 m 1312 ft segment 1600 m 5249 ft network a g 1 5 Mbps 200 m 656 ft segment 800 m 2625 ft network 26 3 Mbps 6 Mbps 100 m 328 ft segment 400 m 1312 ft network 3 12 Mbps 1 The max transmission distance in the table above is based on the case where 3 repeaters are used The calculation formula for the transmission distance extended using a repeater s is Max transmission distance m network Number of repeaters 1 x Transmission distance m segment o Z O z o i O Mr o 7 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 Function List The following table summarizes a list of QU71PB92V functions Table3 3 Function List MELSEC TA eries ves Reference Function Description 2 Section PROFIBUS DPVO Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V enabling the I O data exchange of max 8192 bytes I O data exchange g ea uth 4 Section 4 1 1 Note that it is limited up to 124 DP Slaves when the QU71PB92V is used in a redundant system Acquisition of A paa F daone and Diagnostic or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on a DP Slaves g 7 during I O data exchange can be easily acquired using the buffer memory and I O Section 4 1 2 extended d
386. uest OFF bet F z Not used in QJ71PB92V Communication trouble area type selection signal ae Delete the corresponding Y03 Use prohibited ON Fixed type A P OFF Ring type section in the sequence program Global control request signal Y04 ON Global control execution request O OFF Y05 Use prohibited oO Extended diagnostic information read request signal mag ON Extended Use prohibited o diagnostic information read request OFF Y07 Use prohibited O Y08 Use prohibited O Yo09 Use prohibited O Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible To the next page App 9 Appendix 2 Differences between the QU71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC A caries oO TableApp 6 Output Signal Comparisons Continued fe Signal name T Output g Compa Replacement if j AJ71PB92D feo a signal QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V tibility precautions A1SJ71PB92D fe E YOA Use prohibited O YOB Use prohibited O Data consistency start Dedicated instruction valid request signal signal ON Data consistency ON Data consistency 2 by dedicated by dedicated 3 instruction instruction a Y Use prohibited oa ee enabled enabled p O ES OFF Data consistency OFF Data consistency by dedicated by dedicated instruction instruction disabled disabled Restart reques
387. up 3 Group 3 5 DP Slave 1 DP Slave 3 DP Slave n _ o Z Q a O Z U Input image memory data are refreshed at all times by polling lt During UNFREEZE execution Default gt Actual input data are input to the input memory without being changed Normal status PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION lt During FREEZE execution gt Actual input data are input only once to the input image memory at the timing of the FREEZE service FREEZE service Issued within the same group PARAMETER SETTING Input to external device Figure 4 7 FREEZE UNFREEZE ee DOL PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 1 PROFIBUS DPVO Functions 4 9 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEG LY series 2 Group setting The group setting can be made with the slave parameters Slave Parameter Settings in GX Configurator DP Up to eight groups groups 1 to 8 can be set Multiple groups can also be assigned to a single DP Slave Slave Parameter Settings Model QJ71PB93D Revision Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORAT bs Slave Properties Name Slave N 00 FDL Address 7 0 125 l Watchdog min T_sdr 11 1 255 Group identification number v Gpi Gmp2 Gp3 Gp4 Gp5 Gip6 M Gp Grp 8 V Slave is active M Syne Output Freeze Input Initialize slave when failing to respond M Swap 1 0 Bytes in Master Cancel Default User Param
388. urs Due to stop of I O data exchange no output data is sent to DP Slaves Input data received from a DP Slave before stop of I O data exchange are held in the buffer memory of the QU71PB92V I O data exchange is stopped A stop error J occurred DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Figure 4 26 When Error time output mode is Set to Clear EJPOINT Whether or not output data are output from each DP Slave to external devices after stop of I O data exchange differs depending on the setting of the DP Slave For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave b When Error time output mode is set to Hold The QJ71PB92V continues I O data exchange when a CPU stop error occurs The data before occurrence of the CPU stop error are held and they are sent to the DP Slaves Input data received from DP Slaves updates the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V DP Master Class 1 71 A stop error QJ PB92V i I O data exchange DP Slave DP D Slave P Slave Uy The output data before the stop error are held Figure 4 27 When Error time output mode is Set to Hold Co 4 26 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A series 4 7 Temporary slave reservation function Without modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP this func
389. us area Alarm detection Un G26416 to Un G26424 The information on alarm status of each DP Slave is stored in this area b15 a g b14 b13 b12 b11 All stations alarm status Un G26416 This area stores the alarm detection status of all DP Slaves Initial value 00001 If an alarm is detected in any one of the stations in Each station s alarm status Un G26417 to Un G26424 1 is stored in All stations alarm status Un G26416 0 No alarm in all DP Slaves 1 Alarm detected Each station s alarm status Un G26417 to Un G26424 This area stores the alarm detection status of each DP Slave Initial value 00001 If an alarm is detected in any one of the stations and the corresponding bit turns ON 1 in Each station s alarm status Un G26417 to Un G26424 the RSP ERR LED turns ON 0 No alarm including reserved temporary slave reservation not configured and or non alarm ready stations 1 Alarm generated b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6l5f4 3 2 17 Each bit indicates 32 31 the n th DP Slave 17 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 96 95 94 93 92 9
390. us of response to alarm Completion status of response to alarm data No 4 data No 8 b11 0 Failed or not executed b15 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed To the next page PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 36 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries Table7 34 Response Format When Normally Completed Continued Result Buffer memory address 26449 6751H to 26484 6774H 26485 6775H 26486 6776H 26487 6777H 26488 6778H Alarm data No 1 The alarm data that was read by the alarm read request without ACK is stored K Section 7 5 1 2 a A response code is stored Stored value A501H The alarm type is stored Stored value Alarm type A510 Diagnosis alarm type A5111 Process alarm A512H Pull alarm A5131 Plug alarm A514 Status alarm A5151 Update alarm Manufacturer AS16H specific alarm The alarm status and sequence No are stored b15 b8 b7 to b3 b2 b1 bO 0 3 2 1 1 Alarm details category is stored 00 No additional information 01 Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot 10 No error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 11 Error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 2 Whether individual ACK is required or n
391. used to set the 0 R W 5C60n to 5C68n i ee 3 4 14 station detection switching target DP Slaves 23657 to 23663 System area Use prohibited 5C69H to 5C6Fn RaP System switching condition When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a 23664 to 23672 S n l Section setting result area Disconnected redundant system this area stores the 0 R 5C70n to 50781 D 3 4 14 station detection switching target DP Slaves 23673 to 23807 System area Use prohibited n 5079n to SCFFx gt Usep 23808 Acyclic communication request This area is used to set which request is to be 0 R W Section 5DO00n execution instruction area executed in acyclic communications 3 4 10 23809 to 24832 Acyclic communication request This area is used to set the request data for 0 R W Section 5D014 to 6100 area acyclic communications 3 4 10 24833 to 25119 System area Use prohibited EER 61014 to 621Fx gt se pronionea This area stores the request acceptance status 25120 Acyclic communication request q p Section and execution completion status in acyclic 0 R 62201 result area a 3 4 10 communications 25121 to 26144 Acyclic communication response This area stores the execution result of acyclic 0 R Section 62211 to 6620n area communication 3 4 10 1 This indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequence program R Read only R W Read write executable To the next pa
392. ut ACK 1 Request format Table7 30 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value Set a request code 6620an Set value 1500H 26433 6741H Set the FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm is to be read Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 26434 6742H Empty area Write 0000n Set value Fixed to 0000H 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK PROGRAMMING M als 26 lA orcs 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 31 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result A response code is stored 26446 674EH Stored value A500H 26447 674FH The FDL address of the DP Slave from which alarm was read is stored Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 0 See below Bit Description Bit Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 bO 0 Failed or not executed b4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed AAOS Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed b6
393. ut data delay time Table3 26 Output Data Delay Time Data consistency function disabled Item Transmission Delay Time Normal value Bex 1 5 Max value Bcx2 b Input data delay time o Z O z o i O Ar o 5 Table3 27 Input Data Delay Time Data consistency function disabled Item Transmission Delay Time Normal value Scan Bc Max value Scan Bcx2 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING PARAMETER SETTING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 5 Processing Time 3 62 3 5 2 Transmission delay time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA cries 2 When the data consistency function is enabled The reading writing I O data by automatic refresh is set data consistency function enabled or dedicated instructions the transmission delay time is as shown below a Output data delay time Table3 28 Output Data Delay Time Data consistency function enabled Condition Transmission Delay Time Normal value Scan Bc Scanx2 lt Bc Bcx3 Max value Scanx 2 gt Bc Scanx 2 Bcx2 b Input data delay time Table3 29 Input Data Delay Time Data consistency function enabled Condition Transmission Delay Time 3 63 Normal value Scan Bc Scanx2 lt Bc Scan Bc Max value Scan lt Be lt Scanx 2 Scan Bcx2 Scan gt Bc Scanx 3 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 2 Transmission delay time 3 SPECIFICATIONS M aLS AG Fe cries
394. utput data of 1st module to Output data length 23 bytes 14348 380CH 14349 380Dn Output data of 2nd module N to Output data length N 14348 380CH 14336 3800H 14337 3801H b15 2nd byte of 1st module b8 b7 1st byte of 1st module bO 4th byte of 1st module 3rd byte of 1st module 14347 380BH 22nd byte of 1st module 21st byte of 1st module 00H 23rd byte of 1st module 14352 381 0H Taes 14349 380D1 2nd byte of 2nd module 1st byte of 2nd module 14350 380Ex 4th byte of 2nd module 3rd byte of 2nd module T 14351 380FH 6th byte of 2nd module 5th byte of 2nd module 14352 3810H 00H 7th byte of 2nd module Output data of n th module 18431 47FFH Figure 3 10 Example of Output Data Assignment 1st module 23 bytes 2nd module 7 bytes POINT If a DP Slave with no output data is assigned its space in the output data area is taken over by the next station with output data as shown below Each DP Slave setting 5 1st module Output data Set 2nd module Output data None 3rd module Output data Set 4th module Output data Set Data length 0 5th module Output data Set Assignment result in Output data area of QJ71PB92V 14336 3800n Output data of 1st module Output data of 3rd module Output data of 5th module Because of no output data setting
395. utput on the QU71PB92V The QJ71PB92V error codes are classified by groups with error No The following table lists the groups of the error codes and the areas where they are stored Table9 3 Error Code Classifications Classification Error codes generated when reading extended Storage Location Buffer memory address Extended diagnostic information read response Reference Section E200H to E2FFH diagnostic error informatio area Section 9 5 1 l I E Address 23457 5BA1h Error codes generated during operation mode Operation mode change result area soo E3FFH peel a as ied oor Section 9 5 2 switching Address 2256 8D0n Error codes generated during acyclic Acyclic communication response area E400H to E4FFH ees me eens se Ri E Section 9 5 3 communication Address 25121 to 26144 6221H to 6620h E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms Alarni response area Section 9 5 4 g g Address 26446 to 26768 674EH to 6890H i Error codes generated during execution of time Time control setting response area E600H to E6FFH Sa ade eee Section 9 5 5 control Address 26800 68B0n i ici i ion Local station error information area F100H to F1FFH Diagnostic information of local station l l l Section 9 5 6 QJ71PB92V Address 23071 5A1FH 1 The diagnostic information of the local station can be confirmed on the Module s Detailed Information screen of GX Developer For the confirma
396. ve two FDL addresses for control and standby systems If all of the DP Slaves are this type the number of connectable DP Slaves is 62 g Control system QJ71 Repeaters 1 lt 32 Number of connectable modules per segment PB92V Standby system QJ71PB92V DP Slaves 1 A repeater are counted for both segments O Max no of repeaters Up to 3 repeaters can be used for communication between the QJ71PB92V and any DP Slave d Number of connectable DP Slaves per QU71PB92V Up to 124 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QU71PB92V 2 8 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 1 PROFIBUS DP network configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M als 26 Kel series 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 1 When using only non redundant DP Slaves OVERVIEW a Maximum Configuration With No Repeater Connected DP Master QU71PB92V 2 2 DP Slave 30 Connection points counted 5 as number of modules 2 lt a DP Master Class 1 Standby system DP Master Class 1 so Control system FDL address 0 Standby system FDL address 1 Bi ao Redundant QJ71 eka Redundant QJ71 PPY CPU PB92V PPY Cpu PB92V module module Tracking cable 2 O 3 Segment 1 i D Bus terminator Bus terminator D DP Slave DP Slave Teen DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 31 AS
397. ven if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion Microsoft Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United St
398. vice Buffer memory Reading of Input data from input data Input data area DP Slave e cor mode Device Writing of Output data to output data Output data area DP Slave A for mode 3 Input data No input data Input data E E Output data Output data No output data DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 125 Figure 4 1 I O Data Exchange 1 Reading writing I O data a Buffer memory Read or write I O data from the following buffer memory in the QJ71PB92V e Input data Input data area for mode 3 Un G6144 to Un G10239 e Output data Output data area for mode 3 Un G14336 to Un G18431 b Read write methods Read or write I O data from the buffer memory to devices in QCPU by the following methods Table4 2 Read Write Methods Read Write Methods Setting Location Data Consistency Function Automatic refresh GX Configurator DP Dedicated instructions Seunen Available BBLKRD BBLKWR a poe MOV or FROM TO instructions Sequence program Not available 4 2 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 1 I O data exchange 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEG LAY series 2 Starting and stopping I O data exchange a Write the initial value of the output data to the Output data area for mode 3 Un G14336 to Un G18431 z b Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 c When I O data exchange is started after turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO the Data exchange start completed signal X00
399. w byte Figure 4 16 Data Swap Function 7 Z e e Z U 1 Data swap setting The data swap setting can be made with the slave parameters Slave Parameter gus Settings in GX Configurator DP ate oo Data swap setting must be made for each DP Slave ago wz Mark the Swap I O Bytes in Master checkbox to enable the swap setting for the DP QFE cu gt Slave ann Slave Parameter Settings o Model os 71PB93D Revision Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION aA D oc Slave Properties Name Slave_Nr_001 Z FDL ddress 1 0 125 Watchdog min T_sdr 11 255 Group identification number C Gpl f Gp2 f Gp3 lf Gip4 Gp5 f Gp6f Gp l Gps 2 IV Slave is active M Syne Output I Freeze Input Z jai Initialize slave when failing to respond T a Cancel Default User Param Select Modules Figure 4 17 Data swap Setting GX Configurator DP 2 Z aQ ne a a2 4 4 Data Swap Function 4 19 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TA eries 2 Invalidating or validating data swap setting For DP Slaves that handle data whose word structure is the same as that of the QJ71PB92V invalidate the data swap setting QJ 71PB92V DP Slave Input data Input area Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 H L i H L H L ee lt Data2 Data 2 Data 2 Data 2 Data 2 Data 2 ai H L H W H
400. xchange start request signal Y00 Check the diagnostic information of the faulty DP Slave and take corrective actions When the QU71PB92D compatible function is disabled Check if the corresponding bit is ON 1 in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 When the QU71PB92D compatible function is enabled Check if the corresponding bit is ON 1 in the Slave status area L gt PROFIBUS Interface Module User s Manual Figure 9 5 Troubleshooting When Communications with DP Slaves Are Not Possible Continued 9 3 When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG LAY series 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System This section explains the troubleshooting procedures for the case where the QU71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system 9 4 1 When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching The following shows the troubleshooting steps for the case where output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching Output data turns OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching Is the standby master FDL address No Check the intelligent function module switch setting of the QU71PB92V set correctly Section 6 7 Yes Does the set watchdog timer value No Set a proper watchdog timer value that satisfy the calculation for each DP Slave satisfy the calculation formula shown in Section 4 8

PROFIBUS-DP Master Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents